Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2011 with funding from 
The Library of Congress 



http://www.archive.org/details/gymnasticstextboOOstec 



GYMNASTICS 



A TEX'J-BiJOK OF THE 



GERMAN-AMERICAN SYSTEM OF GYMNASTICS 



SPECIALLY ADAPTED TO THE USE OF TEACHERS AND 

PUPILS IN PUBLIC AND PPtlVATE SCHOOLS 

AND GYMNASIUMS 



. . , EDITED BY 

W." A. STECHER 



Secretary of the Co.m.^iittee ox Physical Training of the 
North American Gymnastic Union 




^6^(5 7 



BOSTON 
LEE AND SHEPARD PUBLISHERS 

10 Milk Street 



SSI 



COPA-RIGHT, 1895, 1896, 1?Y THE 

Normal School of the North America>- Gymnastic Uxion. 



Typography by C. J. Peteks & Son, 

Rockwell and Churchill Press, 

Boston, U.S.A. 



PREFACE 



The lessons contained in this booK are the result of a 
resolution passed at a meeting of the teachers of the North 
American Gymnastic Union. 

Said resolution provided that teachers should contribute 
to a work on the System of German Gymnastics, as taught 
in the gymnasiums of the North American Gymnastic Union, 
and that the presiding officer should assign to sixteen of the 
teachers present each a part of the work. 

The series of lessons as arranged by these teachers on the 
different subjects is hereby offered to all teachers as a guide 
to work by, the name of the au.thor being given with each 
series. Some of the contributors have divided their work into 
separate grades of difficulty, while others have merely kept a 
systematic progression in view. No paper has been changed 
by the compiler, as it was deemed best to give the original pro- 
duction of each contributor. This will enable the reader to 
become acquainted with the manner and order in which some 
of the foremost teachers of the German System of Gymnastics 
arrange their work, and to follow that plan which best suits 
the conditions under which he works, 

WM. A. STECHER. 
St. Louis, Mo. 



CONTENTS 



System and Method Williaui fleck 

XoTES FOR Leaders William A. Steelier 

Marches William A. Stecher 

Free Exercises Henry Sutler . . 

Wand Exercises William Renter . 

Exercises with Clubs F. W. Froehlich . 

Dumb-bell Exercises Henry SwJer . . 

Exercises with Kings TJr. Karl Zapp 

Fancy Steps Christian Eberhard 

Horizontal Bar F. W. Froehlich . 

Parallel Bars A. E. Kindervatcr 

Side and Long Horse William A. Steelier 

Vertical, Inclined, and Horizon- 
tal Ladder l)r. Henry Hartun^f 

Four Inclined Ladders .... Br. Karl Zapp 

HiNGS Dr. Karl Ziegler . 

Vertical Poles William Kopp 

Swinging Poles Dr. Karl Zapp 

Buck William A. Stecher 

Bound Swing Hans Ballin . 

AYhipple Ladder Hans Ballin . . 

Balancing Board Kichard Pertiich 

High and Far Jumping, and Pole 

Vaulting Herm. Hein . . 

Hop, Step and Jump, Highfar 
Jump, Weights, Spear Throw- 
ing D. M. Kroffli . . 

Gymnastic Games Karl Kroh . . . 

Roundel, Marching William A. Stecher 

BOUNDEL with HaND APPARATUS, 

BiNGS, Wands, and Hoops . . Dr. Karl Zapp . . 





PAGE 


. . New York 


1 


. St. Louis . 


18 


. St. Louis . 


22 


. . Chicago . 


. 2G 


. . Davenport 


46 


. . St. Louis . 


98 


. . Chicago . 


117 


. . Cleveland 


130 


. Boston . . . 


ia() 


. . St. Louis . 


148 


. . St. Louis . 


166 


. . St. Louis . 


18() 


. Chicago . 


205 


. . Cleveland 


239 


Cincinnati 


242 


. . Chicago . 


250 


. . Cleveland 


254 


. . St. Louis . . 


257 


. . Carhondale , 


261 


, . Carhondale . 


269 


. . Philadelphia 


272 


. . Chicago . . 


282 



Philadelphia 290 
Chicago . . 299 
St. Louis . . 322 



Cleveland 



328 



SYSTEM AND METHOD OF GERMAN- 
AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



By WILLIAM FLECK 

Formerly director of the Xormal School of Gymnastics of the 
Xorth American Gymnastic Union 



SYSTEM 



Our materials for gymnastic exercises have, evei* since 
their existence, more than a hundred years ago, been elabo- 
rated in every possible direction by persons called upon to do 
so, with varied results. 

From the beginning, experience alone has passed judg- 
ment on the merits or immerits of an exercise, each and every 
addition and improvement being immediately looked upon as 
common property ; a custom which prevails to the present day. 

Since no field of human experience may be regarded as 
closed so long as human beings are being born, we must of 
course look upon gymnastics as incomplete. The German 
System of Gymnastics is at all times ready to admit of im- 
provement, but not until it has been clearly and indisputably 
shown that the proposed improvements are really such, and not 
idle illusions, wdiich, under a high-sounding name and an ap- 
parently scientific garb, are calculated to impress and mislead 
the inexperienced. 



2 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

To give those unacquainted with the German System of 
Gymnastics an insight into the extraordinary wealth and vari- 
ety of its materials for gymnastic exercises, a short, precise 
synopsis of our system as it is in general use to-day and is best 
adapted to practical purposes, is here submitted. It is the sys- 
tem arranged by Adolf Spies, the father of the new tendency 
of German school-gymnastics, and the founder of gymnastics 
for girls, in his work, " The Doctrine of Gymnastic Art," 
Basel, 1840, improved and amended up to the present time 
by his most prominent colleagues and pupils. 

In accordance with this system the materials for gymnastic 
exercises are divided as follows : Free Exercises ; Tactics ; 
Exercises with Apparatus ; Exercises on Apparatus ; Compan- 
ion Exercises (Gesellschafts Uebungen). 

I — FREE EXERCISES 

These are divided into two classes, namely, Free Exercises 
of the first order, and Free Exercises of the second order. 

A — Free Exercises of the First Order. 

1. Exercises in the fundamental position. 

2. Exercises in derived positions. 

3. Exercises in common marching. 

4. Exercises in derived steps. 

5. Exercises in common hopping. 

6. Exercises in derived hops. 

1 — Exercises in a Fundamental Position. 

a. Head exercises. d. Leg exercises. 

b. Arm exercises. e. Turning. 

C. Trunk exercises. /. Compound exercises. 



FREE EXERCISES 6 

B — Free Exercises of the Second Order. 

. 1. Exercises in a kneeling posture. 

2. Exercises in a sitting posture. 

3. Exercises in a lying posture. 

4. Exercises in the leaning stand. 

5. Exercises in the head stand. 

6. Exercises in the hand stand. 

With the aid of this disposition it is an easy matter to find 
and classify all free exercises. To begin with, it is only neces- 
sary to find the possible, simple activities of the designated 
limbs in the fundamental position, and then to arrange suc- 
cessively the possible combined exercises, and lastly to find 
out which simple and which combined exercises may be 
brought out in the other positions. In this manner we get 
a complete, systematic compilation of an abundance of free 
exercises. 

Alfred Maul, Director of the Normal School of Gymnastics 
of the Grand Duchy of Baden at Karlsruhe, Speaker of the 
National Gymnastic Society of Germany, in speaking of this 
matter, says : " This process, however, is anything but inter- 
esting and ]3ractical, if we try to take into consideration, with- 
out distinction, all the exercises of the different members of 
the body, and all positions that can possibly be taken. It is a 
different thing, however, if we limit ourselves to the practical 
exercises and positions of gymnastic value ; for then the great 
mass of exercises of uncertain value, which is too intricate to 
be overlooked, shrinks to a number of useful exercises, which, 
wdiile still quite large, may easily be overlooked and regulated. 
To find these in accordance with the above method is a work 



4 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

less tiresome and dreary ; a Avork which becomes agreeable and 
interesting to every one who delights in discovering good exer- 
cises. And any one who wishes to become so thoroughly ac- 
quainted with the gymnastic materials for free exercises as to 
be able to rely on himself alone at all times for exercises, must 
necessarily do this. He who has never searched for or prac- 
tised new exercises, but has always blindly imitated what 
others have shown him, will never master the materials for 
exercise." 

II — TACTICS 

These are divided into exercises of a rank ; exercises of 
a body ; exercises of a colonnade ; and exercises of a number 
of colonnades. 

A — The Rank. 

A rank can be formed either as — 

1. A front rank, a flank rank, or an oblique rank ; called so 

from the position of each scholar when taking the 
length of a rank as basis. 

2. A straight or a curved rank, in accordance with the 

shape of the rank. 

3. A closed rank or an open rank, taking into consideration 

the distance the single members stand from each 
other. 

4. A rank of tw^o, of three, of four, etc., taking into con- 

sideration the number of pupils in a rank. 

Exercises of a Rank. 
The exercises of a rank are — 

a. Forming and dressing. d. Wheeling. 

b. Opening and closing. e. Forming in the rank. 

C. Marching. /. Combinations of the above exercises. 



TACTICS 5 

B — The Body of Ranks. 
The body of ranks can be formed either as — 

1. A front line, a flank line, an oblique line, or 

2. A front column, a flank column, an oblique column. 

Exercises of the Body of Ranks. 
The exercises of the body of ranks are — 

a. Forming and re-forming. d. "Wheeling. 

b. Opening and closing. e. Forming in the body. 

C, Marching. /. Combinations of the above exercises. 

C — The Colonnade. 

The colonnade can be formed either as — 

1. A line of bodies of ranks. 

2. A column of bodies of ranks. 

3. An oblique (Staffel) of bodies of ranks. 

Exercises of the Colonnade. 
The exercises of the colonnade are — 

a. Forming and re-forming, d, "Wheeling. 

b. Opening and closing. e. Forming in the colonnade. 

C. Marching. /. Combinations of the above exercises. 

The exercises in the colonnade are very numerous, for 
they offer the opportunity of executing movements to the 
body of ranks, to the ranks themselves, and to the individual 
members of the rank. 

D — The Body of Colonnades. 

The body of colonnades is composed of a number of 
colonnades, and can be formed in the shape of a line, a 
column, or an oblique. Forms of a more complex nature 



6 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

than the body of colonnades are seldom used in gymnastics. 
Forms of a mixed nature are also so seldom used, that 
in consideration of the shortness of our synopsis, they may 
be omitted entirely. 

Ill — EXERCISES V;riTH THE APPARATUS 
(Wands, Dumb-bells, Etc.) 

1. Exercises -with the short "wands ; short vrand exercises. 

2. Exercises with long -wands ; long wand exercises. 

3. Exercises w^ith dumb-bells. 

4. Exercises Tvith clubs. 

5. Exercises w^ith balls and weights. 

6. Exercises with short rope and hoop. 

IV — EXERCISES ON THE APPARATUS 

Spiess divides these exercises into hang exercises, sup- 
porting exercises, and hang and supporting exercises, and 
follows a similar plan in finding and classifying them as 
he does with his free exercises ; he distinguishes between 
the main kinds, according to which member of the body 
keeps it (the body) in one of these positions. 

We, however, from practical reasons, do not follow this 
plan ; we grade the exercises (counting from two to nine), 
taking into consideration the apparatus on which the exer- 
cise is performed, making allowance for the increased diffi- 
culty with which the exercise is performed. 

Below follows a classification of exercises compiled by 
Ludwig Puritz, with the assistance of two of our most 
eminent writers on gymnastics. Dr. J. C. Lion in Leipzig, 



EXERCISES ON THE APPARATUS T 

and Dr. K. Wassmansdorf in Heidelberg, in his " Codebook 
for Gymnastic Exercises," which some ten years ago was 
translated into English. So far, Puritz has classified the 
exercises on the following apparatus in a masterly manner, 
and has arranged them in groups in accordance with their 
similarity; and he will no doubt, in due season, supply a 
list and classification of the exercises on the other apparatus. 

A — Exercises on the Balancing Board. 
B — Exercises with Jumping Stands. 
C — Exercises in Pole- Vaulting. 
D — Exercises on the Buck. 
E — Exercises on the Horse. 
F — Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 
G — Exercises on the Horizontal Bars. 
H — Exercises on the Double Horizontal Bars. 
I — Exercises on the Trapeze. 
K — Exercises on the Swinging Rings. 

a. Exercises without a swing. b. Exercises with a swing. 

L — Exercises on the Horizontal Ladder. 
M — Exercises on the Inclined Ladder. 

a. On the upper side. c. On the outer side. 

b. On the lower side. d. On the double ladder. 

N — Exercises on the Climbing Poles and Ropes, 

a. Exercises on the vertical poles. 

b. Exercises on the inclined poles. 
C. Exercises on the climbing ropes. 

— Exercises on the Round Swls-g. 

Of the Gymnastic Exercises with apparatus merely men- 
tioned in -Puritz's Codebook," but widely commented upon 



8 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

by other authors on gymnastics, such as A. Maul, A. Raven- 
stem, J. C Lion, W. Jenny, and others, we here mention: 

P — Exercises with the Long and Short Rope. 

Q — Exercises on the Swinging Board. 

R — Exercises with the Pully Weights. 

S — Exercises on the See Saav. 

T — Exercises on the Vaulting Box. 

U — -Exercises on the Vaulting Table. 

V — Pyraiviids on Ladders, Chairs, and Apparatus. 

W — CoiNiPANioN Exercises. 

a. Wrestlings and Combats. C. Gymnastic Games. 

b. Acrobatics. 



METHOD 9 



METHOD 

Any procedure based on established rules for the purpose 
of attaining the object of gymnastics may be termed a method 
of gymnastics. However, before examining more closely into 
the present prevalent manner of conducting gymnastic exer- 
cises, we must above all things positively define the object of 
gymnastics ; for with different ends in view different methods 
must be follow^ed. In the opinion of a large number of the 
most prominent physicians and educators, the object of gym- 
nastics is : "A harmonious development of the entire body." 

Dr. Muenchenberger hits the nail on the head, when he 
says, " The sole aim of gymnastic art is the harmonious 
development of the body in such a manner that the smallest 
part, itself and for itself, as well as in conjunction with the 
Avhole, is able to actualize and execute the mind's Avill." 
Jahn, the father of our gymnastics, says, "-Gymnastic art 
seeks to re-establish the lost portion of the human edu- 
cation." 

Dr. Friedrich Dittes, the eminent pedagogue, writes as fol- 
lows : " We must not try to make athletes, but must aim at 
the harmonious development of all the bodily forces." And, 
after enumerating the different bodily exercises for gain- 
ing this end, he adds ; " The best of all physical exercises 
are gymnastics, — German gymnastics as defined by Guts 
Muths, Adolf Spiess, and others. No other kind of exer- 
cises does so perfectly develop all the forces of the body as 

9 



1 GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S Tl CS 

do g3aiinastics, properly conducted ; and it may be regarded 
as a great improvement in our educational system, that 
gymnastic exercises are being more and more acknowledged 
as a necessary means for the education of our youth. Gym- 
nastic exercises are to effect a symmetrical development of 
all the members of the body, in order to make possible the 
free use .of the bodily forces, which are subject to the influ- 
ence of the mind. Since this can be effected by positive 
discipline and order only, such as is maintained in our gym- 
nasiums, it follows that gymnastics accustom the youth to a 
proportionate use of their strength, accustom them to punc- 
tuality, to obedience, to self-control, to public spiritedness, 
and to the suppression of arbitrariness and wilfulness ; while 
the sense of decency cultivated in the gymnasium proves a 
valuable counterpoise against the incitation to immoral and 
enervating pleasures. From this we learn that gymnastic 
exercises, judiciously conducted, do not only promote the 
abilities of the individual, but have a tendency also toward 
giving the state a people ready and able to meet any emer- 
gencies in time of peace or war. 

" Here it must be remarked, that girls are as much in 
need of gymnastic exercises as boys are ; for the fragility of 
its women may prove of fatal importance to a whole nation. 
In this respect, the old Spartans discerned and acted judi- 
ciously. The selection of exercises with respect to their 
difficulty must, of course, be suited to the condition of the 
children ; and at no time is it more necessary to individualize 
than when conducting gymnastics. Up to the tenth year, 
games and calisthenics must form the main part of the exer- 
cises. Beware of allowing your enthusiasm for gymnastics to- 



METHOD 11 

run away with you, by giving children difficult and dangerous 
exercises (feats) to perform ; this is dangerous and harmful, 
and tends to bring gymnastic art into disrepvite. The careful, 
observant pedagogue will never forget that gymnastic art does 
not aim to merely teach gymnastic exercises and feats, but 
that it is an essential part of a general education." 

Another well-known pedagogue, Friedrich Disterweg, says, 
'^ Gymnastic exercise is the training of both mind and body." 
As early as 1819 Dr. Fred Strass writes: "Gymnastic exer- 
cise is, therefore, but a supplement to a complete education 
of youth, heretofore (1819) strangely overlooked, and must 
be combined with the other branches of education as a whole, 
if our youth is to receive a uniform mental, physical, and 
moral education, the foundation of the state's welfare." '' If, 
then," says Moritz Zettler, a noted German teacher of gym- 
nastics, " the school places gymnastics in its course of study, 
it but obeys the dictates of nature, the first law of which 
is the uniform development of the whole human being." 
And again he says : '' From this aim of the school, which 
is naturally consistent with human nature, it may be seen 
that physical exercises should be cultivated, not for their 
own sake only, not for the purpose of educating gymnasts, 
but for the purpose of making the body of the pupil healthy, 
strong, and agile ; in other words, to preserve it, and to 
train the pupil to discretion, resoluteness, courage, and endu- 
rance." And again : " To gain this end, the school must 
avoid everything that is not consonant to this. Gymnastics 
in the school must not be regarded as a means for restoring 
the debilitated, enervated, sickly body, or for removing cer- 
tain deformities. School gymnastics must not and cannot 



12 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

be a cure for sickness ; for we take it for granted that the 
pupils of a class enjoy normal health so long as they are 
able to attend school. Should this not be the case with this 
or that child, the physician's diagnosis must decide whether 
the child is to continue its attendance at school or not. The 
school has no time to spend with the diseases of the single 
pupils, for it must never lose sight of its main object. 
Where gymnastics are used as a remedy for an ailment or 
a deformity, the exercises must be carefull}^ selected in ac- 
cordance with the special requirements of the case in ques- 
tion. Every exercise must be carefully examined into, as to 
its suitability in this special case, and it must be performed 
only in accordance with certain sanitary rules. With such 
gymnastics the school cannot deal, for they belong to the 
field of orthopedy ; and to try to transplant them to the 
gymnasium would be just as wrong as it Avould be foolish 
for a physician to prescribe, for a perfectly healthy person 
the continued use of fever-allaying medicines." 

'''• Hinc nice lacrimce ;'^ this is the sore point over which 
so much foolish debating and wrangling is being indulged 
in nowiidays, almost leading one to believe that German gym- 
nastics are something entirely new, and have yet to prove 
their practicability and value as an educational means. One 
of the firet demands of our school is that the teacher who 
instructs our youth in gymnastics must be a man and a 
pedagogue, and not a mere gymnast or physician. This 
qualification was made indispensable by Adolf Spiess, the 
founder of the present system of German school gymnastics, 
more than fifty years ago ; and so strictly has it been insisted 
upon, that teachers of gymnastics without a pedagogical edu- 



METHOD 13 

cation are i-arely met with. The physicians of Germany 
have at no time pushed themselves forward as teachers of 
gymnastics, although a great number of them have diligently 
taken regular gymnastic exercise and do so yet. Concerning 
this, Dr. F. Dittes makes the following appropriate remark: 
'' Instruction in gymnastics must not be isolated, but must 
be closely linked with the whole school education, and form 
an essential part thereof. Mere gymnasts are not wanted; 
the school needs thorough pedagogues ; and it would be most 
desirable if the class-teacher could, at the same time, be the 
instructor in gymnastics ; hence gymnastic art ought to be 
theoretically and practically taught in our normal schools 
for public school teachers." 

The same author, in speaking of the future of gymnas- 
tics, says, " If once the conviction prevails that the youth 
of the present age sit entirely too long on the school-benches, 
deriving therefrom no mental nor moral benefit, but rather im- 
pairing their physical welfare, if once the people shall have 
become conscious of this fact, then sufficient time for gym- 
nastic exercises will be found, and a willingness for procuring 
the necessary place and apparatus will naturally follow." 

For a harmonious development of the whole body, the first 
thing to be learned is the free control of one's limbs, either 
while standing or walking on even ground, or while in unac- 
customed positions, and on extraordinary bases of support. 
This necessitates, besides calisthenics, exercises on the appara- 
tus. Generally speaking, there are two methods of conducting 
the gymnastic exercises of the German school ; but, strictly 
speaking, there are any number of them. The one followed 
formerly, but now almost entirely out of use, is the so-called 



14 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

" Jahn-Eiseleii " method ; the other, which is now in gen- 
eral use, and is frequently combined with the former, is 
Spiess's method. It is hut a short time since that the advo- 
cates of these two methods were bitterly fighting each other ; 
but the controversy was decided in favor of Spiess's method. 
At the present time all gymnastic exercises, with the ex- 
ception of those on the apparatus, both in schools and in 
in gymnastic societies, are conducted after Spiess's method. 
In the lower classes of schools, the exercises on the apparatus, 
too, are conducted after Spiess's method ; while, as a rule, 
in the upper classes and in tlie gymnasium the Jahn-Eiselen 
method is followed. After the old Jahn-Eiselen method 
gymnastic exercises are conducted in divisions ; the class 
is divided into small divisions of ten to fifteen pupils, 
each division being under the supervision of an advanced 
pupil (a leader), who shows certain exercises, supervises 
them, and assists when necessary. When the pupils have 
practised one kind of exercise for a certain time, a general 
change of divisions to a different apparatus leads to another 
kind of exercises ; then comes a game, in which the whole 
class participates, or separate games and contests are in- 
dulged in ; while the teacher looks after good order, and 
sees that the leaders show correctly the exercises, which 
they have been taught in a special lesson for leaders. 

Occasionally the teacher takes all the pupils as one class, 
and conducts a few simple free exercises ; but the exercises 
on the apparatus, and the games, are, of course, at all times 
of the greatest importance. The advantages of this method 
of gymnastic exercises are : — 

" A rapid progress of talented young gymnasts, enabling 



METHOD 1 5 

them to do difficult exercises, so-called inaster-exercises (^Grip- 
feluehungen^ ; and a lessening of expenses." 

Alfred Maul speaks of this as follo\ys : ''If gymnastic art 
has no other end in view than to give our youth an oppor- 
tunity for healthful exercise in the free air, or to give them 
a playground where they may gratify their pleasure in test- 
ing their physical strength and skill, then this method may 
suffice ; but the aim of German gymnastics is a regulated, 
general development of the body. German gymnastics must 
be looked upon as an essential branch of education ; and they 
must, therefore, be conducted in a rational pedagogical man- 
ner. Hence, the combining of a number of classes to one 
class is considered a serious defect in the above described 
method, especially where these classes are composed of per- 
sons in different stages of development. As the pupils of 
a school are graded in classes, so ought the pupils in gym- 
nastics to be graded in classes, according to age, sex, etc." 

Spiess's method is the method of general or class gym- 
nastics. According to it, the pupils are divided after the 
manner of our public schools, and receive gymnastic instruc- 
tions in such a manner as to keep them under the constant 
supervision of the teacher, who himself gives out the exer- 
cises, and, when necessary, shows how to do them, and 
superintends the execution thereof. All the exercises, with 
the -exception of the exercises on the apparatus, are, as 
a rule, performed simultaneously by all the pupils of the 
class, either at the command of the teacher or at counting ; 
while the exercises on the apparatus are generally performed 
simultaneously by one-sixth or one-eighth of the class, on 
command or at counting. 



16 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

While part of the class is actively employed, the others 
may rest from the exercises, which are often very fatiguing, 
and may watch their fellow-pupils while they exercise. 

The advantages of this method of gymnastics are: (1) A 
clear insight on the part of the teacher into the work and 
capabilities of each and every pupil ; (2) an instruction 
according to plan, and a systematic gradation of exercises, 
which is sure to gain positive results ; (3) a confidence- 
inspiring encouragement of timid pupils, a continued incite- 
ment to lazy ones, and a healthy restriction of the over- 
zealous ; (4) an unavoidable accustomance to attention and 
resoluteness ; and, lastly, a refreshing, invigorating pleasure 
in general, regulated work. 

The different kinds of exercises generally observed in 
class gymnastics are classified as follows : — 

1. Tactics in walking and running. 

2. Calisthenics with or without apparatus. 

3. Exercises on the apparatus, generally on an apparatus 

for hanging or supporting exercises, alternating with 
some kind of jumping. 

4. Gymnastic games. 

According to the age and sex of the pupils this or that 
class of gymnastics should receive special attention. A de- 
tailed instruction for the solving of all questions connected 
with a systematic conduction of gymnastic exercises is out 
of place here ; this must be left to a treatise on special 
methods. However, to meet the wishes of such of our 
English-speaking colleagues as are earnestly desirous of 
obtaining a better knowledge of the German method of 
school gymnastics, a list of the papers read on this subject, 



METHOD 17 

during the courses of the Normal School of Gymnastics of 
the German Gymnastic Union of North America, when the 
school Avas situated at Indianapolis, is here given: — 

1. The Necessity of Physical Training. 

2. The Influence of Physical Exercise on our Health. 
3.* The Influence of Gymnastics on Strength and Agility, 

4. The Influence of Gymnastics on the Mental Forces. 

5. The Object of Gymnastic Instruction. 

6. Gymnastic Exercises. 

7. The Gymnasium. 

8. Gymnastic Apparatus. 

9. The Time for Gymnastics. 

10. The Gymnastic School. 

11. The Dress of Gymnasts. 

12. The Teacher of Gymnastics. 

13. The Ruling Principles in Gymnastic Instruction. 

14. Auxiliaries in Gymnastic Instruction. 

15. Duration of Exercises 

16. Form of Exercises. 

17. The Difference between Gymnastics for Boys and 

Gymnastics for Girls. 

18. Tactics. 

19. Free Exercises. (Calisthenics.) 

20. Exercises with Apparatus. 

21. Exercises on Apparatus. 

22. Gymnastic Games. 

23. Grading of Pupils according to Work. 

24. The Course of Study in Gymnastic Instruction. 

The text-books used were M. Zettler's " Method," and 
A. Maul's " Gymnastic Instruction." 



18 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



NOTES FOR LEADERS 

By WM. a. STECHER 

Every large undertaking, especially one lasting a number 
of months or years, must have a definite plan by which it 
is governed, so that its aims may be reached, and that the 
efforts spent in its behalf may not be lost, or drift into 
wrong directions. 

Every class-leader undertakes a responsible piece of work 
when taking charge of the gymnastic work of a class or divis- 
ion. He must endeavor to advance his class systematically. 
He must know how to awaken the interest of his scholars. 

He must bring them to look forward to their gymnastic 
lesson with ever-increasing enthusiasm. He must be a model 
to them in every respect. He must be a teacher in the 
noblest sense of the word. 

To be able to do this a few rules must always be kept 
in mind. They are : — 

1. Try to master every exercise that you intend to teach. 

Practise as much as you can. 

2. Thoroughly prepare yourself for each lesson. 

3. Keep a memorandum of all the exercises practised, 

and make notes concerning their execution so as 
to go forward intelligently. 

4. Repeat all exercises; then alternate and combine them 

Avith new movements, gradually going from easy to 
difficult, from simple to complex movements. 



NOTES FOR LEADERS 19 

5. See that your teaching is interesting to your scholars, 

and give them enough to do. 

6. Arrange your order of exercises so that your schohii's 

leave the gymnasium with the feeling of having been 
benefited. Do not waste your time on movements 
having little gymnastic value. 
T. Gradually bring your scholars to do all exercises with 
the utmost precision and correctness. 

8. Show the exercise you want done in its best form. A 

practical illustration is better than a long explanation. 

9. When exercising on the apparatus, have your scholars 

go to and from the same in an orderly manner and 
in the same order. Have your scholars stand so 
that all can see the exercise. 

10. Gradually increase the difficulty of your exercises. 

Build up, so to say, your exercises from a simple 
movement to a complex, but add no new exercises 
for which the pupils have not been prepared by the 
foregoing movements. 

11. When exercising on the apparatus, stand so that you 

are always ready to give any needed help to your 
scholars. (Before beginning to exercise, see that 
your apparatus is in good order.) 

NOTES ON APPARATUS WO > - 

1. For the sake of brevity, words that are not absolutely 

necessary to explain an exercise are generally omitted 
in the following groups of exercises. 

2. Whenever possible, all exercises should be executed 

left as well as right. (See 6.) 



20 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

3. The terms front, rear, and flank vault are derived from 

the fact, that, while executing one of these move- 
ments, either the front, the rear, or one of the 
flanks of the gymnast is turned towards the appa- 
ratus. 

4. During a side-stand (hang or rest) the width of the 

body is in a line with the length of the apparatus ; 
in a cross-stand (hang or rest) it is at right angles 
to the length of the apparatus. 

5. A scholar stands either with his face, back, or side 

towards an apparatus ; and from these positions the 
terms forwards, backwards, or sideways stand (hang 
or rest) are derived. 

6. The word right (left) as commonly used in the 

description of an exercise, means either the right 
(left) arm, leg, or side of the body. 

7. In speaking of the right (left) side of an apparatus, 

as for instance the long horse, the side that is to 
your right, when the horse stands ready for use 
(the highest part farthest from you) is called the 
right side. This same side is called the right when 
the horse stands crosswise as a side horse. The terms 
off and near side are sometimes used in the place 
of right and left side in exercises on the side 
horse. 
8 When exercising on the side horse the neck (the high- 
est end) is to your left, the saddle in front of, and 
the croup to the right of you. The pommel to 
your left is called the first, the other the second, 
pommel. 



NOTES FOE LEADERS 



21 



ABBREVI^VTIONS. 



r. Stands for right. 

1. Stands for left. 

fw. Stands for forward. 

bw. Stands for backward, 

sw. Stands for sideways. 



0. Stands for or. 
inw. Stands for inward, 
outw. Stands for outward. 
pos. Stands for position. 
opp. Stands for opposite. 



Other abbreviations are found under the head of Club- 



swinging and Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. 



90 



GERM AN- AMEBIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



MARCHES 



By WILLIAM A. STECHER 



The following are simple marches for arranging a class 
in a position from which the ranks can easily be opened for 
free exercises. 



K^s'owx AS Lioi^'s March 



In a single file the scholars march left around the hall, 
then through the middle, wdien, upon reaching the upper 




-^^'^ --''>■ 



Fig. 1. 



Fig. 2. 



end of the hall, they face alternately, right and left, march 
to the corners, then along the sides to the lower end, then 
inward toward each other. Upon meeting, they form ranks 



MARCHES 23 

of twos, and perform tlie above evolutions l)y twos, then by 
fours, eights, etc. Upon command the schohirs mark time 
and halt (Fig. 1). 

The ranks are then opened outward sw. from tlie centre, 
by taking side steps and raising the arms sw. until at full 
distance. The re-forming into single file (a flank rank) can 
be accomplished by reversing the above movements, or by 
facing right and closing the ranks fw. The first rank then 
marches to the left, the others following. 

II 

This is similar to the above, only that the marching is 
not done at right angles, but by countermarches through the 
centre (Fig. 2). 

This march can also be varied by alternately marching 
at right angles and countermarching. 

Open the ranks sideways from the centre, by marcliing 
forward, the arms raised in line with the rank until the 
required distance is found. 

Ill 

In a single file the scholars march left around the hall, 
then through the middle, and, upon reaching the upper end, 
face alternately right and left, march to the corners, then 
along the sides to the lower end. Here the first of each 
rank executes a three-eighths turn inw. and marches fw., 
(obliquely bw. to his line of march at the side) diagonally 
through the hall, the rest following. In the centre the 
two ranks meet and cross through each other. This is done 
as follows : — 

The first of the class passes on, the first of the opposite 



24 



GERM AN- A MEHWA N G YMNA STICS 



side then crosses over behind him, the second of each side 
then follows in the same manner, and so on (Fig. 3). 

The leaders, upon reaching 
the corners, march along the 
sides, and, upon reaching the 
lower corners, again cross over 
obliquely through the hall, 
along the sides, and inward 
towards each other. They 
then form ranks of two, who 
repeat the foregoing move- 
ments, eventually forming 
fours, and eights, etc. 

Let the column march 1. 
around the hall, mark time. 
Open the ranks sw. to the left by taking side 
raising the arms 




-^^'\ i ^ \ // l-i-:^^ 



Fig. 3. 



and halt, 
steps and 
until the 
lished. 



distance is estab- 



IV 



This march is similar to the 
above, with the exception that 
each rank (or column), after 
crossing over and reaching the 
corner, counter marches outw., 
thereby immediately crossing 
over again (Fig. 4). 

After halting, open the 
ranks to the left by marching 
fw., the arms raised until the required distance is found. 




Fig. 4. 



MABCHES 



i^O 



V 

The scholars march left around the hall in single file. 
Upon nearing a corner the command is given to form twos 
by executing a quarter turn 1. As they successively reach 
the corner the scholars face left by twos, and then march 
fw. in a front column composed of ranks of two (Fig. 5). 



1J H-HHHili 



I 



I- t h ^ 



Fig. 5. 

Later the command is given to form fours (eights, etc.). 
This is done by a quarter wheel left of two ranks, as they 
reach the corner. After halting, open the ranks half dis- 
tance (by raising one arm) sw. from the centre. Should 
more room be needed, let the odd files (the ones, threes, etc.) 
take one step fw. or bw. Front ranks can also be opened 
fw. (or bw.) by each succeeding file taking one more step 
fw. then the foregoing. The opening and closing can also 
be done at a run, or by hopping, skipping, etc. 



26 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



FREE EXERCISES 

By henry SUDER 

Free exercises may be practised with or without appa- 
ratus. 

Among the different branches of physical training prac- 
tised in the gymnasium, free exercises are of the greatest 
importance. 

The teacher's programme in a gymnasium generally begins 
with marcliing and free gymnastics. In the latter all the 
muscles of the body ought to be brought into action, there- 
fore it is necessary to practise arm, trunk, and leg exercises 
during a lesson. Contrary to this rule, in this chapter some 
groups of exercises are indicated where arm and leg, or trunk 
and arm, or leg and trunk exercises only are given. The 
author does not presume to dictate every exercise, but leaves 
it to the discretion of the teacher to bring into each lesson 
he gives such exercises as he considers necessary in every 
given case. These exercises and groups of exercises are in- 
tended to show how different movements can be combined. 
The number of good exercises and combinations of exercises- 
is inexhaustible. The teacher of gymnastics may take the best 
exercises from this work, and combine them into such groups 
as he thinks suitable for his class. A few groups of counter 
and dissimilar exercises are also given here. 

A brief explanation of these exercises may be necessary. 
Counter exercises are movements which are practised in 



FREE EXERCISES 27 

opposite directions ; i.e., one division exercises to the right 
or with the right arm, leg, etc. ; Avliile the other division 
practises the same exercise to the left, or with the left arm, 
leg, etc. 

Dissimilar exercises are different movements executed at 
the same time by two or more divisions ; i.e., one division 
bends the trunk forward, the other raises the arms side- 
ways. 

We distinguish between simple and compound exercises. 
Exercises executed by any one part of the body, or by both 
arms or both legs simultaneously, are called simple exercises ; 
while all movements executed by two or more different mem- 
bers of the body are called compound exercises. 

Simple as well as compound exercises may be practised 
in two or more counts. There are different methods of 
forming groups of exercises ; but all groups ought to be 
combined in such manner as to overtax no part of the body. 
Various methods may be followed in teaching the exercises. 

One of these is : — 

The instructor gives the command to begin, and counts 
1-2, or 1-2-3-4, and the command " Halt *' finishes the 
exercise ; or he gives a number of exercises, which are exe- 
cuted in succession ; and also gives tlie number of counts 
for each exercise, as 1-8 or 1-16. 

The pupil then counts for himself, and practises the 
given number of exercises. This method is generally used 
in practising exercises with music, for exhibitions, etc. 

Another method is to practise exercises upon command. 
The pupil practises a given exercise until the teacher indi- 
cates another movement, for example : — 



28 



GERM A N- AM ERIC A N YMNA S TICS 



Raise the arms forward ; Begin ! 

Rise on the toes ; Begin ! 

Bend the trunk f or^vard ; Begin ! etc. 

The pupils continue practising one exercise until tlie 
command to begin another movement is given. 

Every command is divided into two parts ; between the 
command of explanation and of execution a pause must be 
made. The command of explanation is pronounced slowly 
and distinctly, that of execution decisively and sharply. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 
Fundamental position ; Stand ! 

(Fig. 6). 
The heels together, the toes 
turned outAvard to a right angle, the 
knees straight and together, the arms 
at the sides slightly curved, the hands 
a little backward, the thumbs forward, 
the shoulders backward, chest well for- 
ward, and the head erect. 



^^i 



K 




Fig. 6. 



Resting position ; Stand ! Or, In place ; 
Rest! 



Fig. 7. 



Cross the arms forward, the hands grasj^ing the biceps, 
and place the right foot forward. Or, grasp the hands back- 
ward, and place the right foot forward. 



POSITIONS OF THE AimS. 
1. Arms forward ; Raise ! 

The arms straight and level witli the shoulders, the 
knuckles outward (Fig. T). 



FREE EXERCISES 



29 



2. Arms side"ways ; Raise ! 

The arms straight and level with the shoulders, the 
knuckles upward. 

3. Arms upvrard ; Raise ! 

The arms straight, and raised directly upward over the 
head, the knuckles outward. (See Fig. 13.) 

4. Arms side"ways up-ward ; Raise ! 

The arms straight until level Avith the shoulders, the 
knuckles upward ; when raising up- 
ward twist the arms, the knuckles 
outward. 

Reverse when lowering. 

5. Arms to thrust; Raise! 
The forearms must be level with 

the elbows, the hands clenched, the 
knuckles downward, the elbows moved 
backward (Fig. 8). 

6. Arms to strike for-ward; Raise! 
The hands clenched, the knuckles 

upward, the elbows pointing forward and level with the 
shoulders (Fig. 9). 

7. Arms to strike sideways ; Raise ! 

As Exercise 6, elbows pointing sideways. 

8. Arms to cut for-ward ; Raise ! 

The arms bent to an acute angle, the elbows point forward 
level Avith the shoulders, the fingers straight, the knuckles 
outward. (See Fig. 22.) 





Fig. 9. 



Fig. 8. 



30 



G ERMA N- A M ERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



9. Arms to cut sideways ; Raise ! 
As Exercise 8, elbows pointing sidewaj^s (Fig. 10). 

10. Hands on hips; Place! 

Place tlie thumbs backward, fingers straight and for^^^ard 
(Fig. 11). 

11. Hands on shoulders ; Place ! 

Fingers touch the shoulders, the elbows pointing sideways 
and level with the shoulder. (See Fig. 19.) 





Fig. 10. Fig. 11. 

12. Arms backTvard ; Fold ! 

The arms placed on the small of the back. (See Fig. 14.) 

13. Hands back^vard ; Grasp ! 

The hands clasped behind the back, the arms downward 
and slightly bent. (See Fig. 15.) 

POSITION OF THE FEET. 

1. Step position, right (left) leg for-ward ; Place 
Move one leg about twelve inches in the given direction, 
standing firmly on both feet (Fig. 11). 



FREE EXERCISES 31 

2. Step position, right (^left} leg sidew^ays ; Place . 

3. Step position, right (^left} leg backv/^ard ; Place ! 

4. Side straddle position; Stand! 

The feet firmly on the floor, about eighteen inches apart. 
(See Fig. 21.) 

O. Cross straddle position , Stand ! 

Tlie feet firmly on the floor, ahout eigliteen inches apart, 
right or left leg forward. (See Fig. 22.) 

6. Fencing position ; Stand ! 

Execute one-eighth of a turn left or right, and place the 
right or left leg about eighteen inclies forward, and Lend 
the knees to an obtuse angle, the feet firmly on the floor, 
the body erect, and resting more on the stationary leg. 
(See Fig. 20.) Another fencing pos. often practised is to 
keep the stepping leg straight. 

ARM EXERCISES FROM DIFFERENT POSITIONS. 

1. Raise the arms for'ward ; Begin! 1—2. 

2. Raise the arms sideways ; Begin ! 1—2. 

3. Raise the arms forward upvrard ; Begin ! 1—2, 

4. Raise the arms sidew^ays upw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 

See the arm positions. 

5. Thrust the arms forward; Begin! 1—2. 

6. Thrust the arms sideways ; Begin ! 1—2. 
i . Thrust the arms up-ward ; Begin ! 1—2. 

8. Thrust the arms dow^nw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 

In thrusting forward or sideways, the knuckles are upward ; 
in thrusting upward, the knuckles are backward ; in thrusting 
downward, the knuckles are forward. 

9. Strike the arms forw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 



32 



GERM A N-AMER ICA N G YMNA S TICS 



10. strike the arms forward doAvnTvard ; Begin ! 1-2. 

11. Strike the arms sideways; Begin! 1—2. 

12. Strike the arms sideivays dow^nward ; Begin ! 1—2. 

The knuckles downward. 

13. Cut w^ith the arms forw^ard ; Begin! 1—2. 

11. Cut with the arms forward downward; Begin! 1—2. 

15. Cut with the arms sideways ; Begin ! 1—2. 

16. Cut -with the arms sidew^ays do"wnward ; Begin ! 1—2. 
In cutting with the arms forward and downward, tlie 

knuckles are outward. In cutting sideways and downward, 
the knuckles are backward. 

17. straighten the arms for-vsrard ob- 
liquely upTvard ; Begin ! 1—2. 

18. Straighten the arms for-ward ob- 
liquely doTvnw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 

19. Straighten the arms sideways ob- 
liquely upw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 

20. Straighten the arms sideways ob- 
liquely doTvn-ward ; Begin ! 1—2. 




Fig. 12. 



TRUNK EXERCISES. 



1. Bend the trunk forward (Fig. 12) ; Begin ! 1-2. 

2. Bend the trunk backward ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Bend the trunk sidew^ays right ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Bend the trunk sideways left ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Turn the trunk to the right (Fig. 13) ; Begin ! 1-2. 
Turn the trunk to the left ; Begin ! 1—2. 

The feet remaining firm, the u]3per part of the body 
executes a quarter turn. 

< . Turn and bend the trunk forw^ard to the right ; 

Begin ! 1-2. 



o. 
4. 
5. 
6. 



FREE EXERCISES 



33 



8. Turn and bend the trunk forward to the left ! Begin ! 1—2. 

9. Turn and bend the trunk backward to the right ; 

Begin ! 1-2. 

10. Turn and bend the trunk backward to the left; 

Begin ! 1-2. 
Execute the brimk exercises slowly. 



1. 

2. 
3. 
4. 



HEAD EXERCISES. 

Bend the head forw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Bend the head backward ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Turn the head to the right ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Turn the head to the left; Begin! 1-2. 




Fig. 13. 



Head exercises in slower time. 

FOOT AND LEG EXERCISES. 

1. Close and open feet ; Begin ! 1—2. 
Move the feet closely together, the heels 

remain closed. 

2. Rise on the toes. 
The heels and the knees together, the lat- 
ter straight. 

3. Place the right or the left leg forward or obliquely for- 

w^ard ; Begin 1—2. 

4. Place the right or left leg sideways ; Begin 1—2. 

O. Place the right or left leg backward or obliquely back- 
ward ; Begin ! 1—2. 

6. Cross the right or the left leg forward or backward ; 

Begin ! 1-2. 

The toes point downward and touch the floor, the knees 

straight, the weight of the body resting on the standing foot. 

In crossing the legs forward, the toes of the right foot meet 

the toes of the left foot, the right knee slightly bent. In 



34 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G VMNASTICS 



crossing backward, the toes of the right foot meet the heel 
of the left foot. 

T. Raise the right or the left leg forward; (Fig. 14); 

Begin ! 1-2. 

8. Raise the right or the left leg sideways ; Begin ! 1—2. 

9. Raise the right or the left leg backw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 

10. Raise the right or the left leg obliquely forw^ard or 

backw^ard ; Begin ! 1—2. 
The toes of the raised leg point down^yard, and the knee 





Fig. 14. 



Fig. 15. 



is straight. The weight of the body rests on the standing 

leg. 

11. Raise the right or the left knee (Fig. 15) ; Begin ! 1-2. 
Raise the knee to a right angle with the trunk, the leg 

forming a right angle with the thigh, the toes pointing- 
downward. 

12. Bend the knees; Begin! 1-2. 

In bending the knees, rise on the toes, and bend the knees 
outward to form an obtuse or a right angle. (See Fig. 16.) 



FREE EXERCISES 



35 



13. Lunge forward right or left ; Begin ! 1—2. 

14. Lunge sideways right or left (Fig. 17) ; Begin ! 1—2. 

15. Lunge backward right or left; Begin! 1—2. 

16. Lunge obliquely forw^ard or backw^ard right or left ; 

Begin ! 1-2. 




Fig. 16. 




Fig. 77. 



In lunging in any direction, place the moving foot about 
three feet from the other, Avhich remains in place. Both 
feet are placed firmly on the floor, the knee of the sta- 
tionary leg straight, the body erect. 

When practising the trunk, leg, or head exercise, place 
the arms in a suitable position. 



GROUP I. 

Simple Exercises in Two Counts. — Arm, Trunk, and Leg 

Movements. 

PART 1. 

1 Raise the arms forward, Begin! 1-2 4 Raise the arms upward, Begin! 1-2 

2 Bend the trunk forward, 5 Bend the trunk backward, 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately, 

Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 



36 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

1 Raise the arms sideways, 10 Raise the arms sideways upward, 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

8 Bend the trunk sideways to the 11 Bend the trunk sideAvays left, 

right, Begin ! 1-2 Begin ! 1-2 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately,. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, 

Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 



PART 2. 

1 Bend the trunk forward, 7 Bend the trunk sideways right, 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

2 Place the right (left) leg backward, 8 Place the right leg sideways right. 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 9 Exercises 6 and 7 alternately. 

Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 

4 Bend the trunk backward, 10 Bend the trunk sideways to the 

Begin! 1-2 left. Begin! 1-2 

5 Place the right (left) leg forward, 11 Place the left leg sideways left, 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately, 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, 

Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 



PART 3. 

1 Raise the right (left) leg forward, 7 Raise the right leg sideways. 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

2 Raise the arms forward, 8 Raise the arms sideways, 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 

Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 

4 Raise the right (left) leg backward, 10 Raise the left leg sideways. 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

5 Raise the arms upward. Begin! 1-2 11 Raise the arms sideways upward, 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately, Begin ! 1-2 

Begin! 1-4 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, 

Begin! 1-4 

PART 4. 

1 Raise the arms forward, 4 Raise the arms upward. 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

2 Bend the trunk forward, 5 Bend the trunk backward. 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

3 Raise the right and the left leg for- 6 Raise the right and the left leg 

ward alternately. Begin ! 1-4 backward alternately. Begin ! 1-4 



FREE EXERCISES 



37 



7 Raise tlie arms sideways, 10 Raise the arms sideways upward, 

Begin I 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

8 Bend tlie trunk sideways right, 11 Bend tlie triuik sideways left, 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 

9 Raise tlie right leg sideways, 12 Raise the left leg sideways. 

Begin! 1-2 Besin! 1-2 



GEoup ii: 

Simple and Compound Exercises in Two Counts. 

PART 1. 

Arm and Leg Exercises. 

The Hands on the Hi2)S. 



1 Straighten the right arm forward, 

Begin! 1-2 

2 Raise the right knee, 

3 Straighten the right arm forward 

and raise the right knee. 

4 Straighten the left arm forward. 

5 Raise the left knee. 

6 Straighten the left arm forward and 

raise the left knee. 

7 Straighten both arms forward. 

8 Bend the knees. 

9 Straighten both arms forward and 

bend both knees. 



10 Straighten the right arm upward. 

11 Raise the right knee. 

12 Straighten the right arm upward 

and raise the right knee. 

13 Straighten the left arm upward. 

14 Raise the left knee. 

15 Straighten the left arm upward 

and raise the left knee. 
IG Straighten both arms upward. 
IT Bend the knees. 
18 Straighten both arms ujDward and 

bend both knees. 



PART 2. 

Leg and Trunk Exercises. 

Grasp the Hands or fold the Arms backward. 

Cross Straddle Position Right (Left) Leg Forward. 

1 Bend the right knee, Begin! 1-2 G Bend the left knee and the trunk 

2 Bend the trunk forward. backward. 

3 Bend the right knee and the trunk 7 Bend tlie right knee and the trunk 

forward. forward, and the left kiKse and 

4 Bend the left knee. the trunk backward alternately, 

5 Bend the trunk backward. Besin! 1-4 



8 Bend the right knee. Begin ! 1-2 

9 Bend the trunk sideways to the 

right. 



Side Stkaddle Position. 

10 Bend the riijht knee and the trunk 



sideways to the right. 
11 Bend the left knee. 



38 



GERMAN- AMERICAN G YMXASTICS 



12 Bend the trunk sideways left. 

13 Bend the left knee and trunk side- 

ways to the left. 



14 Bend the right knee and the trunk 
and the left knee and the trunk 
sideways alternately, Begin ! 1-4 



PART 3. 



Trunk and Arm Exercises. 
The Hands on Shoulders. 



1 Turn the trunk to the right, 

Begin I 1-2. 

2 Straighten the arms sideways to 

the right (Fig. 18). 




Fig. 18. 



o Turn the trunk to the right and 
straighten the arms sideways 
right. 

4 Turn the trunk to the left. 

5 Straighten the arms sideways 

left. 
G Turn the trunk to the left and 
straighten the arms sideways 
left. 

7 Exercises 3 and 6 alternately, 

Begin! 1-4. 

8 Turn the trunk to the right and 

bend forward. 

9 Straighten the arms sideways. 

10 Turn the trunk to the right, bend 

forward, and straighten the 
arms sideways. 

11 Turn the trunk to the left and 

bend forward. 

12 Straighten the arms sideways. 

13 Turn the trunk to the left and 

bend forward and straighten 
the arms sideways. 

14 Exercises 10 and 13 alternately. 



Remarks. — In raising the arms sideways to the r., the r. 
arm must he straight, the L arm hent to a r. angle, the 
knuckles upw. Instead of turning and hending forw., the 
pupils may turn and bend the trunk backAv. Instead of 
straightening the arms sidew., they may straighten them 
forw. or upward. 



FJi EE EX E li C 1 S ES 



39 



GROUP III. 

Simple Exercises. 

PART 1. 

Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. 

Arms to Thrust. 



1 Thrust the right arm forward ob- 

liquely downward, Begin! 1-2. 

2 Thrust the left arm forward ob- 

liquely downward, 
o Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

Begin! 1-4. 

4 Tlirust both arms forward ob- 

liquely downward. 

5 Bend the trunk forward. 

6 Lunge forward right. 

7 Lunge forward left. 

8 Exercises 6 and 7 alternately. 

9 Rise on the toes. 



10 Thrust the right arm forward 

obliquely upward. 

11 Thrust the left arm forward ob- 

liquely upward. 

12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, 
lo Thrust both arms forward ob- 
liquely upward. 

14 Bend the trunk backward. 

15 Lunge obliquely forward to the 

right. 

16 Lunge obliquely forward to the 

left. 

17 Exercises 15 and IG alternately. 

18 Bend the knees. 



PART 2. 

Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. 

Anns to 27trust. 



1 Thrust the right arm sideways ob- 

liquely downward. Begin! 1-2. 

2 Thrust the left arm sideways ob- 

liquely downward. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 Thrust both arms sideways ob- 

liquely downward. 

5 Bend the trunk right sideways. 

6 Lunge sideways right. 

7 Lunge sideways left. 

8 Exercises 6 and 7 alternately. 

9 Rise on the toes. 



10 Tlirust the right arm sideways ob- 

liquely upward. 

11 Thrust the left arm sideways ob- 

liquely upward. 

12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 

13 Thrust the arms sideways ob- 

liquely upward. 

14 Bend the trunk sideways left. 

15 Lunge obliquely backward right. 

16 Lunge obliquely backward left. 

17 Exercises 15 and 16 alternately. 

18 Bend the knees. 



40 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

GROUP lY. 
Simple and Compound Exercises. — Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. 

PART 1. 

Arm and Leg Exercises. 

Fencing Position (Fig. 19). 

Arms to Thrust. (See Fig. 8.) 

1 Thrust the right arm forward ob- 3 Combine exercises 1 and 2. 

liquely upward, the left arm back- 4 Thrust both arms forward obliquely 
ward obliquely downward, upward. 

Begin! 1-2. 5 Bend the knees. 

2 Lunge forward right. 6 Combine exercises 4 and 5. 

Change Fencing Position (Left Leg Forward). 

7 Thrust the left arm forward ob- 10 Thrust both arms forward ob- 

liquely upward, the right arm liquely upward, 

backward obliquely downward. 11 Bend the knees. 

8 Lunge forward left. 12 Combine exercises 10 and 11. 

9 Combine exercises 7 and 8. 

PART 2. 

Arm and Leg Exercises. 

Fencing Position. 

Ar)ns to Thrust. 

1 Cover the head with the right arm 5 Bend the knees. 

and thrust the left arm backward 6 Combine exercises 4 and 5. 

obliquely downward (Fig. 20), 7 Thrust both arms backward ob- 
Begin! 1-2. liquely downward to the left. 

2 Lunge forward right. 8 Lunge forward right. 

a Combine exercises 1 and 2. 9 Combine exercises 7 and 8. 

4 Cover the head with both arms. 

Change Fencing Position (Left Leg Forward). 
10-18 As exercises 1-9, but left. 

PART 3. 

Arm and Trunk Exercises. 

Side Straddle Position (Fig. 21). 

Arms Upward in Position. (See Fig. 13.) 

1 Swing the arms outward in a circle, 2 Swing the arms outward in a circle 

Besin! 1-2. and bend the trunk forward. 



FREE EXERCISES 



41 



3 Swing the arms inward in a circle. 

4 Swing the arms inward in a circle 

and bend the trunk forward. 

5 Swing the arms sideways to the 

right in a circle. 



Swing the arms sideways to the 
right in a circle and bend the 
trunk sideways right. 

7 Swing the arms sideways to the left 
in a circle. 




Fig. 19. 



Fig. 20. 



Fig. 21. 



Fig. 22. 



8 Swing the arms sideways to the 

left in a circle and bend the 
trunk sideways left. 

9 Swing the arms forward at the 

right side in a circle. 

10 Swing the arms forward at 
the right side in a circle 



and turn the trunk to the 
right. 

11 Swing the arms sideways to the 

left in a circle. 

12 Swing the arms sideways to the 

left in a circle and turn the 
trunk to the risrht. 



GEO UP V. 

Compound Exercises in Two Counts. 
Arm, Leg, and Trunk Exercises. 

PART 1. 
Arm and Leg Exercises. 



1 Raise the arms forward and bend 

the knees, Begin! 1-2. 

2 Raise the arms upward and rise on 

the toes, 
o Raise the arms sideways and bend 

the knees. 
4 Raise the arms sideways upward 

and rise on the toes. 



5 Raise the arms sideways to the right 

and bend the knees. 

6 Raise the arms sideways to the left 

and bend the knees. 

7 Raise the arms sideways upward by 

the right and rise on the toes. 

8 Raise the arms sideways upward by 

the left and rise on the toes. 



42 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G VMNASTICS 



PART 
Leg and Trunk 

Raise the right leg forward, bend 5 

the left knee, and bend the trunk 

backward, Begin! 1-2. 

Raise the left leg forward, bend the 6 

right knee, and bend the trunk 

backward. 
Raise the right leg backward, bend 7 

the left knee, and bend the trunk 

forAvard. 
Raise the left leg backward, bend 8 

the right knee, and bend the 

trunk forward. 



Exercises. 

Raise the right leg sideways, bend 
the left knee, and bend the trunk 
sideways left. 

Raise the left leg sideways, bend the 
right knee, and bend the trunk 
sideways right. 

Raise the right leg obliquely back- 
ward, bend the left knee, and turn 
the trunk to the right. 

Raise the left leg obliquely back- 
ward, bend the right knee, and 
turn the trunk to the left. 



GKOUP YL 

Compound Exercises in Two Counts. 
Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. 

PART 1. 
The Hands on the Hijjs. 

1 One step forward, March! 1-2. 5 One step backward 

2 Bend the trunk forward and 

straighten the arms downward. 
Begin! 1-2. 

3 One step sideways to the right. 

4 Bend the trunk backward and 

straighten the arms upward. 



6 Bend the trunk sideways right and 
straighten the arms sideways. 

7 One step sideways left. 

8 Bend the trunk sideways left and 
straighten the arms sideways. 



After executing one step, 23ractise the trunk and arm exer- 
cises several times. 

PART 2. 
Ar)ns to Cut. 

5 One step backward and forward. 
G Cut the arms forward downward 
and jump to the cross straddle 



1 One step forward and backward, 

March! 1-4. 

2 Cut the arms forward and jump to 

the cross straddle position (Fig. 
22). 

3 One step sideways to the right and 

the left. 

4 Cut the arms sideways. 



position. 

7 One step sideways left and right. 

8 Cut the arms sideways downw^ard 

and jump to the side straddle 
position. 



In practising the cross straddle position, place the right 
and left leg forward alternately. 



FREE EXERCISES 



43 



GROUP VI I. 

Combined Exercises in Two Counts. — Counter Exercises. 

FoKM THE Class into Two Divisions. 

Arm, Leg, and Trunk Exercises. 



PAR 

Anns to 

1 Thrust the outer arm forward and 

hinge forward with the outer leg, 
Begin! 1-2. 

2 Thrust the inner arm forward and 

lunge forward with the inner leg. 

3 Thrust the outer arm sideways and 

lunge sideways with the outer 

4 Thrust the inner arm sideways and 

lunge sideways with the inner leg. 

5 Thrust the outer arm upward and 

lunge backward with the outer 
Jeg. 

6 Thrust the inner arm upward and 

lunge backward with the inner leg. 



T 1. 

'f/irust. 

7 Thrust both arms forward and 

lunge forward obliquely out- 
ward. 

8 Thrust both arms forward and 

lunge forward obliquely inward. 

9 Thrust both arms sideways and 

lunge sideways obliquely out- 
ward. 

10 Thrust both arms sideways and 

lunge sideways obliquely inward. 

11 Thrust both arms upward and 

lunge backward obliquely out- 
ward . 

12 Thrust both arms upw. and lunge 

backward obliquely inward. 



The outer arm or leg of the division to the right is the 
right arm or leg; of the division to the left, the left arm or 



leg. 



Inward means towards the centre. 



PART 2. 
Leg, Trunk, and Arm Exercises. 



Lunge forward with the outer leg, 
bend the trunk forw^ard, and fold 
the arms backward, Begin ! 1-2. 

Limge forward with the inner leg, 
bend the trunk forward, and fold 
the arms backward. 

Lunge sideways with the outer leg, 
bend the trunk sideways out- 
ward, and place the hands on 
the shoulders. 



4 Lunge sideways with the inner leg, 

bend the trunk sideways inward, 
and place the hands on the 
shoulders. 

5 Lunge backward with the outer leg, 

bend the trunk backward, and 
fold the arms forward. 

6 Lunge backward with the inner leg, 

bend the trunk backward and 
fold the arms forward. 



44 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



7 Lunge forward obliquely outward, 

bend the trunk forward, and 
raise the arms forward. 

8 Lunge forward obliquely inward, 

bend the trunk forward, and 
raise the arms forward. 

9 Lunge sideways outward, turn the 

trunk outward, and raise the 
arms upward. 

See Part 1. 



10 Lunge sideways inward, turn the 

trunk inward, and raise the 
arms upward. 

11 Lunge backward obliquely out- 

ward, bend the trunk backward, 
and raise the arms sideways. 

12 Lunge backward obliquely inward, 

bend the trunk backward, and 
raise the arms sideways. 



GEOUP Till. 
Simple Exercises in Two Counts. — Dissimilar Exercises. 

Divide the Class in a First and Second Division or in First and 

Second Files. 

Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. 

PART 1. 

Arm and Trxmk Exercises. 

The Hands on the Hips or the Shoulders. 



1 1st Division straighten the arms 

forward. 
2d Division bend the trunk for- 
ward, Begin! 1-2 

2 1st Division bend the trunk for- 

ward. 
2d Division straighten the arms 

forward . 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

Begin! 1-4 

4 1st Division straighten the arms 

upward. 
2d Division bend the trunk back- 
ward. 

5 1st Division bend the trunk back- 

ward. 
2d Division straighten the arms up- 
ward. 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 



9 
10 



11 



12 



1st Division straighten the arms 
sideways to the right. 

2d Division bend the trunk side- 
ways to the right. 

1st Division bend the trunk side- 
ways to the right. 

2d Division straighten the arms 
sideways to the right. 

Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 

1st Division straighten the arms 
sideways to the left. 

2d Division bend the trunk side- 
ways to the left. 

1st -Division bend the trunk side- 
ways to the left. 

2d Division straighten the arms 
sideways to the left. 

Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 



FREE EXERCISES 



45 



PART 2. 

Compound Exercises in Two Courts. 

Anns to Thrust. 



1 1st Division thrust the arms for- 

ward and bend the knees. 
2d Division tlirust the arms iip- 
M'ard and lunge forward riglit 
and left alternately, Begin! 1-4 

2 1st Division thrust the arms up- 

ward and lunge forward right 
and left alternately. 
2d Division thrust the arms for- 
ward and bend the knees. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 

Begin! 1-4 

4 1st Division thrust the arms upward 

and rise on the toes. 
2d Division thrust the arms side- 
ways and lunge sideways right 
and left alternately. 

5 1st Division thrust the arms side- 

ways and lunge sideways right 
and left alternately. 
2d Division thrust the arms up- 
ward and rise on the toes. 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 



7 1st Division thrust the arms side- 

ways and bend the knees. 
2d Division thrust the arms for- 
ward and lunge backward right 
and left alternately. 

8 1st Division thrust the arms for- 

ward and lunge backward right 
and left alternately. 
2d Division thrust the arms side- 
ways and bend the knees. 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 

10 1st Division thrust the arms down- 

ward and rise on the toes. 
2d Division thrust the arms back- 
ward and lunge forward right 
and left alternately. 

11 1st Division thrust the arms back- 

ward and lunge forward right 
and left' alternately. 
2d Division thrust the arms down- 
ward and rise on the toes. 

12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 



46 GEEM AN- AMEBIC AN GYMNASTICS 



V7AND EXERCISES 

By WILLIAM KEUTER 

The lessons here presented are in form of series, and are 
progressive, each one in itself being complete. In the arrange- 
ment thereof, great care has been observed to adapt them to 
the Avants of good honest '' class- work," as well as to make 
them pleasing to the eye, in the hope of awakening a sense 
for qnick, accurate, and decided action, as Avell as for the 
beautiful in form and position. 

THE WAXD. 

The wand is a round stick, generally of wood or iron. 
Thickness, length, and weight should be in proportion to the 
person using it; viz., always long enough to form the hypote- 
nuse of a right-angled triangle, when the hands have grasped 
it at the extreme ends, and the arms are extended at right 
angles. When of w^ood the thickness varies from three-quarters 
of an inch to one and a quarter inches ; when of iron, from 
five-eighths of an inch to one inch. The wand for the adult 
may weigh from five to eight pounds. 

POSITIONS. 

It is advisable to become familiar with the different positions 
of the wand, and the different ways in which it can be brought 
from one position to another, before attempting to combine the 
movements with steps, lunges, or other motions. In the fol- 
lowing lessons the positions will be treated only in the order 
in which they are used. 



WAND EXERCISES 



47 



PART I. 



FIRST COURSE. 



LESSON I. 
a — Taking of •wand and position in carrying, 
b — Fundamental position. 
C — Resting position. 

d — First or most simple starting position, 
e — Resting position from the starting position, 
f — LoAvering the -wand to the floor (or to the foot). 

g — Resting position; with the ^vand on the floor (or at 
the foot). 

h — Other -ways of lo^wering and raising the wand. 

A — Carrying the Wand. 

The wand should stand on end; when taken from its place, it 
should be carried like a gun, either at the right or the 
left side. The wand should rest on end on the first 
joint of the first finger, with the thumb brought around 
in front, pressing the wand finnly against the shoulder. 

B — Fundamental Position. 

In position ; stand ! (Fig. 23.) 

C — Resting Position with the Wand under the Arm. 
Taken from Position at Shoulder. 

1 Resting position ; stand ! 

In place ; rest ! 

At 1 Grasp the wand with the left hand, the fingers be- 
hind, the thumb in front at the height of the chest, the 
forearm close to the body and nearly or quite in a hori- 
zontal position. 

At 2 Reverse the wand by bringing 
the left hand forward and the 
right upward, passing the shoul- 
der and returning to the chest. 
The wand is allowed to partly 
glide through the right hand. 
The hold of the left hand re- 
mains unchansred. 



3 counts. 




Fig. 23. 



At 3 Press the wand under the shoul- 
der with the left hand, release the 
hold and bring the arm down; 
swing around to small of the 
back, lower the right hand (hold- 
ing the wand firmly) to the thigh, 
and then take the step position 
backward right or forward left. 



48 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



In position ; stand ! 3 counts. 
Fundamental Position from Resting Position Under the Arm. 

2 Move the left hand forward and 



1 Raise the right hand (the wand to 
vertical i^osition), and grasp the 
wand with the left hand at the 
height of the chest with the fin- 
gers in front and the thumb be- 
hind, the elbow the height of the 
shoulders. 



return while the right hand is 
lowered and slides to the end of 
the wand. 
Release the hold of the left hand 
and bring the foot into place with 
a firm step. 



Down in front ; down ! or, now ! 2 counts. 



D — Starting Position Horizontally 

1 The left hand grasps the wand at 

the height of the chest, the thumb 
in front and the fingers behind 
(the arm in position as described 
under C). 

2 Lower to horizontal position, the 

left hand sliding nearly to the 
end, and the right hand turning 
around the other end and moving 
a little from the end; the fingers 



Down in Front. 

to the front in full hold. This is 
the upper hold, in which the 
wrists must be well bent back- 
ward and the back of the hands 
turned upward. Excepting the 
first count or motion, there is no 
material difference between the 
movements of this and those of 
the resting position from the 
wand at the shoulder. 



"Wand under shoulder; resting position; stand! Count 1, 2, 3! 



or 



E 



Wand under shoulder ; in place ; rest ! Count 1, 2, 3 ! 



Resting Position from the Starting Position, and Return to Position 
at the Shoulder. 

To return from the resting to the 
starting position is the same as 



1 Bring the left hand to the chest, 
sliding along the wand, and the 
right hand around the end, the 
first finger under, as described 
under A. 

2, 3 Same as described under C. 



to return to the fundamental po- 
sition, with the exception that at 
3 the left hand does not release 
its hold, but takes the wand down 
to the starting position. 



Note Well. — When this is intended, simply call for 
" Position ! " Let it be nnderstood that '' position," in all 
cases where so used, means or calls for the return to the 
position previous to the change to resting position. 



WAND EXERCISES ' 49 

From the Starting Position to Position at Shoulder. 

To return the wand from the starting position to the shoulder is simply to go 
back in reverse order. 

Raise to the right shoulder ; now ! Count 1, 2 ! 
or — 

To the right shoulder ; raise ! Count 1, 2 ! 

1 Kaise the left hand to the chest, As the left hand is raised, the right 

letting the wand glide through hand is brought close to the side 

the hand. and turned around to the end of 

2 Kelease the hold of the left hand the wand. 

and bring the arm and hand 
down to the side. 

In position ; stand ! 

F — From the Fundamental Position ; the Wand at the Shoulder. Lower 
the Wand to the Floor. 

The wand carried at the right shoul- forward slightly same as the 

der, not leaning backward nor in body. Let the wand point in 

a vertical position, but slanting line to the heel. 

In four counts, wand to the foot ! dow^n ! or, now ! 1, 2, 3, 4 ! 

1 Bring the left hand up and grasp resting close to the wand and to 

the wand at the height of the the other hand. 

chest, the fingers in front, the 3 Bring the left hand down to the 

thumb behind, forearm close to side. 

the body, and nearly or quite in 4 Lower the wand to the standing 

a horizontal position. position on the floor at the foot 

2 Release the right hand and grasp near the small toe. Return to 

the wand at the height of the position at the shoulder in the 

shoulder, or a little higher back reverse order, 

of the hand in front, and elbow 

G — Resting Position, with the Wand on the Floor or at the Foot. 

Another and more simple resting position from the start- 
ing position is : The wand on the floor, or — 

To foot. Resting position ; Stand ! Count 1, 2, 3 ! 

or, — 

The wand on the floor. In place ; Rest ! Count 1, 2, 3 ! 

1 Raise the left hand and bring it to rest on the end near the small 

over to the right side, letting the toe; the left hand is brought to 

wand glide through the right hand rest on the other end of the wand. 



50 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

2 Release the hold of the right hand; over to the left somewhat. Re- 

rest it on the left. turn to the position in reverse 

3 Step position backward right or order, but get the closing step in 

forward left, slanting the wand last. 

H — Other Ways of lowering and raising the Wand. 

The wand may be lowered to the foot in three and four 
counts, as well as when the pupil is a little further advanced, 
by combining the different movements. This will be readily 
understood, and needs no further explanation. 

Also to the starting position, horizontally down in front, 
it may be lowered in three and four counts as well as two. 
For example : — 

1 Raise the left arm sideways. 3 Down in front as described be- 

2 Grasp the wand with the left hand fore. 

(height of the chest or at the top). 

In four counts : — 

1 Raise the arm forward. 3 Grasp as above. 

2 Swing the arm sideways. 4 Down in front. 

Or in four counts : — 

1 Raise the left arm sideways. 3 Glide to the top. 

2 Grasp at the height of the chest or 4 Down in front. 

the shoulder. 

It matters not which way the wand is brought down ; but 
it must be returned in reversed order, and in as many counts 
as it was lowered in. 

For the elementary series it is advisable to take the posi- 
tion horizontally down in front as the starting position. Otlier 
positions are possible, but less available. 

For short, this position will be 'hIowu in front," or '^start- 
ing position," until the other positions come into consideration. 



WAND EXERCISES 51 

LESSON 2. 

Horizontal Position only. Arms in Similar Position. 
Starting position ; down in front ! 

One motion and return to the starting position in two 
counts. 

Simply raising and lowering the wand. 

1 Raise with bent arms in front (the 4 Raise with straight arms overhead 

height of and close to tlie chest). (tlie arms extended at full 

2 Raise witli straight arms in front length). 

and forward (the arms extended 5 Raise with bent arms behind (the 
height of shoulders). wand lying across the slioul- 

3 Raise with bent arms overhead (the ders). 

wand almost touching the head). 

The arms are swung forward at full length, then ])ent, so 
as to bring the wand on both shoulders. 

6 Raise with straight arms behind 7 Raise with straight arms behind 

backward (same as explained in and down. (Same as explained 

Exercise 5, but lower backward, in Exercise 5, but lower the arms 

with the arms extended height of at full length down. ) 
the shoulders). 

If the sixth exercise is found too difficult for beginners, 
it may be omitted. 

Suggestions regarding the Forming of Classes. 

Classes may be formed in regular or alternate lines of 
any numbers. The triangular form of placing is also very 
good and pleasing to the eye. Other forms, such as a circle, 
square, etc., are sometimes used. 

Positions or Poses. 

Pupils will remember a series of exercises better, and 
execute them with more exactness, when they are preceded 
or followed by rests or pauses. It promotes the value of the 



52 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

exercise, tending to cultivate a sense for the beautiful in 
posture, when these rests consist partly or wholly of j^oses 
in some relation to that which has been executed or is to 
follow. Begin to count 1, 2, 3, etc. At 3, take the first 
movement of the first exercise as a position, and remain in 
the same until 13. At 13 return to the starting position, then 
pause until 16. If desired to make the position of shorter 
duration, take it at 5, and return at 11, etc., thereby giving 
more time to think of what is to follow. Then begin the 
first exercise and repeat once or twice. In this manner pro- 
ceed Avith the other exercises, taking poses and movements 
in their order. It is of pleasing effect to wind up with a 
grouping of the class in positions, showing as much as pos- 
sible a resume of the different positions (by different lines) 
contained in the whole series. 

Music. 

When accompanied by music, exercises may be executed 
either in fast or slow time as desired, and to almost any piece 
of music with well-marked time. Exercises, or series of exer- 
cises, may be arranged for a certain specified piece of music, 
or vice versa. Great care should be taken that the character 
of the music be in harmony with the exercises. 

LESSON 3 

Horizontal Position only ; with the Arms in Dissimilar Positions. The 
Wand Parallel and Oblique and Diagonal to the Body. 

Starting Position ; dovrn in Front. 

Note. — When both arms are bent the elbows are pointed 
downward. When only one arm is bent the elbow points as 



1 1 A NB EXER CISES 



53 



much as possible on a line with the wand in horizontal i)()si- 
tion, or at right angles to it, as in vertical positions. There 
are only few exceptions to this rule. By simply giving the 
directions or place to which the hands are brought, the posi- 
tions will in nearly all cases be more uniform and more 
readily understood. It is easier to describe the motion or 
course of each hand than the final position ; the latter being 
the ultimate result of the former, it is advisable to strictly 
adhere to these directions. 



Explanations of Terms "in Front," "in Front Forward," "Behind," 
"Behind Backward," and "Sideways." 

By the term '' in front " is meant as near to the chest as 
possible wdth one or both hands : '^ in front forward," one or 
both arms extended height of the shoulders. The same holds 
good for the positions behind the body. " Behind " is at the 
height of the shoulders and resting near there, and "behind 
backward " is with the arms ex- 
tended backward at the height of 
the shoulders. " Sideways " means 
arms extended sideways at the 
height of the shoulders. In "side- 
ways " one arm is bent, the otlier 
extended. In Lessons 1 and 2 
the hands retain their hold ; that 
is, do not glide along the wand 
except when so stated. 

A — Wand parallel to the botly. 2 counts. 

1 Left sideways, right in front (Fig. 

24.) 2 counts. 

2 Right sideways, left in front. 2 counts. 




Fig. 24. 



54: 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



3 Left sideways, right beliind 

(Fig. 25). 2 counts. 

4 Right sideways, left beliind. 

2 counts. 

B — The wand in an oblique position 
to the body; both arms ex- 
tended. 

1 Left sideways, right in front for- 

ward. 2 counts. 

2 Right sideways, left in front for- 

ward. 2 counts. 

3 Left sideways, right beliind back- 

ward. 2 counts. 

4 Right sideways, left behind back- 

ward. 2 counts. Fig. 25. 

P.S. — Exercises 3 and 4 are less used, and are more difficult. 




C — The wand in an oblique posi- 
tion to the body; one arm 
bent. 
1 Left under the shoulder, the right 
in front forward (Fig. 2C). 

2 counts. 



2 Right under the shoulder, the left 

in front forward. 2 counts. 

3 Left on the shoulder, the right in 

front forward (Fig, 27). 

2 counts. 

4 Right on shoulder, the left in 

front forward. 2 counts. 





Fig. 26. 



Fig. 27. 



Tlie exercises in this lesson are not so well adapted to 
form series alone, but in combining with others they are 



WA NB EXER CISES 



55 



indispensable. They should be well practised. Great care 
should be taken to bring the elbow in a line with the wand, 
and to have the hand of the extended arm turned pahn down 
in the exercises 1, 2, 3 and 4 A. In B both hands retain full 
hold. 

LESSON 4. 

Oblique or Diagonal Position, but not Horizontal. Arms in Dissimilar 
Positions. 



Starting Position 

A — Oblique with one arm bent. 

1 Left in front, right (remains) 

down. See note below. 

2 counts. 

2 Right in front, left (remains) 

down. See note below. 

2 counts. 

3 Left in front, right upward. See 

note below. 2 counts. 

4 Right in front, left upward. See 

note below. 2 comits. 

5 Left behind (near shoulder), 

right remains down. 2 counts. 

6 Right behind (near shoulder "), 

left remains down. 2 counts. 
B — Oblique with both arms ex- 
tended. 

1 Left in front forward, right (re- 
mains) down (bring to the 
thigh). 2 counts. 

Both oblique and diagonal are considered, by many, correct 
terms. We are rather inclined to favor the oblique or 
obliquely, and give it the preference. 

Note. — In the exercises of A the hand of the straight 
arm glides partly along the wand. In exercises 3 and 4 the 
straight arm may point forward upward or sidcAvard upward 
obliquely. In exercises 3 and 4 the bent arm may be behind 
as well as in front. 



down in Front. 

2 Right in front forward, left (re- 

mains) down (bring to the 
thigh). 2 counts. 

3 Left in front forward, right up- 

ward. 2 counts. 

4 Right in front forward, left up- 

ward. 2 counts. 

o Left sideways, right upward. 

2 connts. 

6 Right sideways, left upward. 

2 counts. 

7 Left sideways, right (remains) 

down (bring to the thigh). 

2 counts. 

8 Right sideways, left (remains) 

down (bring to the thigh). 

2 counts. 



vx 



56 



GERMAN-A3I ERICA N G YMNAS TICS 



LESSON 5. 

Horizontal and Parallel. Horizontal and Right Angular and Vertical 
Positions. The Arms in Similar and Dissimilar Positions. 

Movements in which one or both arms cross to the oppo- 
site side ; either straight or bent. One or both hands glide 
along the wand. 



A — Parallel ; both arms cross to the 

opposite sides (Fig. 28). 

1 Left above to right, right below 

to left (cross the arms left over 

right). 2 counts. 



2 Right above to left, left below to 

right (cross the arms right over 

left). 2 counts. 

B — Right angular; one arm crosses 

to the opposite side. 




Fig. 28. 




Fig. 29. 



1 Left forward down, right back- 

ward down, the arms extended, 
or the w^and resting on the hip 
(Fig. 29). 2 counts. 

2 Right forward down, left back- 

Avard down, the arms extended, 
or the wand resting on the 
jjip^ 2 counts. 

C — Right angular; the extended arm 
crosses to the opposite side. 



Fig. 30. 

1 Left under shoulder, right in 

front, forward, over (Fig. 30). 
2 counts. 

2 Right under shoulder, left in 

front, forward, over. 2 counts. 

3 Left on shoulder, right in front, 

forward, over. 2 counts. 

4 Right on shoulder, left in front, 

forward, over. 2 counts. 



WAND EXERCISES 



57 



D — Right angular. The bent arm 
crosses to the opposite side. 

1 Left under riglit shoulder, right 

in front forward (Fig. 31). 

2 counts. 

2 Right under left shoulder, left in 

front forward. 2 counts. 

3 Left on right shoulder, right in 

front forward. 2 counts. 



Right on left shoulder, left in 
front forward. 2 counts. 

Vertical; the wand in front on 
middle line of tlie body. 

Left upward forward, right 
downward forward (the arms 
bent), (present). 2 counts. 






Fig. 31. 



Fig. 32. 



Fig. 33. 



Right upward forward, left down 
forward (the arms bent), (pre- 
sent). 2 counts. 

Left upward forward, riglit down 
forward (the arms straight), 
(present). (Fig. 32.) 2 counts. 

Right upward forward, left down 
forward (the arms straight), 
(present). 2 counts. 

Left in front, right upward and 
glide to left (the arms bent), 
changing underhold. 2 counts. 
This may be executed with 
the arms extended upward as 
well as bent. 



6 Left in front, right down and 

glide to the left (the arms 

bent), may rest on the floor or 

not. 2 counts. 

F — Vertical ; the wand at the side of 

the body; one arm crosses to 

the opposite side. 

1 Left in front over (in front of 

the right shoulder), right down 

(Fig. 33). 2 counts. 

2. Right in front over (in front of 

right shoulder), left downward. 

2 counts. 

3 Left in front over, the right down 

(on the floor). 2 counts. 



68 



GERM A N-A M ERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



V ■-< 



y 



Fig. 34. 



4 Right in front over, left down (on the floor). 

2 counts. 

5 Left in front over (in front of right shoulder), right 

upward (Fig. 34). 2 counts. 

6 Eight in front over (in front of the left shoulder), left 

upward. 2 counts. 



Note. — In all vertical positions in which 
one arm crosses over to the opposite side, the 
hand of the extended arm glides along the 
wand. When practising this lesson it wdll be 
readily seen in which other exercises one or 
both hands glide. There are a few more ver- 
tical positions behind the body ; they will be 
explained in lessons farther on. Being very 
difficult, they require much practice. In the 
five foregoing lessons all essential positions adapted to sim- 
ple exercises consisting of but one movement and return have 
been presented. Accuracy in position, vim and energy in 
execution, should be acquired before the exercises of the 
second course are attempted. 



SECOND COURSE 



59 



PART II. 



SECOND COURSE. 



From the starting position ^'Down in front," two suc- 
cessive motions and return in reverse order. In the fol- 
lowing lessons, the most simple forms are given ; i.e., those 
in which the changes from one position to the other are 
executed in the shortest way possible. 

P.S. — The accent or force of execution is placed on the 
second and fourth counts more than on the others. 



Horizontal and Parallel Position only. 



1 (Bend arms.) In front. 

2 (Straighten arms.) Forward. 

3 (Bend arms.) In front. 

4 (Straighten arms.) Down. 

4 counts. 

II 

1 (Bend arms.) In front. 

2 (Straighten arms.) Upward. 
.3 (Bend arms.) In front. 

4 (Straigliten arms.) Down. 

4 counts. 

Ill 

1 (Bend arms.) In front. 

2 (Straighten arms.) Behind back- 

ward. 

3 (Bend arms.) In front. 

4 (Straighten arms.) Down in 

front. 4 counts. 




Fig. 35. 

IV 

1 (Bend arms.) In front. 

2 (Straigliten arms.) Behind 

downward (Fig. 3.5). 

3 (Bend arms. ) In front. 

4 (Straighten arms.) Down in 

front. 4 counts. 



60 



GERM AX-AMERICAN G YMXASTICS 



(Bend arms.) In front. 
Left sideways, right in front. 
(Bend arms.) In front. 
Down. 4 counts. 

YI 

(Bend arms.) In front. 
Eight sideways, left in front. 
(Bend arms.) In front. 
Down. 4 counts. 

YII 

1 (Bend arms. ) In front. 

2 Left sideways, right behind. 

3 (Bend arms.) In front. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 

YIII 

1 (Bend arms.) In front. 

2 Eight sideways, left behind. 



3 (Bend arms.) In front. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 





IX 


1 


(Bend arms.) In front. 


2 


(Bend arms.) Behind. 


3 


(Bend arms.) In front. 


4 


Down. 4 counts. 




X 


1 


(Bend arms.) In front. 


2 


(Straighten arms.) Behind back- 




ward. 


3 


(Bend arms.) In front. 


4 


Down in front. 4 counts. 




XI 


1 


(Bend the arms.) In front. 


2 


(Straighten the arms.) Behind 




down. 


3 


(Bend the arms). In front. 


4 


Dovrn in front. 4 counts. 



LESSON 2. 
Starting position ; down in front ! 

Note. — Two successive motions and return in reverse 
order. Horizontal position in the first count or movement, 
and vertical, angular, or horizontal position in the second 
count. The position (bent arms) in front need not neces- 
sarily always be the first of two motions and return. It 
may be second, or may be omitted entirely, as is done in 
the next lesson. 



Angular Position. 



II 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Left in front over (see note below). 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Eight in front over. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



iSECOJVI) COURSE 



61 



Vertical Position. 



Ill 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Left ill front over, right downward. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



lY 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward; 

2 Right in front over, left down. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



Angular Position. 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Left in front over, on right shoul- 

der. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 comits. 



YI 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Right in front over, on the left 

shoulder. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



Horizontal Position. 



YII 

1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 



Left in front over 
front over (left 



and right in 
arm crosses 



over the right arm, the hands 
glide). 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



Vertical Position. 



VIII 

(Straight arms.) In front forward. 
Left in front over, right upward. 
(Straight arms. ) In front forward. 
Down. 4 counts. 

IX 

(Straight arms.) In front forward. 
Right in front over, left upward. 
(Straight arms.) In front forward. 
Down. 4 counts. 

X 

(Straight arms.) In front forward. 
Left in front (middle of the chest) 

and right downward. 
(Straight arms.) In front forward. 
Down. 4 counts. 

XI 



1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Right in front (middle of the chest) 

and left downward. 



3 (Straight arms.) In front for- 

ward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 

XII 

1 (Straight arms.) In front for- 

ward. 

2 Left in front (middle of the chest) 

right upward. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front for- 

ward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 

XIII 

1 (Straight arms.) In front for- 

ward. 

2 Right in front (middle of the chest) 

left upward. 

3 (Straight arms.) In front for- 

ward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



62 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



XIY 

1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

2 Left upward, right downward (the 

arms remain extended). 

3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



XV 

1 ( Straight arms. ; In front forward. 

2 Right upward, left downward 

(arms remain extended). 

3 (Straiglitarms. ) In front forward. 

4 Down. 4 counts. 



XYI AND XYII 

Same as XIV. and XV., with both arms bent in vertical position in 
front in the second count. 

Note. — When one hand crosses to the opposite side at 
the height of the chest, the other end of the wand is brought 
under the shoulder or arm (armpit), and the wand glides 
through the hand of the extended arm, which remains in 
nearly the same position. Where the end of the wand is to 
be brought on the opposite or on the same shoulder, a special 
command must be given. 



LESSON 3. 



Starting position ; dow^n in front ! 
Two successive motions and return. Vertical position in 
the first count and oblique position in the second count. 



1 Vertical in front forward (left hand up, 

right hand down). See the note below. 

2 Left down, right sideways. 

3 Return to the first position. 

4 Down. 




4 counts. 



II 



4 counts. 



Fig. 36. 



1 Vertical in front forward. 

2 Right down, left sideways. 

3 Vertical in front forward. 

4 Down. 

Ill 
Vertical in front forward. 
Left sideways, right upward (Fig. 36). 
Vertical in front forward. 
Down. 4 counts. 



SECOND COURSE 63 

lY 3 Vertical in front forward. 

1 Vertical in front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. 

2 Right sideways, left upward. 

3 Vertical in front forward. VII 

i Down. 4 counts. i Vertical in front forward. 

V 2 Left downward, sideways, right 

1 Vertical in front forward. (overhead) behind. 

2 Right upward (overhead), left in 3 Vertical in front forward. 

front forward. (Left hand re- 4 Down (in front). 4 counts, 

mains lowered just a little.) 

3 Vertical in front forward. VIII 

4 Down. 4 counts. ^ ^xt <-• ^ • £ 4- t i 

1 Vertical m front forward. 

^I 2 Right downward, sideways, left 

1 Vertical in front forward. (overhead) behind. 

2 Left upward, right in front forward 3 Vertical in front forward. 

(same as in Exercise 5). 4 Down. 4 counts. 

Note. — All the vertical positions in this lesson must ])e 
practised alternately ; i.e., in the first exercise the left hand 
should be up and the right hand down, and vice versa. 

Care should he taken to have the vertical position in the 
3d count or movement of each exercise the same as in the 
first count of the same exercise. 



LESSON 4. 

From the starting position, '' Down in front." Three suc- 
cessive motions and return. The changes from one position 
to the other in the shortest way possible. 

Remarks. — Although not so much used in the compo- 
sition for exhibitions, it is well to swerve from the ''it so 
seems " established rule of " two, four, eight.'' Movements 
can be taken with two counts of resting following each 
repetition ; or with a '' facing " (one-quarter turn or about 
face) at 7 and 8 ; but they will tax the attention of a class 
in a greater degree than usual. 



64 



GERM A N-A ME RICA JV G YMNA S TICS 



For "motions in reverse," the simpler expression, "return 
motions," will be used in the following lessons. 



1 (Bend arms.) In front. 

2 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 

3 (Straight arms.) Upward. 

5 > Return motions. 
0) 

II 



1 (Bend arms. ) In front. 

2 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 

3 (Straight arms.) Behind back- 

ward. 

5 > Return motions. 
III 



(Bend arms.) In front. 
(Straiglit arms. ) In front forward. 
(Straight arms.) Behind down- 
ward. 

> Return motions. 

ly 

(Bend arms.) In front. 

( Straight arms. ) In front forward. 

Left sideways, right in front. 

[ Return motions. 



(Bend arms. ) In front. 
(Straight arms. ) In front forward. 
Right sideways, left in front. 

> Return motions. 

VI 

(Bend arms.) In front. 
(Straiglit arms. ) In front forward. 
(Bend arms.) Behind. 

Return motions. 

YII 

(Bend arms.) In front. 
(Straight arms. ) In front forward. 
Left (overhead) behind, right 
downward. 

> Return motions. 

YIII 

(Bend arms.) In front. 
( Straight arms. ) In front forward. 
Right (overhead) behind, left (^own- 
ward. 

> Return motions. 



IX 

Remark. — A very neat arrangement of this lesson for 

exhibition is as follows : — 

24 counts of the 4th and 5th exercises alternated, then 8 counts rest. 
24 counts of the 1st exercise, then 8 counts rest. 

24 counts of the 2d exercise, then 8 counts rest. 

24 counts of the Gth exercise, then 8 counts rest. 

24 counts of the 7th and 8th exercises alternated, then 8 counts rest. 
24 counts of the third exercise, then 8 counts rest. 

144 counts of movements, and 48 counts rest. 



SECOND COURSE 65 

LESSON 5. 

From the starting position, '' Down in front," fonr succes- 
sive motions and return. The change from one position to 
the other in the shortest way possible. 

Remarks. — The positions may all differ from 1 to 4, or 
the 4th may simply be the opposite of the 3d. Even this 
rule need not be strictly observed, as in some arrangements 
it may be better to make the 3d motion the opposite of 
the 2d. In this lesson but four successive changes of the 
simplest form will be given. In the following lessons, the 
command ''bend arms" before the command ^* in front " will 
be omitted. Let it be understood that "in front" means 
at the height of the chest (near the shoulder). The ''in 
front " will also be omitted before the " forward." Let it 
be understood that the " forward " means with the arms (or 
one arm) extended at the height of the shoulders, unless 
otherwise mentioned. It makes the command simpler and 
more concise, and will be understood fully as well when the 
pupils have practised all previous lessons thoroughly. The 
word " behind," when used with " backward," may be 
dropped ; in fact, all commands of explanation should be 
limited to the fewest words possible, without cutting or alter- 
ing the meaning. Instead of giving the exercises in full in 
both directions, they will in the remaining lessons be given 
in one direction only ; and when the same are to be exe- 
cuted in the opposite direction, the simple command, " The 
same contrarily ! " or, " Contrary, the same ! " will be given. 

4 Right sideways, left in front. 

1 In front. „ ^ 

2 Forward. 7 ( Return motions. 

3 Left sideways, right in front. 8 



66 



GER^fAN-AMEHICAN G YMJSfA S TICS 



( 



The same contrarily. 

Ill 
In front. 2 Forward. 

Left sideways, right in front, 
liight sideways, left behind. 

Return motions. 
) 

IT 
The same contrarily. 



In front. 2 Forward. 

Upward. 

Left behind, right downward. 



" > Return motions. 

YI 
The same contrarily. 

VII 

In front. 2 Forward. 

Behind. 

Behind downward, or down behind. 

Return motions. 

YIII 

The same contrarily. 

IX 

In front. 
Forward. 
Upward. 
Down behind. 

> Return motions. 



XI 

1 In front. 2 Forward. 

3 Upward. 

4 Left (remains) upward, right in 

front over (in front of the left 
shoulder) . 

Return motions. 

XII 

The same contrarily. 

XIII 

1 In front. 2 Forward. 

3 L'pward. 

4 Left forward, right in front over 

(the end in the right hand is 
brought under the left shoulder). 

r- > Return motions. 

XIV 

The same contrarily. 

XV 

1 In front. 2 Forward. 

3 Upward. 

4 Left downward, right in front over. 

^^ 

^ > Return motions. 

XVI 

The same contrarily. 



The same contrarily. 



XVII 
In front. 2 Forward. 

L^pward. 

Left in front over, and right in 
front over (left arm crosses over 
right, and hands glide towards 
each other somew^hat). 

" > Return motions. 

XVIII 

The same contrarily. 



WAyn EXERCISES 



67 



PART III. 



THIRD COURSE. 



Series of wand exercises combined Avith steps, strides, lunge- 
reverses, lunges, turning and bending of the trunk and knees. 
In this course a number of series are given comprising motions 
or exercises learned in the first and second courses. No at- 
tempt is made at exhausting each and every lesson previously 
learned. The series here offered show simply how to com- 
bine and arrange for a composition, wand-drill, or Roundel. 



SERIES I. 

Starting position; do"wn in front. 
Parallel and easy contra-combinations. 



PART 1. 



With Step Position Forward. 



1 Forward with step position, forward left (on 

ball of the foot) (Fig. 37). 2 counts. 

2 Forward with step position, forward right (on 

ball of the foot). 2 counts. 

3 Forward with step position, forward left (on 

whole foot). 2 counts. 

4 Forward with step position, forward right (on 

whole foot). 2 counts. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause 16 counts, with rest or i30se at 3, and 

recover at 13. 



PART 2 

With Step Position Sideways. 

1 Sideways left, right in front, with 
step position sideways left (on 




Fig. 37. 



ball of the foot). 



2 counts. 



2 Sideways right, left in front with 
step position, sideways right (on 
ball of the foot). 2 counts. 



68 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA STICS 



3 Sideways left, right in front witli 

step position, sideways left (on 
whole foot) (Fig. 38). 

2 counts. 

4 Sideways right, left in front, with 




step position, sideways right (on 
whole foot). 2 counts. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause with rest or pose, and re- 
cover as above. 




Fig. 38. 



Fig. 39. 



PART 3. 



With Step Position Backward. 



1 Upward with step position, back- 

ward left (on ball of the foot 
(Fig. 39). 2 counts. 

2 Upward with step position, back- 

ward right (on ball of the foot). 

2 counts. 



Upward with step position, back- 
ward right (on whole foot). 

2 counts. 
Upward with step position, back- 
ward right (on whole foot). 

2 counts. 
Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, etc., as above. 



PART 4. 



With Trunk Bent Backward. 



1 In front with trunk bent backward 4 In front with trunk bent backward 



(slightly). 2 counts. 

In front with trunk bent backward 

(low). 2 counts. 

In front with trunk bent backward 

(slightly). 2 counts. 



(low). 2 counts. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

'Pause, etc., as above. 



WAND EXERCISES 



09 



PART 5. 

With Trunk Bent Sideways. 

1 Left upward, right in front over (height of the 

stomach), with the trunk bent sideways right 
(slightly). 2 counts. 

2 Eight upward, left in front over (as in Exercise 1), 

with the trunk bent sideways left. 2 counts. 

3 Left upward, right in front over (height of the 

chest, the wand glides through the left hand), 
with the trunk bent sideways right (low) (Fig. 
40). 2 counts. 

4 Right upward, left in front over (as in Exercise 3), 

with the trunk bent sideways left (low). 

2 counts. 
Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, etc., as above. 



PART 6. 




With the Trunk Bent Forward. 

1 Behind (on the shoulders), with 

the trunk bent forward (slightly ), 

2 counts. 

2 Behind (on the shoulders), with 

the trunk bent forward (low) 
(Fig. 41). 2 counts. 

3 Behind (on the shoulders), with 



Fig. 40. 



the trunk bent forward (slight- 
ly). 2 counts. 

Behind (on the shoulders), with 
the trunk bent forward (low). 

2 counts. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, etc., as above. 




Fig. 41. 




With Turn Trunk. 

1 Left downward (hand glides), right 
in front over, with turn trunk 



PART 7. 



Fig. 42. 

right (the head turns still more) 
(Fig 42). 2 counts. 



70 



GERM AN- AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



2 Right downward (band glides), left 

in front over, with turn trunk 
left (the head turns still more). 

2 counts. 

3 Left downward (the hand glides), 

right in front over (height of the 
stomach), with turn trunk left. 

2 counts. 




4 Right downward (the hand glides), 
left in front over (height of the 
stomach), with turn trunk right. 

2 counts. 
Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, etc., as above. 



PART 8. 



With Bent Knees. 

1 Behind down with bent knees (slightly) (Fig. 

43). 2 counts. 

2 Behind down, with bent knees (low). 2 counts. 

3 Behind down, with bent knees (slightly). 

2 counts. 

4 Behind down, with bent knees (low). 2 counts. 
Repeat four times, and finish with pose in sym- 
metrical grouping. 



Note. — In Part 2, Exercise 3, side- 
ways left, right in front, may be taken 
sideways left, right behind, if preferred. Also contrarily, 4. 



Fig. 43. 



SERIES II. 
Starting position ; do"wn in front . 

Two motions and return. By taking the foregoing Series 
I, with '' bent arms " in front for the first motion, and for the 
second motion just as given there, we have the same in a more 
effective arrangement. Only the first and fourth parts of the 
series are given for example ; the fourth, because it undergoes 
more of a change in the new arrangement. 



PART 1. 



1 In front. 

2 Forward with step position, for- 

ward left (on ball of the foot). 



3 ) 

. [ Return motions. 



WAND EXERCISES 



71 



II III, IV 

1 In front. Same as I and II, but step on the 

2 Forward with step j^osition, for- whole foot. 

ward right (on ball of the foot). Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

^ > Return motions. Pause, and rest or pose. 



PART 2. 
I II 

1 Forward (instead of in front, as in 1 Forward (instead of in front as in 

Series I). Series I). 

2 In front with trunk bent backward 2 In front with trunk bent backward 

(slightly). (low). 

3 \ T)„^ ^. 3 ] Return motions. 



4 J 



Return motions. 



4 \ Pause, and rest or pose. 

And so on with the remaining parts. 



SERIES III. 
Starting Position ; down in front ! 

Two combined motions and return. AVliile in Series II. 
the first motion was a simple one and the second a combined 
one, both are combined motions in this series. 



PART 1 

Step Position and Bend the Knee of the Stepping 



Leg. 



1 In front with step position, forward 

left. 

2 Forward with bent left knee 

(Fig. 44). 

3 ) 

. > Return motions. 

Note. — Step as in Series I, through- 
out; when the knee is bent, the 
whole foot is down. 

II 

The same contrarily. 
Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Rest or pose, and recover, as in the 
other series. 




Fig. 44. 



72 



GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



PART 2. 




1 In front with step position, side- 

ways left. 

2 Sideways left, right in front, with 

bent left knee (Fig. 45). 

3 } 

. > Return motions. 



Fig 45. 



II 

The same contrarily, 
Repeat four times. 
Rest or pose, etc. 



PART 3. 



II 



1 In front with step position, back- 

ward left. 

2 Upward, with bent left knee. 

Return motions. 



The same contrarily. 
Repeat four times. 
Rest or pose, etc. 



PART 4 

3 / 



1 Forward with step position, back- 

ward left. 

2 In front, with bent trunk backward 

and bent left knee. 



4^ 



Return motions. 

II 

Contrarily. 
Repeat four times. 



32 counts. 



32 counts. 



32 counts. 



Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 5. 

3| 



1 In front with step position, sideways 

right. 

2 Left upwards, right in front over 

(height of the chest), with trunk 
bent sideways right and right 
knee bent. 



4j 



Return motions. 

II 

The same contrarily. 
Repeat four times. 
Pause, rest or pose, etc. 



PART 6. 



1 In front with step position, for- 

ward left. 

2 Behind, with trunk bent forward 

and the left knee bent. 



II 



3 1 

4 I 



32 counts. 



Return motions. 

The same contrarily. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



WAND EXERCISES 



73 



PART 7. 



In front with step position, side- 
ways riglit. 

Left downward, right in front 
over, with turn trunlc left and 
bent riglit knee. 
Return motions. 

II 

The same contrarily. 

Ill 

In front with step position, side- 



Left downward, right in front over, 
with turn trunk right and bent 
right knee (the wand in front of 
the left leg). 

Return motions. 

lY 

Contrarily. 

Repeat two times. 32 counts. 

Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



ways right. 



PART 8. 



With Both Knees Bent. 
I 

1 In front with raised heels. 

2 Behind down, with bent knees 

(slightly). 
3 



4 



Return motions. 

II 

1 In front with raised heels. 



Behind down, with bent knees 
(low). 

Return motions. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Finish with grouping. 



SERIES IV. 
Starting position ; do-wn in front ! 

PART 1. 
With Oblique Step Positions and Knee Bent of the Stepping Leg. 



1 In front with . step position, ob- 
liquely forward left. 

2. Left oblique forward, right in 
front over, with bent left knee. 

3) 



II 

Contrarily the same. 
Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, and rest or pose, as in the 
other series. 



4 ) 



Return motions. 



PART 2. 



1 In front with step position, side- 

ways left. 

2 Left sideways, obliquely upward, 

riglit in front over, with the left 
knee bent (Fig. 46). 



3 ) 

. > Return motions. 

II 

Contrarily the same. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



74 



GERM AN- A M ERIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



PART 3. 

3) 



1 In front with step position, ob- 

liquely backward left. 

2 Left upward, right in front over, 

with left knee bent. 



4 J 



Return motions. 

II 

Contrarily the same. 
Repeat four times. 



32 counts. 



Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 4 
3) 



In front with step position, ob- 
liquely forward left. 

Down with bent trunk forward, 
over left knee (the wand almost 
touching in front of the left foot) 
(Fig. 47). 



4j 



Retm-n motions. 

II 

Contrarily the same. 
Repeat four times. 



32 counts. 



Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 5. 



In front with step position, ob- 
liquely backward left. 

Upward, with trunk bent backward 
and left knee bent (the trunk 
turns one-eighth to the right) 
(Fig. 48). 



3) 
4) 



Return motions. 



II 

Contrarily the same. 
Repeat four times. 



32 counts. 



Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 6. 



1 Upward with cross step position, 

forward left. 

2 Left in front over, right upward 

(the right hand remains nearly 
where it is, but the wand glides 
through the hand), with lunge 
sideways left (Fig. 49). 



4j 



Return motions. 



1 Upward with step jjosition, side- 

ways left. 

2 Left sideways down (on the floor), 

with the trunk bent sideways 
left and the left knee bent. The 
right hand may be brought in 



II 

Contrarily the same. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 7. 



31 
4 1 



front over (in front of the left 
shoulder), or the arm may be 
bent over head ; the wand must 
stand in a vertical position (Fig.. 

50). 

Return motions. 



IVAND EXERCISES 



15 




Fig. 46. 





Fig. 47. 




Fig. 43. 




Fig. 49. 



Fig. 50. 



76 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



II 

Contrarily the same. 



Repeat four times. 32 comits. 

Pause, aiul rest or pose, etc. 



PART 8. 



1 Upward with kmge sideways left. 

2 Left in front over, right upward 

with straightened left knee and 
bent right knee. 



^ V Eeturn motions. 

II 

Contrarily the same. 
Repeat four times. 



32 counts. 



Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 9. 



1 Upward with stride (both feet step 

sideways with a jump). 

2 Left down (on the floor) (see part 

7), with the trunk bent sideways 
left and the left knee bent. 



4j 



Return motions. 



II 

Contrarily the same. 
Repeat four times. 



32 counts. 



Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



PART 10. 




Upward with stride. 

Left in front over and right in 
front over (left arm crosses over 
right), with bent trunk sideways 
right and bent right knee (Fig. 
51). 

> Return motions. 

II 

Contrarily the same. 

Repeat four times. 32 counts. 

Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 



Fig. 51. 



P A K T I Y. 

FOURTH COURSE. 



In this course the more complicated motions, termed 
"winding," are spoken of exclusively. 

The term "winding" may have originated from the cir- 



WAND EXERCISES 



11 



cular motion of the hand, resembling somewhat the process of 
winding a cord around something. It may be done toward 
the body, and away from it. The former, which is executed 
with the under hold, occurs more frequently ; the latter, which 
is often combined with a circular swing or sweep of the 
wand, and in combination with the former, permits of fewer 
changes. These movements are best explained and will be 
more readily understood if taken from the starting position 
"down in front." When once learned, they may be executed 
from different positions, as will be seen in the following 
series. 

Explanation for Winding with the Under hold.- — 
Raise the left hand in front of the chest, and the right 





Fig. 52. 



Fig. 53. 



sideways (the arm extended) (or let the wand glide through 
the right hand in raising). The thumb of the left hand 
should now point downward, and the back of the hand 
towards the chest, with the elbow a little higher than the 
shoulder (Fig. 52). From this position straighten the left 



78 



GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



arm sideways, down or upward, retaining the hold of the 
left hand as much as possible, and bringing the right hand 
to position in front, or in front over, as the position of the 
left liand and arm or wand may demand (Fig. 53). It is 
possible to wind upward, downward, sideways, forward, and 
backward, in front of, and behind, the body. In the follow- 
ing exercises these movements will be simply termed ''wind 
sideways, wind upward," etc. When the position at the end 
of an exercise is other than horizontal or • vertical, it will so 
be stated. 



LESSON 1. 

Starting position; dovv^n in front (under hold)! 

A — "Wind to a horizontal position. 

To make the command shorter, let the second or return 
motion always be understood. 



Wind sideways left, right in front. 
Wind sideways right, left in front. 
Wind sideways left, right behind. 
Wind sideways right, left behind. 
Wind forward left, right in front 

over (the wand glides through 

the winding hand). 

6 Wind forward right, left in front 

over (the wand glides through 
the winding hand). 

7 Wind forward left, right in front 

over (on shoulder). 

8 Wind forward right, left in front 

over (on shoulder). 

9 Wind forward left, right behind 

over (on shoulder). 
10 Wind forward right, left behind 
over (on shoulder). 



11 Wind backward left, right in front 

over (height of the shoulders). 

12 Wind backward right, left in front 

over (height of the shoulders). 

13 Wind backward left, right in front 

over (height of the hips). 

14 Wind backward right, left in front 

over (height of the hips). 

15 Wind upward left, right upward 

(both arms extended upward). 

16 Wind upward right, left upward 

(both arms extended upward).- 

17 Wind sideways left over to right, 

right over in front (cross the 
arms height of the chest). 

18 Wind sideways right over to left, 

left over in front (cross the 
arms height of the chest). 



WAND EXERCISES 



79 



LESSON 2. 
B — Wind to the vertical positions. 

The wand may glide through the winding hand, or through 
the other hand, or through both hands. 



1 Wind downward left, right in front over (Fig. 54). 

2 Wind downward right, left in front over. 

3 Wind downward left, right behind over (middle of the 

back). 

4 Wind downward right, left behind over (middle of the 

back). 

5 Wind downward left, right upward (both arms ex- 

tended). 

6 Wind downward right, left upward (both arms ex- 

tended). 

7 Wind upward left, right in front over. 

8 Wind upward right, left in front over. 

9 Wind upward left, right behind over. 
10 Wind upward right, left behind over. 




Fig. 54. 



Note. — The position in 9 and 10, taken alone, will be 
somewhat slanting, but when taken with bending, will be 
found to come under the head of the vertical positions. The 
winding upward and downward, both in front and behind 
the body, may lead to a slanting position as well, and when 
properly combined will make a fine exercise. 



LESSON 3. 
The contra, or wind reverse. — Two motions and return. 

Although very difficult, this is nothing more than changing 
from one position after winding to the opposite. The extreme 
difficulty arises through the quickness of the change, as the 
returning movement from the first position and the entire 
movement to the second position must be done in one count ; 



80 



GERM A N-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



the movements from the second position to the third must 
also be effected at one count. 



A — Wind in directly opposite directions. 

As the position of the right hand naturally suggests itself 
when the left winds, it is not given in the following lessons 
unless necessary. 



Sideways. 

1 Wind sideways left. 

2 Return and wind sideways right. 

3 Return and wind sideways left. 

4 Return and down in front. 



II 



Contrarily the same. 



Ill 



Downward. 



1 Wind downward left. 

2 Return and wind downward right. 

3 Return and wind downward left. 

4 Return and down in front. 

IV 

Contrarily the same. 

Y 

Upward. 

1 Wind upward left. 

2 Return and wind upward right. 

3 Return and wind upward left. 

4 Return and down in front. 



VI 

Contrarily the same. 

VII 
Forward. 

1 Wind forward left, right in front 

(on or under shoulder). 

2 Return and wind forward right to 

the opposite position. 

3 Return and wind forward left to 

the opposite position. 

4 Down in front. 

VIII 

Contrarily the same. 

IX. 
Backward. 

1 Wind backward left (height of the 

shoulders or the hips). 

2 Return and wind backward right 

to the opposite position. 

3 Return and wind backward left to 

the opposite position. 

4 Return and down in front. 

X. 

Contrarily the same. 



B — In different, but non-opposite directions. 
XI 
Sideways and downward. 
1 Wind sideways left. 



2 Return and wind downward right, 
left behind in slanting position. 

3 
4 



Return motions. 



WAND EXERCISES 



81 



XII 


left in front over (on or under 


Contrarily the same. 


the shoulder). 




. > Return motions. 


XIII 


Sideways and upward. 
1 Wind sideways left. 


XVI 

Contrarily the same. 


2 Return and wind upward right, 

WIT 

left in front over. ^v v i x 


. > Return motions. 


Sideways and backward. 
1 Wind sideways left. 


XIV 


2 Return and wind backward right, 


Contrarily the same. 


left in front over (at the height 



XV 

Sideways and forward. 

1 Wind sideways left. 

2 Return and wind forward right, 



of the shoulders or the hips). 
> Return motions. 

XVIII 

Contrarily the same. 



As will be seen by the foregoing lessons, the contra, or wind 
reverse, may be extended ad injiiiifum. 



LESSON 4. 

The w^ind with the upper hold. 
The wind in combination w^ith circle, or sw^eep simple, and followed 

again by a w^ind. 
Starting position ; dow^n in front (upper hold^ 

Note. — When followed by a wind as last motion, the 
winding hand slips around the end of the wand to the under 
hold. 

Explanation of the Different Movements of the 
Wind with the Upper Hold. 

Raise the left hand wdth the hold unchanged in front, and 
bring the right downward, letting the wand glide through the 
hand. The wand is now in a vertical position in front, on 
the middle line of the body ; the left hand at the height of 



82 



GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



the chest. Now turn the wancl with the left hand firmly 
(as if driving a screw), until it has completed a whole turn ; 

then, pressing the elbow close to the 
body, turn the hand a little more, 
and straighten the left arm sideways, 
^""^^^ In'inging the right hand in front or 
front over. (Fig. 5o.} This (the 
wind sideways left) should be practised 
first in two motions and return, then 
in one motion and return. When ex- 
ecuted in the latter way, the right arm 
swings down over, so as to allow the 
left hand to make the turn as ex- 
plained above. The right hand must 
not remain in this downward position any length of time, but 
must come immediately up to the position in front. The 
wind with the upper hold is more limited than that with the 
under hold. 




Fig. 55. 



Sideways. 

1 Wind sideways left, right in front 

(see explanation). 

2 Wind sideways right, left in front 

(see explanation). 

3 Wind sideways left, right down- 

ward sweep and under left shoul- 
der (end of the wand behind, on 
back, the wand in slightly slant- 
ing position). 

4 Wind sideways right, left down- 

ward sweep and behind as in 3. 

Forward. 

5 Wind forward left, right downward 

sweep and under the left shoul- 
der. 



6 Wind forAvard right, left down- 

ward sweep and under the left 
shoulder. 

7 Wind forward left, right down- 

ward sweep and in front, the 
right end of the wand under 
the right shoulder (oblique posi- 
tion). 

8 Wind forward right, left down- 

ward sweep and in front, as in 
Exercise 7. 

Upward 

9 Wind upward left, right down- 

ward sweep and in front over. 
10 Wind upward right, left down- 
ward sweep and in front over. 



WAyn EXEiicisES 83 

LESSON 5. 

Miscellaneous winds, such as one-half -wind followed by long sw^eep 
or circle of the w^and, and finish the w^ind after the circle, etc. 

The few examples here offered will give the teacher a 
good idea of how manifold these exercises may be made. 
Both the under and the upper hold permit of good combina- 
tions in this line. In some exercises the hold must be 
changed (the hand slips around the end of the wand Avhile 
in motion). 

Sideways. 2 Circle to the left (swing the wand 

With underhold. Two motions and i" ^ circle to the left) right side- 

return ^^'^-ys, left in front (right arm is 

J extended sideways). 

3 ) 

I -ITT- J -J 1 ir* At Return motions. 

1 Wmd sideways left. 4 ) 

Explanation. — After the plain wind sideways left, the 
left hand (firm hold) is drawn towards the bod}', and the 
right hand is raised in front of the body, permitting the hand 
to glide along the Avand almost to the left hand ; the wand 
continues the circular swing or sweep, and when it rises to 
the right the right hand glides along the wand until tlie arm 
is extended sideways at the height of the shoulders, the left 
hand in front with under hold. 

II. III. 

Contrarily the same. 1 One-half wind left in front (middle 

With the upper-hold, the one-half of the chest), circle to the right 

wind, circle, and wind. Two mo- and sideways right to position, 

tions and return. 2 Wind sideways left, right in front. 

3 ) Eeturn motions, but circle in the 
■^ i same direction. 

Explanation. — The left hand is raised and turned as 
explained in Lesson 4. The wand is now in a vertical posi- 
tion. Instead of windinof out sideways, as commanded in that 



84 



GERM A N- AMEBIC A N G YMNA S TICS 



lesson, the wand is swnng by the right hand, which gUdes 
along it, in a circle to the right and to position sideways 
right, left hand in front. As the wand is raised to the latter 
position, the left hand slips around the end to the under hold. 
Wind sideways left and return, change the hold, and circle to 
down in front. 



IV. 

Contrarily the same. 
With the under hold, 
and wind. 

V. 



3 1 



around tlie end to under hold, 
wind backward left. 



Wind, circle, \ [ Return motions. 



3 ( 
4( 



Wind sideways left. 

Circle to the left and as the right 
hand (gliding) is raised sideways 
right, wind forward left, the right 
hand over in front, on the left 
shoulder. 

Return motions. 

VI. 

Contrarily the same. 
With the upper hold. 

VII. 
Forward. 

1 Wind forward left (right over in 

front). 

2 Return, and as the left hand slips 



VIII. 

Contrarily the same. 
With under hold. 

IX. 

Downward. 

1 Wind downward left. 

2 Wind downward right (both arms 

extended downward). 

X. 

Contrarily the same. 
XI. 

1 Wind upward left. 

2 Wind upward right (both arms ex- 

tended). 

XII. 

Contrarily the same. 



An almost endless variety of combinations in winds, with 
and without circles, may be arranged from the above. 



PART V. 

FIFTH COURSE. 



In all preceding lessons the motions from one position to 
the other have been treated in the shortest way possible. The 
starting position has been down in front in all cases. The 



WAND EXERCISES 



85 



following lessons contain all the different ways of changing 
from one position to another, as well as the starting position, 
cany at the shoulder (fundamental position). To illustrate 
the different modes of executing changes, the following lesson 
is prepared without any respect to arrangement for series, 
simply containing the positions mostly used, wdth their pos- 
sible changes. 

LESSON 1. 
Starting position ; down in front ! 



1 From the position sideways left, 

right in front, the following 
changes are possible. 

2 Sideways right, left in front. 

First: The nearest or shortest "way 
over. 

Explanation. — Draw or pull with 
the right hand and extend the 
arm sideways ; as the right arm 
is straightened, the left arm must 
be bent in front. 



3 ) 
4^ 



Return motions. 



Second : With the forward sweep 
or curve around. 

1 Explanation. — From the posi- 

tion sideways left, right in front. 

2 Extend both arms forward, and 

bring the left hand in front, while 
the right hand goes on until the 
arm is extended sideways. 

'^ / Return motions. 

Third : With the upward sweep or 
curve around. 

1 Explanation. — Sideways left, 
right in front (same as in the 
first and second). 



3 1 
4| 



Extend both arms upward, and 
bring the left hand in front, while 
tlie right hand goes on until the 
arm is extended sideways. 

Return motions. 



Fourth : With the dow^nw^ard sweep 
or curve around. 



3 1 
4\ 



Explanation. — Same as above. 

Extend both arms downward, and 
bring the left hand in front, while 
the right goes on until the arm is 
extended sideways. 

Return motions. 



Fifth : In the shortest way behind 
over. 



1 Explanation. — Same as above. 

2 Raise the right hand overhead and 

draw or pull until the arm is ex- 
tended at the height of the shoul- 
der ; the left hand may remain 
behind or may be brought in front. 

Return motions. 



31 
4i 



Sixth : With the backward sweep 
or curve around. 

1 Explanation. — Same as above. 



86 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

2 Raise the right hand overhead and Seventh : "With the down-ward 

extend both arms backward, sweep or curve around, 

right goes on to the right until 1 Explanation. — Same as above, 

the arm is extended at the height 2 Same as in the sixth, but extend 

of the shoulder; the left hand the arms downward and swing to 

may be left behind or brought in position; right hand may be left 

"*"'^^- behind or may be brought in 

\ I Return motions. front. 

In commanding the above changes, the author has found 
the following to be concise and definite : — 

'" Over in front," ''around forward," ''around above," 
"around below," " over behind," "around backward," " around 
below behind." If the terms "forAvard sweep, or curve," "up- 
ward sweep," "downward sweep," etc., suit better, make use 
of them. The position sideways (horizontal), as given in these 
examples, permits of more changes to the reverse position than 
any other. There is another change, but it is used chiefly in 
combinations of series and combined with lunges, etc. It is 
the circle swing, in which the one hand glides along the wand 
to the other hand, as the desired position is attained in the 
winding lessons. 

PART VI. 

SIXTH COURSE. 

Series of exercises of all courses in more difficult arrangements. 
Starting position ; fundamental position. The -wand at the right 
shoulder (carry). 

SERIES I. 

Note. — The second movement may be upward as well as 

down in front; it is even more effective. In this series the 

down in front in the second count is adhered to until the 

eleventh part, in which and in the twelfth it is changed to 

the upward. 



WAND EXERCISES 87 

PART 1, 

Starting position; carry at the right shoulder! 
Do\vn in front and in front. 

1 Left hand grasps with the fingers Down in front. 

behind at the upper end. 7 To the left shoulder (right hand 

2 Down in front. raises the waiid); carry position. 

3 In front. 8 Bring the right arm and the hand 

4 Down in front. to the position at the right side. 

5 In front. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

PART 2. 

Down in front and for^vard. 

1 As above. 7 To the left shoulder as above. 

2 As above. 8 Right arm to position at the right 

3 Forward. side. 

4 Down in front. 9-16 Contrarily the same 

5 ) 

n > Same as 3 and 4. 

PART 3. 
Down in front and upw^ard. 

1 As above. 5 i 

V 1 ^ ^ /• ^ Same as 3 and 4. 

2 As above. ) 

3 Upward (swing up forward with 7 To the left shoulder. 

straight arms). 8 Eight arm to position at the side. 

4 Down in front. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

PART 4. 
DoTvn in front and behind. 

1 As above. 5 ^ 

2 As above. ;3 } Same as 3 and 4. 

3 Behind (bent arms), with the for- 7 To the left shoulder. 

ward and upward sweep or curve 8 Right arm to position at the side, 
to position on the shoulders. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

4 Down in front. 

PART 5. 
Do^wn in front and down behind. 

1 As above. 5 1 ^ .-> i a 

f, > Same as 3 and 4. 

2 As above. " J 

3 Down behind (full swing). 7 To the left shoulder. 

4 Down in front. 8 Right arm to position. 

9-16 Contrarily the same. 



88 



GERM AN- AMEBIC AN GYMNASTICS 



PART 6. 

The same as Part 1, but with step position backward right 
in the third count, and return the foot to ^^l^ce in the fourth 
count, so at 5 and 6. At 11, 12, 13, and 14 the left foot steps. 

PART 7. 

The same as Part 2, with step position forward right and 
left as indicated in Part 6. 



PART 8. 

The same as Part 3, with step position sideways right and 



left. 



PART 9. 

The same as Part 4, with lunge forward right and left. 

PART 10. 

The same as Part 5, with lunge sideways right and left. 

PART 11. 
Upward and behind (slanting). 

1 Left hand grasps with the fingers 
behind at the upper end. 

2 Upward. 

3 Behind and left downward (slant- 
ing) with lunge sideways right 
(Fig. 56). 

4 Upward with recover (return to 
the fundamental position). 

5 ) 
n / Same as 3 and 4 

7 To the left shoulder. 

8 Kight arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 




Fig. 56. 



PART 12. 



1 As above. 

2 As above. 



Upward and down sideways (vertically). 

3 Left down sideways, and right over 
in front, with lunge obliquely for- 
ward riarht. 



WAND EXERCISES 89 

4 Upward with recover. 7 To the left shoulder. 

^ ( c . Q A A ^ Right arm to position at the side. 

6 9-10 Contrarily the same. 

SERIES II. 

PART 1. 

In front and forvrard with step position, forward and bend the 
forw^ard knee (knee of the supporting leg). 

1 Left hand grasps behind at the H j^^^^^^ ^^ 3 ^^^ 2. 

upper end. " i 

2 Down in front. 7 f '^^ ^^^® ^^^^ shoulder (carry), and 

3 In front with step position forward g ] ^^^^^^ ^^^^it arm to position at 

right (on the whole foot). ^ ^^^ side. 

4 Forward with bent right knee. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

PART 2. 

In front and sideways with step position, sideways and bend the 

knee sidew^ays. 

t^ V As above. /. > Return to 3 and 2. 

3 In front with step position, side- 7 ) To the left shoulder, and return 

ways right (on the whole foot). 8 j right arm to position attlie side. 

4 Sideways- right with bent right 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

knee. 

PART 3. 

In front and upw^ard w^ith step position, backward and bend the 

rear knee. 

2 > As above. ^ > Return to 3 and 2. 



3 In front with step position back- 

ward right (on the whole foot). 

4 Upward witli bent right knee. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 



1} 



As above. 



PART 4. 

In front and downward w^ith step position, forw^ard, turn trunk 
and bend trunk forw^ard, w^ith bent front knee. 

As above. ^^^ bent trunk forward (straight 



1} 



back). 
3 In front with step position, ob- 5 ) 

liquely forward right and turn 6 >^^^^^^ to 3 and 2. 



trunk right (one-eighth turn). 7 1 ^^ above. 

>ownward with bent right knee ^ j 

9-16 Contrarily the same. 



90 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



PART 5. 

In front and up^vard -with step position, obliquely back^ward ; turn 
trunk, and bent trunk backw^ard "with bent rear knee. 



As above. 



1 \ 

3 In front with step position, ob- 
liquely backward right, with turn 
trunk, one-eighth left. 




4 Upward with bent trunk backward 
and bent right knee. 

6/ 
7) 
8/ 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 



Return to 3 and 2. 
As above. 



PART 6. 

Up-ward and to vertical position, up- 
"ward -with cross step position, for- 
"ward and lunge sideways. 

2 [-As above. 

3 Upward (horizontal position) with cross 
step position, forward right. 

4 Right in front over (in front of the left 
shoulder), left remains up (vertical), 
with lunge sideways right (Fig. 57). 

P > Return to 3 and 2. 
As above. 



9-lG Contrarily the same. 



PART 7. 

Upward and downward to vertical position, w^ith step position 

sideways, and bent knee with bent trunk sidew^ays. 



2 i 



f. Return to 3 and 2. 
b ) 

o ^ As above. 

o ) 

9-16 Contrarily the same. 



As above. 

3 Upward with step position side- 

ways right. 

4 Downward right Tend on the floor) 

with bent trunk sideways right 
and right knee bent. 

PART 8. 

Upw^ard, and upward to vertical position, and reverse w^ith lunge 

side"ways and lunge reverse. 

1 ) . , 4 Risrht in front over (in front of the 

y A Q o r)OVP 

2 J ■ left shoulder), vertical position 

3 Upward with lunge sideways right. with lunge reverse (straighten 



WAND EXEBCISES 



91 



the bent knee and bend the 
other). 
5 Around below (^ downward curve 
or sweep and left upward), right 
in front over with lunge reverse 
(original lunge position). 



6 Down in front with recover (fun- 

damental position;. 

7 ) 

t, > As above, 
o J 

0-16 Contrarily the same. 



PART 9. 

In front and up-ward. Do"wn sideways -with stride sideways, and 

bend knee and trunk sideways. 



1 As above. 

2 In front with jum]3 or hop to 

stride position sideways (both 
feet sideways about 36 inches 
apart). 

3 Upward. 

4 Down sideways right (on the floor), 

with bent right knee and bent 
trunk sideways right. 



5 Around above (upward sweep or 

curve), with lunge reverse and 
bend reverse, and downward side- 
ways left (on the floor). 

6 Upward (horizontally) with 

straightened trunk and knee. 

7 To the left shoulder with a jump 

to the fundamental position. 

8 Right arm to position at the side. 



PART 10. 



1 As above. 

2 Down in front. 

3 Right in front over and left in 

front over (cross the right arm 
over left), with a lunge sideways 
right. 

4 Wind right (upper hold) over to 

the left side with lunge reverse, 



on the feet (one-quarter turn). 
See note below. 

5 Return Mind and cross the arms 

again, but right under left with 
lunge reverse. 

6 Down in front with recover, 

7 \ To the left shoulder and return 
^ i right arm to position at the side. 



and turn trunk left and turn left 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

Note. — The wind here is actually a wind forward right, 
as the one-quarter turn on the feet makes it so. The posi- 
tion attained with -4 is right forward, left under right shoul- 
der, facing left and left knee bent. 



SERIES III. 

Starting position ; carry at the right shoulder. 

Preliminary 1. 

A 3 Raise with the right hand to the 

1 Grasp with the left hand at the left shoulder. 

upper end (the fingers behind). 4 Right hand and arm to posi- 

2 Down in front (upper hold). tion. 



92 



GERMAN- AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



B 

5-8 Return motions. 



9 Grasp with the left hand at the 
upper end (the fingers in front). 
10 Down in front (under hold). 



11 Raise the right hand to the left 

shoulder. 

12 Right hand and arm to position 

at the side. 

D. 

13-16. Return motions. 



Preliminary 2. 

Same as A, B, C, and D, in Pre- seventh count ; one-quarter turn 

liminary 1, with one-quarter turn right in the tenth count, and one- 

(face) left in the second count, quarter turn left in the fifteenth 

and one-quarter turn right on the count. 

PART 1. 
In front and behind, with bent trunk forward and backward. 



1 Grasp with the left hand at the 

upper end (the fingers behind). 

2 Down in front. 

3 In front with bent trunk back- 

ward. 

4 Behind (upward curve) with bent 

trunk forward. 

5 As 3. 



6 Down in front with straightened 

trunk. 

7 ) To the left shoulder and return the 

8 ^ right arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 

B 

The same as A, with one-quarter 
turns (facing) as explained in 
Preliminary 2. 



PART 2. 
Forward and on the hips with step backward ; bent knees. 



As in Part 1. 

Left forward, right on the hip 

(right), with step backward right. 
Right forward, left on the left hip, 

with step backward left. 
Forward (both extended), with 

step forward left. 
Down in front with step up right 

(right foot to place). 



6 Upward (horizontally) with bent 

knee (low). 

7 To the left shoulder with straight- 

ened knees. 

8 Right arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 

B 

Same as A, with facing as in the 
first part. 



PART 3. 
Forw^ard and upw^ard, with raise the xeg and step backward. 

A 3 Forward with raise right leg for- 

1 As above. ward. 

2 In front. 4 In front with step backward right. 



WAND EXERCISES 



93 



5 Upward with raise right leg back- 
ward. 
In front and right foot to place. 

7 ) To the left shoulder and right 

8 ) arm to position at the side. 



9-10 Contrarily the same. 



B 



Same as A, with facings. 



PART 4. 

Obliquely upw^ard, -with trunk bent forward, -with raised leg back- 

■ward, trunk bent backward, and swing the leg forw^ard. 

A 5 Same as 3. 

1 As in the first part. 6 Down in front and right foot to 

2 As in the first part. place. 

3 Obliquely upward (forward), with 7 

raise right leg backward, with 
trunk bent forward (Fig. 58). 

4 Down in front with trunk bent 

backward and swing right leg 
forward. 



As in the first part. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 

B 

The same as A, with facings. 




Fig. 58. 



PART 5. 

Upward (vertically) and dow^nward and sideways, w^ith bent knees, 
with step position sideways (other foot) ; raise the leg side- 
ways, straighten the bent knee and lunge, and lunge reverse. 

A 3 Around below (down curve), and 

1 As in the first part. 

2 Right upward, left in front over 

with step position, sideways left, 
with the right knee bent. 



the left upward, right in front 
over, with straightened right knee 
and raise the left leg sideways. 



94 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



4 Around forward (forward sweep or 

curve) and sideways right, left in 
front with lunge sideways left. 

5 Around forward and sideways left, 

with lunge reverse. 

6 Around upward (upward sweep) 

and downward right, left in 



front over with the left foot to 
place. 

g i Right arm to position at the side. 
9-10 Contrarily the same. 
B 



The same as A, with facings. 



PART 6. 



Sideways in front and behind, with step position sideways ; cross 
step position and lunge, and cross lunge. 



1 As in the first part. 

2 Sideways right, left in front over, 

with step position sideways right. 

3 Left over behind and sideways left, 

with cross step position forward 
right. 

4 Right over in front and sideways 

right, left in front over with lunge 
sideways right. 



5 Same as 3, with cross lunge back- 

ward right. 

6 Down in front with recover from 

the lunge. 

7 j To the left shoulder, and right 

8 ^ arm to position at the side. 
9-lG Contrarily the same. 

6 

The same as A, with facings. 



PART 7. 

Downw^ard and upward with lunge sideways, lunge reverse, 

and turn trunk. 



As in the first part. 

Left downward, right in front over. 

Right upward, left in front over 
with lunge sideways left. 

Right behind over (the hand slips 
around to under hold, and the 
wand is brought behind the left 
shoulder), the left upward with 
lunge reverse, and turn trunk 
right. See note. 

Left upward (remains), right in 
front over (right circles around 



the head, and is brought in front 
of the left shoulder, hand slips 
around with lunge reverse and 
turn trunk left). 

6 Around below (down sweep) and 

right upward, left in front over 
"with recover. 

7 ) To the left shoulder, and right 

8 j arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 

B 

Same as A, with facings. 



Note. — The end of the wand is behind the shoulder ; the 
hand is on the shoulder, the arm behind. It is easier to change 
the hold in the foregoing count, that is, at 3. In returning, 
the hand slips back again to the under hold. 



WANl) EXERCISES 



95 



PART 8. 



In front over with both (crossed arms, the hands glide), -with 

bent knees (^lo"w). 



,) > As in the first part. 

3 In front over with both (cross 

arms, right over tlie left), with 
bent knees (low) (Fig. 59). 

4 Reverse 3 with straightened knees. 

5 Reverse with bent knees very low. 




6 Reverse 5 with straightened knees. 

7 I To the left shoulder and right 

8 > arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 



B 



Same as A, with facings. 




Fig. 59. 



Fig. 60. 



PART 9. 

On the hip, circle and do-wnward -with bent knees, -with step posi- 
backw^ard and obliquely lunge, and cross lunge 



tion, cross 
forward. 



1 As in the first part. 

2 On the right hip, left forward, right 

backward with cross step position, 
backward right with left knee 
bent (Fig. 60). 

3 Circle forward to right obliquely 

downward, left in front over (un- 
der right shoulder), with lunge 
obliquely forward right. 

4 Circle backward to position as 2, 



with cross step backward right, 

with the left knee bent. 
Same as 3, but cross lunge forward 

right. 
Same as 4. 

To the left shoulder with recover. 
Right arm to position at the side. 



9-16 Contrarily tlie same. 



B 

Same as A, with facings. 



96 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



PART 10. 

Wind for-ward and up-ward, after -winding -with bent knees and 

bent trunk backw^ard. 



1 Grasp with the left hand at the 

upper end (fingers in front). 

2 Down in front (under hold). 

3 Wind forward right with bent 

knees (low). 

4 Wind forward left (right remains) 

with straightened knees. 

5 Bent trunk backward and raise 

wand upward. 



6 Forward with return wind left and 

straightened trunk. 

7 Downward left to shoulder, with 

return wind right. 

8 Right arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 

B 

The same as A, with facings. 



PART 11. 

Wind and -wind reverse with stride, bent knee, and bent knee 

reverse. 

- 5 Same as 3. 

6 Wind reverse sideways to the right, 
and recover to fundamental posi- 
tion. 

7 Return wind right to the left shoul- 
der, left downward. 

8 Right arm to position at the side. 
9-16 Contrarily the same. 



Same as 1 in Part 10. 

Wind sideways right, left in front 

with stride sideways. 
Wind reverse sideways to the left 

with bent left knee. 
Wind reverse sideways to the right 

with bent knee reverse. 




The same as A, "with facings. 

PART 12. 

Wind and wind reverse to different direc- 
tions •vvrith lunge reverse and bent 
trunk. 

A 

1 Same as 1 in Part 11. 

2 Upward (horizontally, under bold). 

3 Wind sideways right, left ^n front with lunge 
sideways right. 

Wind reverse downward left, right behind 
(slanting position) with lunge reverse. 

Wind reverse upward right, left in front over 
with lunge reverse and bent trunk sideways 
left (Fig. 61). 



WAND EXERCISES 97 

6 Return wind and upward (both) 9-16 Contrarily the same. 

(horizontal position) with re- 
cover. ^ 

7 I To the left shoulder and right arm Same as A, with facings. 

8 J to position at the side. 

By taking the second position upward instead of " down 
in front," the exercises of the several series here given will 
increase in value. 



98 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



EXERCISES MTITH CLUBS 

By FEKD. W. FliOEHLICH 

Arranged in three grades of four lessons each. 
Weight of clubs : 1 to 2 pounds. 

Arnicircle, a; forearmcircle, b; handcircle, c (Fig. 62). 

* Arnicircle sideways right (left;, or outTvard (a; (Fig. 63); 
also in"ward (b). 

Arnicircle forward right (left), also backward (Fig. 64). 

ABBREYIATIOXS. 

AC. Armcircle. DHC. Doub.e handcircle. 

FAC. Forearmcircle. A double circle means that both 

HC. Handcircl.^. arms execute an AC, FAC, or an HC 

DAC. Double arnicircle. simultaneously. 

DFAC. Double forearmcircle. 

GRADE T. 

LESSON 1. 

Raise the clubs to position (the arms bent to an acute angle, the 
hands width of shoulders apart) (Fig. 65); Raise! 

1 AC right sideways (or outward), 4 The same left, 

and return to the starting posi- 5 AC right forward, 

tion in two counts. Begin! 1-2, 6 The same left. 

1- Halt ! 7 AC right backward. 

8 The same left. 

ExPLANATiox. - Extend the arm ^ ^^ ^ .^^^^ sideways right three 

upward, describe one complete ^.^^^^"^ ^^^^ ^^^^^.^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^t^^ing 

circle without twisting the trunk, .^.^^ .^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^ 

before bending the arm to the „ ■ i -t c o a i o q ttoU t 

, . Begin! 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 1, ^, 6, Malt I 

starting position. ^r^ ^ ^ -r^ • o " t?^.^.. 

" ^ 10 Execute Exercise 2 as in Exer- 

2 The same left. cise 9. 

3 AC right sideways left (or in- 11 Execute Exercise 3 as in Exer- 

ward) in 2 counts. cise 9. 



EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 



99 




Fig. 62 a. 





Fig. 62 b. 



Fig. 62 c. 



100 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 




Fig. 63 a. 




Fig. 63 b. 



EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 



101 



12 Execute Exercise 4 as in Exer- 

cise 9. 

13 Execute Exercise 5 as in Exer- 

cise 9. 



14 Execute Exercise 6 as in Exer- 

cise 9. 

15 Execute Exercise 7 as in Exer- 

cise 9. 

16 Execute Exercise 8 as in Exer- 

cise 9. 





Fig. 64. 



Fig. 65. 



LESSON 2. 
Clubs to position ; Raise ! 



1 Exercises 1 and 2 of Lesson 1 al- 

ternately in 4 counts. 

2 Exercises 3 and 4 of Lesson 1 al- 

ternately in 4 counts. 

3 Exercises 5 and 6 of Lesson 1 al- 

ternately in 4 counts. 

4 Exercises 7 and 8 of Lesson 1 al- 

ternately in 4 counts. 

5 Exercises 1 and 4, 2 and 3. 5 

and 8, and 6 and 7 of Lesson 1 
alternately in 4 counts. 

6 Exercises 9 to 16 of Lesson 1 al- 

ternately in 8 counts. 



7 DAC sideways right in 2 counts. 

8 The same left. 

9 DAC right sideways right and left 

sideways left (or outward) in 2 
counts. 

10 DAC right sideways left and left 

sideways right (or inward) in 2 
counts. 

11 AC right forward and left back- 

ward simultaneously in 2 counts. 

12 AC left forward and right back- 

ward simultaneously in 2 counts. 



102 



GERM AN- AMEBIC A N G YMNA S TICS 



LESSON 3. 



Clubs to position ; Raise ! 



1 DAC sideways right three times 

and return to position in 4 
counts. 

2 The same left. 

3 DAC outward three times and re- 

turn to position in four counts. 

4 DAC inward tliree times and return 

to position in four counts. 

5 AC riglit forward and left back- 

ward three times and return to 
position in 4 counts. 

6 AC left forward and right back- 

ward three times and return to 
position in 4 counts. 

7 DAC sideways right and left alter- 

nately in 4 counts. 

8 DAC outward and inward alter- 

nately in 4 counts. 

9 AC right forward and left back- 

ward ; left forward and right 



backward; alternately in 4 
counts. 

10 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately in 8 

counts. 

11 Exercises 3 and 4 alternately in 8 

counts. 

12 Exercises 5 and 6 alternately in 8 

counts. 

13 DFAC sideways right in 2 counts. 
ExPLAXATiON. — The centre of the 

circle lies at the elbows; keep 
the upper arms close to the body. 

14 Same sideways left. 

15 Same sideways outward. 

16 Same sideways inward. 

17 Exercises 13, 14, 15, and 16, three 

times and return to position, as 
in the above exercises ; also al- 
ternately in 8 counts, or alter- 
nating with DAC. 



LESSON 4. 



Clubs to position ; Raise 



1 AC right sideways right, or out- 

ward and step position right 
sideways, in 2 counts. 
Expi.AXATiox. — Place the foot side- 
ways at 1, close the heels at 2. 

2 The same left. 

3 AC right sideways left, or inward 

and step position backward right, 
in 2 counts. 

4 The same left. 

5 AC right forward and step position 

right forward in 2 counts. 

6 The same left. 

7 AC right backward and step posi- 

tion right backward in 2 counts. 

8 The same left. 

Exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 



8, but AC three times and return 
to position; the step position at 
1, and close heels at 3 in 4 
counts. 

10 DAC right and step position side- 

ways riglit, bending the left 
knee, in 2 counts (Fig. 66). 

11 The game left. 

12 DAC outward and step position 

right backward, bending the left 
knee, in 2 counts. 

13 DAC inward and step position 

left backward, bending the right 
knee, in 2 counts. 

14 Exercises 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 7 and 
■ 8, 10 and 11, 12 and 13, alter- 
nately in 4 counts. 



i:x£:ii VISES with clubs 



103 



\ 




Fig. 66. 



GRADE 11. 

Clubs to position ; Raise ! 

LESSON 1. 



1 DAC sideways right three times, 

and step position sideways right, 
bending tlie left knee, in 4 
counts. 
Explanation. — Step position at 
1, close the heels at 3. 

2 The same left. 

3 DAC outward three times, and step 

position right backward, bending 
the left knee, in 4 counts. 

4 DAC inward three times, and step 

position left backward, bending 
the right knee, in 4 counts. 

5 Three-quarter DAC forward, re- 

verse to starting position, in 3 
counts. 



Explanation. — Extend the arms 
upward, and swing them for- 
ward, downward, and backward, 
keeping the hands width of 
shoulders apart, the arms on a 
level, or nearly so, with the 
shoulders at 1 ; reverse to up- 
ward position at 2 ; bend the 
arms to the starting position at 3. 

6 Exercise 5, with bending the trunk 

forward to a right angle at 1, 
straighten the trunk at 2 (Fig. 

7 Three-quarters DAC sideways right, 

twist the trunk to the left, re- 
verse to starting position, in 3 



104 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 




Fig. 67. 



\ 



/ \ 







/ 



Fig. 68. 



EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 



105 



counts. Also, without twisting 
tlie trunk, right arm bent to a 
right angle. 
Explanation. — Start off to the 
right at 1 ; after the clubs have 
passed body in front, twist the 
trunk to the left, the arms in 
the forward position (the clubs 



and arms in one line) at 2, 
swing downward, twist the trunk 
forward, and return to the start- 
ing position. 

The same left. 

Three-quarters DAC inward, re- 
verse to the starting position, in 
3 counts (Fig. 68). 



/ 




Fig. 69. 



10 Three-quarters DAC outward, re- 

verse to the starting position in 
3 counts (Fig. 69). 
Explanation. — The arms bent at 
the elbows to a right angle, on 
a level with the shoulders, the 
right hand over the left elbow, 
the left hand under the right 
elbow, the clubs and forearms 
in one line. 

11 Exercises 7 and 8, and while the 

arms are in the forward position 
at the left side at 2, execute 
a half DHC upward, lowering 



the clubs on the forearms (strik- 
ing them), reverse to the start- 
ing position, in 4 counts (Fig. 
TO). 

12 The same left. 

13 Exercise 9, and while the arms 

are in a sideways i:)osition at 2, 
execute a half DHC upward, as 
in Exercise 11; reverse to posi- 
tion; in four counts. 

14 Execute Exercise 10 similarly, 

15 Three-quarters DAC forward; re- 

verse to the forward position 
and one-half DHC upward, as 



lOG 



GERMAy^-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



16 



in Exercise 11; at 4 bend the 
arms to the starting position ; in 
4 counts. Tlie same witli bend- 
ing tlie trunk forward, as in Ex- 
ercise G. 
Tliree-quarters DAC forward: re- 
verse three-quarters and bend 
the arms, dropping tlie clubs in 
the rear of shoulders, holding 
the elbows sideways high; at 4 



(Fig. 71) return to the starting 
position ; in 4 counts. The 
same with bending the trunk 
forward, as in Exercise 6. 

17 Exercise 10, but at 3 bend the 

trunk backward or bend the 
knees. 

18 Execute Exercises 15, 16, and 17 

several times before returning 
to the starting position. 





Fij. 70. 



Fig. 71. 



LESSON 2. 



1 Three-quarters DAC right ; twist 
the trunk left; outer DHC for- 
ward, and three-quarters DAC 
left, back to the starting posi- 
tion, in 4 counts. 

ExrLANATiox. — AVhile the arms 
are in the forward position, and 
the trunk twisted left, the clubs 
describe a DHC downward for- 



ward in a vertical plane on the 
outer side of the hands (which 
should be width of shoulders 
apart). 

The same opposite. 

Three-quarters DAC inward; DHC 
outward in the rear; three-quar- 
ters DAC outward to the start- 
ing position. 



EXEBCISES WITH CLUBS 



lOT 



Explanation. — The anus ex- 
tended sideways, the chibs de- 
scribe DHC outward in tlie rear 
of the arms (Fig. 72), 

4 Exercise 1, but inner DHC for- 

ward. The same opposite; also 
right outer and left inner HC. 

5 Exercise 3, but DHC outward in 

front. 

6 Exercise 1, but DHC backward. 

The same opposite. 



7 Exercise o, but DHC inward in 

the rear. The same DHC in- 
ward in front. 

8 Exercise 4, but DHC backward. 

Same opposite. 

9 Three-quarters DAC forward, re- 

verse to forward position; outer 
DHC forward at three, then only 
one-half DAC forward, and pro- 
ceed as before, in 3 counts. 




Fig. 72. 



Explanation. — This exercise should 
be done several times, that is, 
continued before returning to 
position. 

10 Exercise 9, but DHC backward. 

11 Exercise 9, but inner DHC for- 

ward. 

12 Exercise 9, but inner DHC back- 

ward. 
1.3 Three-quarters DAC forward at 1; 
reverse to forward position at 2, 
one-half DHC backward, lower- 
ing the clubs on the forearms at 
3: outer one and one-half DHC 
forward downward at 4; then 



.repeat several times before re- 
turning to position, in 4 counts. 

14 Exercise 13, but inner one and 

one-half DHC forward. 

15 Exercises 13 and 14, but bend the 

trunk forward at 1, straighten 
at 2. 

16 Exercise 16 of Lesson 1 of this 

grade; but in^ead of returning 
to position at 4, execute an outer 
DHC, forward arms bent; i-epeat 
in 4 counts. 

17 Exercise 16 of this Lesson, but at 

3 bend the trunk backward, or 
bend the knees at 3. 



108 



GEIUfAN-AMElUCAN GYMNASTICS 



LESSON 3. 



1 Exercise 1 of Lesson 2 of this Grade, 

but at 1 liuige left sideways; at 
3 close the heels. 

2 Same opposite. 

3 Exercise 3 of Lesson 2; but at 1 

lunge left backward. 

4 Exercises 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of Lesson 

2 can be done similarly to Exer- 
cises 1, 2, and 3 of this lesson. 

^ Exercise 13 of Lesson 2; but at 1 
lunge left forward, at 3 close the 
heels. Same right. 

(5 Exercise 15; but at 1 lunge left 
forward, at 3 close the heels. 
Same right. 

7 Exercise 1 of this Lesson; at 2 
kneel right, at the same time turn 




Fig. 73. 



10 



LESS 



AC right sideways right (or out- 
ward); HC sideways right (or 
outward) in rear of the right 
shoulder, alternately (Fig. 74) in 
2 counts continued, the arm bent 
during HC. 

The same left. 

AC right forward ; outer HC for- 
ward alternately in 2 counts, the 
arm bent during HC. 



feet left, so that the body has ex- 
ecuted a quarter turn left. At 3 
straighten the right knee; at 4 
close the heels and face front 
(Fig. 73). 

8 The same opposite. 

9 Exercise 3 of this Lesson ; but at 

1 step left forward, at 2 kneel 
right; at 3 straighten the right 
knee ; at 4 close the heels. Same 
right. 
Exercises 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 can be 
done similarly to Exercises 7. 8, 
and 9 of this Lesson. 

11 Three-qtiarters DAC right, one 

and three-quarters DAC left to 
the starting position, in 4 counts. 

12 Same opposite. 

13 Three-quarters DAC outward, one 

and three-quarters DAC inward 
to starting position, in 4 counts. 

14 Three-quarters DAC inward, one 

and three-quarters DAC outward 
to starting position, in 4 coimts. 

15 Exercise 11, with a lunge left side- 

ways at 1 ; close the heels at 3. 
Same opposite. 

IC Exercise 13, with lunge left back- 
ward or right. 

17 Exercise 14, with a lunge left 
backward or right. 

ON 4. 

4 The same left. 

5 AC right sideways left (or inward ) ; 

HC sideways left or inward in 
rear of right shoulder alternately, 
the arm bent during EC. 

6 The same left. Exercises 1, 2, 3, 

4, 5, 0, as continued movements, 
or return to starting position at 3. 

7 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately in 6 

counts. 



EXERCISJ£S WITH CLUBS 



109 




Fig. 74. 



Explanation. — Return to position 
after each HC. 

8 Exercises 3 and 4 alternately in 4 

counts. 

9 Exercises 5 and 6 alternately in 6 

counts. 

10 Exercises 1 and 6 alternately in 6 

counts. Same opposite. 

11 AC right outward; HC right out- 

ward in the rear of the right 
shoulder; AC right outward and 
return to position, in 4 counts. 

12 Same as 11 with left outward; 

right inward; left inward, right 
forward ; left forward. 

13 Combine the Exercises 11 and 12 

alternately in 8 counts. 

14 Five-quarters DAC sideways right; 

twist the trunk right, outer DHC 
forward alternately, in 2 counts. 



Explanation. — Twist the trunk 

during the fifth quarter of the 

DAC. 
Repeat several times before returning 

to position. 
After the first DHC, the DAC is only 

four quarters. 

15 The same left. 

16 Exercise 14, but inner DHC for- 

ward. 

17 The same left. 

18 Three quarters DAC sideways 

right, twist the trunk left; outer 
DHC upward (or backward); 
twist the trunk forward; alter- 
nately in 2 counts. Repeat. 
Explanation. — After the DHC the 
DAC is four quarters. 

19 The same opposite. 



no 



GERM A N-A ME RICA N G YMNA S TICS 



GRADE III. 



LESSON 1. 



1 DAC sideways right; DHC side- 

ways right in rear of the shoul- 
ders ; alternately in 4 counts. 
Continued (without returning to 
position each time). 

2 The same left. 

3 DAC outward; DHC outward in 

rear of the shoulders; alternately 
in 4 counts. 

4 DAC inward ; DHC inward in rear 

of the shoulders; alternately in 
4 counts. 

5 DAC sideways right; DHC side- 

ways right in the rear of the 
shoulders ; DAC sideways right 
and return to position ; same left ; 
alternately in 8 counts. 

6 DAC outward; DHC outward in 

the rear of the shoulders ; DAC 
outward and return to position; 
same inward ; alternately in 8 
counts. 

7 One-half DAC sideways right, 

DHC sideways right in front the 
arms extended downward ; one 
half DAC sideways right ; con- 
tinued alternately in 2 counts, 
the arms extended (Fig. 75). 

8 The same opposite. 
The same outward. 

10 The same inward. 



the 



the 



11 AC right outward ; HC right out- 

ward in the rear, the arm ex- 
tended downward ; continued 
alternately in 2 counts. 
Explanation. — While executing 
the HC, bend the wrist and el- 
bow slightly, allowing the hand 
to touch the body, and move it 
forward over the hip (Fig. 76). 

12 The same left. Also with 

arms upward. 

13 Exercise 11 inward. 
Explanation. — While doing 

HC, the back of the hand against 
the body, moving it backward. 

14 The same left. 

15 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- 

ways right in rear, the arms 
downward. Continued alter- 
nately in 2 counts. 

16 The same left. 

17 The same outward. 

18 The same inward. 

19 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- 

ways right in fi'ont of the shoul- 
ders, the arms bent. 
Continued alternately in 2 counts. 
Explanation. — While doing the 
HC, the knob of the club should 
be between the first and second 
fingers and thumb. 



LESSON 2. 



1 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- 

ways right in rear, leftover (the 
left arm bent, the hand over the 
right shoulder, the arm in front 
of the face) (Fig. 77). Contin- 
ued alternately in 2 counts. 

2 The same left. 



3 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- 

ways right in the rear, the left 
under (the right in the rear of 
the right shoulder, the left hand 
under the right arm). Continue 
alternately in 2 counts. 

4 The same left. 



EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 



111 




Fig. 75. 




Fig. 76. 



112 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 




Fig. 77. 



5 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- 

ways right in the rear of the 
slioulders at 2; DHC sideways 
right as in Exercise 1 at 3. 
Continue in 3 counts. 

6 The same left. 

7 Exercise 5, but at 2 swing tlie 

third movement, and at 3 the 
DHC of the third Exercise. Con- 
tinue in 3 counts. 

8 The same left. 

1) Exercise 5, and at 4 DHC of 
Exercise 3. Continue in 4 
counts. 

10 The same left. 

11 DAC sideways right at 1 ; DHC 

sideways right in rear of the 
shoulders at 2 ; twist the trunk 
right and outer DHC forward at 
3. Continue in 3 counts. 

12 The same left. 



13 Exercise 11, at 4 add the inner 

DHC forward. 

14 The same left. 

15 DAC outward at 1 ; DHC outAvard 

inv the rear of the shoulders 
at 2 ; extend the arms side- 
ways, and DHC outward in front 
at 3 ; bend arms and DHC out- 
ward in the rear of the shoulder 
at 4. 

16 The same inward, without extend- 

ing the arms for ihe second 
DHC. 

17 Most of the DHC of Exercises 1- 

14 can also be done backward 
at the opposite side, then twist 
the trunk forward and DHC in 
the rear of the shoulders. 
The overswings in this lesson can 
be learned easily by exercising 
with one arm at a time. 



EXEECISEti WITH CLUBS 



113 



\ 




Fig. 78. 



LESSON 3. 



HC right outward in the rear of 
the right shoulder at 1 ; AC 
outward at 2. 

AC left outward at 1 ; HC left 
outward in the rear of the 
shoulder at 2, both movements 
simultaneously continued (Fig. 
78). 

HC right inward in the rear of the 
right shoulder at 1 ; AC in- 
ward at 2. 

AC left inAvard at 1 ; IIC left 
inward in the rear of the left 
shoulder at 2, simultaneously 
continued. 

HC right outward in the rear of 
the right shoulder at 1 ; AC 
outward at 2. 



AC left inward, or to the right at 
1 ; HC left inward in the rear 
at 2 simultaneously. 

4 The same as 3 left. 

5 HC right forward at 1 ; AC for- 

ward at 2. 
AC left forward at 1 ; HC left 
forward at 2 simultaneously 
(Fig. 79). Same backward. 

6 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- 

ways right in the rear of the 
shoulders ; three-quarters DAC 
sideways right and double hori- 
zontal HC sideways right. Con- 
tinue in 4 counts. 
Explanation. — Both arms raised 
sideways left (the left arm ex- 
tended, the right arm bent Lo a 



114 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 




Fig. 79. 



right angle), both chibs describe 
a HC to the right in a horizontal 
plane over the hands, at the 
same time both arms move side- 
ways right, the elbows bent 
slightly. 

7 The same opposite. 

8 Th^ same outward. 

9 The same inward. 

Exercises 6, 7, 8, and 9 should be 
taken with one arm at a time, 
until the exercise has been thor- 
oughly learned. 
10 Three-quarters DAC sideways 
right ; then reverse one and 
three-quarters DAC left ; DHC 
sideways left in the rear of the 
shoulders, then the same to the 
opposite side. Continued alter- 
nately in 8 counts. 



11 Three-quarters DAC outward; 

then reverse one and three-quar- 
ters DAC inward ; DHC inward 
in the rear of the shoulders, 
then the same inward. Con- 
tinued alternately in 8 counts. 

12 Three - quarters DAC outward ; 

then reverse one and three-quar- 
ters DAC inward ; DHC inward 
in the rear of the shouldere ; 
three-quarters DAC inward ; one 
and three-quarters DAC out- 
ward ; DHC outward in the rear 
of the shoulders. Continued al- 
ternately in 8 counts. 

13 Exercises 10 and 11 can also be 

done with a double horizontal 
HC instead of DHC in the rear 
of the shoulders, as in the Ex- 
ercises 6, 7, 8, and 9. 



EXERCISES WIT If CLUBS 



IV 



o 



14 Exercise C, with a lunge right 

sideways at 1, close the heels 
at 3. Same opposite. 

15 Exercise 8 and 9 with a lunge left 

or right backward. 

16 Exercise 10, with a lunge left side- 

ways at 1, close the heels at 
3, lunge right sideways at 5, 
close the heels at 7. 

17 Exercise 11, with a lunge right 

backward at 1, close the heels 
at 3, lunge left backward at 5, 
close the heel sat 7. 

18 Lunge sideways right, straighten 

the right arm sideways obliquely 
upward, AC left inward and HC 
inward in the rear of the left 



shoulder at 1 and 2, at 3 close 
the heels and DAC sideways 
right to starting position or con- 
tinue in 2 counts. 
10 The same left. 

20 DAC sideways right, DHC side- 

ways right in the rear of the 
shoulders and one step sideways 
right at 1 and 2 ; DAC sideways 
right, and return to position and 
one step sideways right at 3 
and 4. 

21 Same left. 

Many other exercises can be done 
while marching forward, side- 
ways, and backward. 



LESSON 4. 



1 AC left inward ; follow immedi- 

ately with AC right outward ; 
HC left inward in the rear of 
the left shoulder, followed by a 
HC right outward in the rear of 
the right shoulder. Continue in 
2 counts ; AC and HC wheel right 
sideways. 
Explanation. — Count 1 for AC 
and 2 for HC. 

2 The same left. 

3 Exercise 1, but HC left in the rear 

of the right shoulder, the arm in 
front of the face, wheel right 
witli tlie left over. 

4 The same left. 

5 AC right forward ; follow immedi- 

ately with the left forward ; outer 
HC right forward, followed with 
outer HC left forward in 2 counts. 

6 DAC sideways right at 1, twist the 

trunk right and outer DHC for- 
ward at 2 ; inner DHC forward 
at 3, outer DHC at 4. Continue 
in 4 counts. 



7 The same left. 

8 Exercise 1, after HC in the rear, 

twist the trunk right and exe- 
cute an outer following HC right 
and left forward twice at 3 and 
4, HC wheel. Continue in 4 
counts. 

9 The same left. 

10 Exercise 3, and add the last part 

of the eighth Exercise in 4 
counts. 

11 The same left. 

12 Exercise 1, after HC in the rear 

execute the same in front of the 
shoulders at 3, and rear of the 
shoulders again at 4, in 4 counts. 

13 The same left. 

14 AVheel right sideways as in Exer- 

cise 1 at 1 and 2 ; twist the trunk 
right and outer following HC 
right and left forward at 3, in- 
ner following HC right and left 
at 4. Continue. 

15 The same left. 

16 The same outward. 



116 



GERM A N-AMEBICAN G YMNA S TICS 



18 



Exercise 1 at 1 and 2 ; following 
three quarters AC left and right 
sideways right at 3, following 
horizontal HC right and left 
sideways right at 4. Continue. 

The same left. 



19 All the following HC given in 
this lesson at the right side, the 
trunk twisted right, can also be 
done backward at the left side, 
the trunk twisted left. 



Many other and more difficult exercises may be developed 
from the foregoing, also combinations of movements having 
4, 6, 8, 12, and 16 counts. 



DUMB -BELL EXERCISES 117 



DUMB-BELL EXERCISES 

Bv HENRY SUDER 

The dumb-bell is an apparatus consisting of a short liandle 
with two balls. It is turned of wood, about eleven inches 
long, the bell three inches in diameter, the handle four inches 
long, five-eighths inches thick, and its average weight is from 
one to two pounds. 

All that has been said about calisthenics must be repeated 
here, as nearly all free gymnastic exercises can be practised 
with the dumb-bells. In order not to repeat many exercises 
given under the title Free Gymnastics, the following dumb- 
bell exercises will consist of groups of movements in 2, 4, 

or more counts. 

GROUP I. 

PART 1. 

1 Raise the arms forward. 9 Raise tlie arms sideways, and 

Begin! 1-2 bend the knees. 

2 Bend the knees. Begin!. 1-2 10 Raise the arms sideways upward, 

3 Raise the arms forward, and bend 11 Rise on the toes. 

the knees. Begin! 1-2 12 Raise the arms sideways upward, 

4 Raise the arms upward. and rise on the toes. 

5 Rise on tlie toes. Remarks. — In raising forward and 

6 Raise the arms upward, and rise upward, keep the knuckles out- 

on the toes. ward; in raising sideways, the 

7 Raise the arms sideways. knuckles upward. 

8 Bend the knees. 

PART 2. 
The hands on the shoulders. 

1 Bend the trunk forward, and 2 Bend the trunk backward, and 
straighten the arms downward. straighten the arms upward. 

Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 



118 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



8 Turn the trunk to the right, and 
straighten the arms " forward 
(Fig. 80). 

4 Turn the trunk to the left, and 

straighten the arms forward. 

Begin ! 1-2 

5 Bend the trunk sideways to tlie 

right, and straighten the arms 
sideways. Begin! 1-2 

6 Bend the trunk sideways to the 

left, and straighten the arms 
sideways. Begin! 1-2 



7 Turn the trunk to the right, bend 

forward, and straighten the arms 
backward. 

8 Turn the trunk to the left, bend 

forward, and straighten the arms 
backward. 

9 Turn the trunk to the right, bend 

backward, and straighten the 
arms sideways (Fig. 81). 
10 Turn the trunk to the left, bend 
backward, and straighten the 
arms sideways. 





Fig. 80. 



Fig. 81. 



a E u p 1 1. 



PART 1. 



1 (I. Raise the right arm forward and 
place the right leg forward. 

b. Twist the right arm (knuckles 

upward) and raise and lower 
the right leg forward. 

c. Twist the right arm (knuckles 

outward) and raise and lower 
the right leg forward. 

d. Lower the arm and place the 

leg backward into position. 
Begin ! 1-4 



The same exercise left. 
Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 
With both arms and rise on the 
toes, 

\ As Exercise 1, but raise the arms 
^ sideways and place the leg 
) sideways. 

^ As Exercises 1-4, but raise the 
V arms upward and place the leg 
) backward. 



D UMJi- n KL L EX Eli LIS ES 



119 



PART 2. 



1 ((. Raise the right arm forward 

and j)lace the right leg for- 
ward. 

b. Move the riglit arm sideways 

and place the right leg side- 
ways. 

c. Move the right arm forward and 

place the right leg forward. 

d. Lower the arm and place the 

leg hack into position. 

2 The same exercise left. Begin! 1-4 



9 
10 
11 
12 



Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

With hoth arms and bent 

knees. 
As Exercises 1-4, but raise the 
arms forward and upward and 
place the leg forward and back- 
ward. 
As Exercises 1-4, but raise the 
arms sideways and upward and 
place the leg sideways and 
cross forward. 



GROUP III. 



PART 1. 



Swing the right arm forward and 
place the right leg forward. 1-8 

At the eighth count, bend both 
arms to thrust, and thrust the 
arms forward and rise on the 
toes. 9-lG 

At the sixteenth count lower the 
arms, and return the leg into po- 
sition. 1-10 

As Exercise 1, but begin with the 
left arm. 

PART 2. 



3i 

n 



As Exercise 1-2, but swing and 
thrust the arm or arms upward. 

As Exercise 1-2, but swing and 
thrust the arm or the arms side- 
ways. 

As Exercise 1-2, but swing the arm 
or arms side- 
ways upward, 
and thrust up- 
ward. 



.1 Swing both arms forward. 1-8 

At the eighth count place the hands on the shoulders, 

straighten the arms downward, and bend the trunk 

forward. 9-16 

At the sixteenth count straighten the trunk. 1-16 

2 As Exercise 1, but swing and straighten the arms 

upward, and bend the trunk backward (Fig. 82). 

3 As Exercise 1, but swing and straighten the arms side- 

ways, and bend the trunk sideways right. 

4 As Exercise .3, but bend the trunk to the left. 

5 As Exercise 1, but swing the arms sideways upward, 

and straighten the arms upward, and turn the trunk 
to the right. 

6 As Exercise 5, but turn the trunk to the left. 




Fig. 82. 



120 



GEliMAN-AMElilCAy G YMyASTICS 



GROUF lY 
PART 1. 



a. Bend the knees, and place the 

dumb-bells on the floor inside 
of the knees. 

b. Straighten the right leg back- 

ward (Fig. 83). 

c. Place the leg back into position. 



d. Straighten the knees. Begin ! 1-4 

2 As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

left leg. 

3 As Exercise 1, but straighten both 

legs backward (front leaning 
rest). (Fig. 84.) 




Fig. 83. 

As Exercise 1, but straighten the 
right leg backward, and raise the 
left arm forward. 

As Exercise 4, but the left leg 
backward and the right arm for- 
ward. 

As Exercise 3, but straddle the 

legs. 





Fig. 84. 

As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

right leg forward. 
As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

left leg forward. 
As Exercise 3, but place the 

dumbbells outside of knees and 

straighten both legs forward (rear 

leaning rest). 



PART 2. 



Fig. 85. 



1 a. Bend the knees, and place the 
dumb-bells on the floor inside 
of the knees. 
Straighten the left leg sideways 

(Fig. 85). 
Place the leg back into position. 
Straighten knees. Begin ! 1-4 
As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

right leg. 
As Exercise 1, but straighten the 
left leg and raise the left arm 
sideways. 



DUMB-BELL EXERCISES 



121 



As Exercise 1, but straighten tlie 

right leg and raise the right arm 

sideways. 
As Exercise 1, but straigliten the 

left leg sideways and raise the 

left arm upward. 
As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

right leg sideways and raise the 

right arm upward. 



7 As Exercise 1, but place the dumb- 

bells outside of the knees, and 
straighten the left leg forward, 
and raise the left arm forward. 

8 As Exercise 7, but straighten the 

right leg forward and raise the 
right arm forward. 

9 As Exercise 7, but straighten both 

legs forward (rear leaning-rest). 





Fig. 86. 



Fig. 87. 



GROUP V. 



PART 1. 



Arms to thrust. Cross straddle position (right leg forward). 

7 



1 Thrust the arms forward and bend 

the right knee. Begin ! 1-2 

2 Thrust the arms forward and bend 

the left knee. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 Thrust the arms sideways 

bend the right knee. 

5 Thrust the arms sideways 

bend the left knee. 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 



and 



9 
10 



and 11 



12 



Thrust the arms upward and bend 

the right knee (Fig. S(^). 
Thrust the arms upward and bend 

the left knee. 
Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 
Thrust the arms backward and 

bend the right knee. 
Thrust the arms backward and 

bend the left knee. 
Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 



122 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



PART 2. 



Sidestraddle position. 



1 Thrust tlie arms downward, bend 

the trunk forward, and bend the 
right knee. Begin ! 1-2 

2 Thrust the arms downward, bend 

the trunk forward, and bend the 
left knee. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 Thrust the arms sideways, bend 

the trunk to the right, and bend 
the right knee (Fig. 87). 

5 Thrust the arms sideways, bend 

the trunk to the left, and bend 
the left knee. 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 

7 Thrust the arms backward, turn 



to the right, and bend the right 
knee. 

8 Thrust the arms backward, turn 

to the left, and bend the left 
knee. 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 

10 Thrust the arms upward, turn left 

and bend the trunk backward to 
the right, and bend the right 
knee. 

11 Thrust the arms upward, turn 

right and bend the trunk back- 
ward to the left, and bend the 
left knee. 

12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 



GEOUP VI. 

PART 1. 
Counter exercises. See Calisthenics. 



1 Lunge forward obliquely outward 

and raise the outer arm forward 
obliquely upward, inner hand at 
the outer shoulder (elbow level 
with the shoulder). Begin ! 1-2 

2 The same exercise inward. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 Lunge forward obliquely, outward 

and inward alternately, and 
bend the trunk forward in the 
same direction, and place the 
hands on the hips. 

5 As Exercise 1, but sideways out- 

ward. 



6 The same exercise inward. 

7 Exercises 5 and 6 alternately. 

8 As Exercise 4, but lunge sideways, 

outward aud inward alternately, 
and bend the trunk sideways. 

9 As Exercise 1, but backward out- 

ward and raise the outer arm 
backward obliquely upward. 

10 The same exercise inward. 

11 Exercises 9 and 10 alternately. 

12 As Exercise 4, but lunge backward 

obliquely, outward and inward 
alternately, and bend the trunk 
backward. 



Lunge forward obliquely outward 
and raise the arms forward 
obliquely upward. Begin ! 1-2 

The same exercise inward. 

Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 



PART 2. 
4 



Lunge forward obliquely, outward 
and inward alternately, and bend 
the trunk sideways, outward and 
inward alternately, and place 
the hands on the shoulders. 



D IJMB-BELL EXERCISES 



123 



5 As Exercise 1, but sideways out- 

ward and raise both arms up- 
ward obliquely outward. 

6 The same exercise inward. 

7 Exercises 5 and G alternately. 

8 As Exercise 4, but lunge sideways, 

outward and inward alternately, 
and bend the trunk forward. 



9 As Exercise 1, but lunge backward 
obliquely, the arms backward 
obliquely. 

10 The same exercise inward. 

11 Exercises 9 and 10 alternately. 

12 As Exercise 4, but lunge backward 

and bend the trunk backward. 



G R U P V 1 1. 



PART 1. 



1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and 

place the right leg forward. 

b. Thrust the arms forward, bend 

the right knee, and raise the 
left leg backward (Pig. 88). 

c. Bend the arms to thrust, 

straighten the knee, and place 
the left leg back into position. 
(?. Lower the arms and place the 
right leg back into position. 

Begin ! 1-4 

2 The same exercise left. 

3 As Exercise 1, but thrust sideways. 

4 The same as 3, but left leg for- 

ward. 

5 As Exercise 1. but the right leg 

backward, thrust upward, and 
raise the left leg forward. 
As Exercise 5, but left leg back- 
ward. 



1 As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms 
sideways left and cross the left 
leg backward. 




8 As Exercise 7, but thrust the arms 
sideways right and cross the 
right leg backward. 



PART 

1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and 

place the right leg forward. 
h. Thrust the arms downward, ; 

bend the right knee, bend the ; 

trunk forward, and raise the 

left leg backward. 
c. Bend the arms to thrust, 

straighten the knee and trunk, ; 

and lower the left lejr. 



2. 



d. Lower the arms and place the 

leg back into position. 
The same exercise left. 
As Exercise 1, but place, thrust, 

and bend sideways right. 
As Exercise 3, but place, thrust, 

and bend sideways left. 
As Exercise 1. but place the right 

leg backward, thrust the arms up- 



124 



GEEMA N-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



ward, bend backward, and raise 

the left leg forward. 
As Exercise 5, but place tbe left 

leg backward. 
As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms 



sideways left, cross the left leg 
backward, and turn the trunk to 
the left. 
8 As Exercise 7» but thrust, cross, 
and turn the trunk to the ri<iht. 



G E U P Yin. 



PART 1. 



a. Kaise the arms to thrust and 

bend the knees. 
h. Straighten the knees, and place 

the right leg forward, and raise 

the arms to cut. 

c. Lunge forward right and cut 

with the arms forward. 

d. Lower the arms and place the 

leg back into position. 

Beffin! 1-4 



2 The same exercise left. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 As Exercise 1, but place, and lunge, 

sideways right and cut sideways. 

5 As Exercise 4, but left. 

Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 

7 As Exercise 1, but place, lunge right 

and cut backward. 

8 As Exercise 7, but left. 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 



PART 2. 



«. Raise the arms to thrust and 

bend the knees. 
h. Lunge forward right and raise 

the arms to cut. 

c. Bend the trunk forward and cut 

the arms downward. 

d. Return to position. Begin! 1-4 
The same exercise left. 
Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 



4 As Exercise 1, but sideways right 

and cut sideways. 

5 As Exercise 4, but left. 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 

7 As Exercise 1, but backward right, 

and bend the trunk, and cut the 
arms backward. 

8 As Exercises 7, but left. 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 



GEO UP IX. 



PART 1. 



1 a. Lunge forward right and place 
the hands on the hips. 

h. One quarter turn left (on the 
heels), bend the left knee, 
and place the hands on the 
shouhlers. 

c. One quarter turn right (on the 
lieels), bend the right knee, 
and place the hands on the 
hips. 



d. Lower the arms and jdace the 
leg back into position. 

Begin! 1-4 

2 As Exercise 1, but lunge left and 

one quarter turn right. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

arms forward. 

5 As Exercise 2, but straighten the 

arms forward. 



2) UMn-BELL EXERCISES 



125 



Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 

7 As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

arms sideways. 

8 As Exercise 2, but straighten the 

arms sideways. 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 



10 As Exercise 1, but straighten the 

arms upward. 

11 As Exercise 2, but straighten the 

arms upward. 

12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 



PART 2. 



1 a. Lunge forward right, and raise 

the right arm forward 
obliquely upward, the left 
arm backward obliquely 
downward (Fig. 89). 
6. One half turn left, and change 
the position of the arms (left 
obliquely upward, right 
obliquely downward). 

c. One half turn right, and change 

the position of the arms 
(right obliquely upward, left 
obliquely downward). 

d. Lower the arms, and place the 

leg back into position. 

2 The same exercise left and one 

half turn right. 

3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 

4 As Exercise 1, but bend the right 

arm to a right angle to cover 
the head. 

5 As Exercise 2, but bend the left 

arm to a right angle to cover the 
head. 

6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 

7 As Exercise 1, but lunge sideways 

risht and turn the trunk right. 



8 As Exercise 2, but lunge sideways 

left and turn the trunk left. 

9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 

10 As Exercise 4, but lunge sideways 
and turn the trunk right. 




Fig. 89. 

11 As Exercise 2, but lunge sideways 

and turn the trunk left. 

12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, 



GROUP X. 

PART 1. 

1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and 
lunge forward right, remain 
in position 2 counts. 
h. One quarter turn left and thrust 
the arms forward, remain in 
position 2 counts. 



c. One quarter turn right and 
bend the arms to thrust, re- 
main in position 2 counts. 

d. Lower the arms and place the 
leg back into position, remain 
2 counts. Begin ! 1-8 counts. 



126 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



2 The same as Exercise 1, but lunge 

left and one quarter turn right. 

3 As Exercise 1, but one count for 

each movement. 

4 As Exercise 2, but one count for 

each movement. 

5 As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms 

sideways. 
G As Exercise 2, but thrust the arms 

sideways. 
7 As Exercise 3, but thrust the arms 

sideways. 

PAR 

1 a. Lunge forward right, and raise 

arms to thrust, remain in posi- 
tion 2 counts. 

b. One quarter turn left, bend trunk 

forward and thrust arms down- 
ward, remain in position 2 
counts. 

c. Straighten the trunk, one quar- 

ter turn right, and raise arms 
to thrust, remain in position 2 
counts. 

d. Lower arms and place the leg 

back, remain in position 2 
counts. 1-8 counts. 

2 The same exercise, but lunge for- 

ward left and one quarter turn 
right. 

3 As Exercise 1, but one count for 

each movement. 

4 As Exercise 2, but one count for 

each movement. 



8 As Exercise 4, but thrust the arms 

sideways. 

9 As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms 

upward. 

10 As Exercise 2, but thrust the arms 

upward. 

11 As Exercise 3, but thrust the arms 

upward. 

12 As Exercise 4, but thrust the arms 

u:)ward. 



T 2. 

5 As Exercise 1, but lunge, raise 

arms to thrust, one quarter turn 
left and bend trunk sideways 
right and thrust the arms side- 
ways. 

6 The same exercise, but lunge for- 

ward left, one quarter turn right. 

7 As Exercise 5, but one count for 

each movement. 

8 As Exercise 6, but one count for 

each movement. 

9 As Exercise 1, but one half turn 

left, and bend trunk backward 
and thrust the arms upward. 

10 The same exercise, but lunge for- 

ward left and one half turn 
right. 

11 As Exercise 9. but one count for 

each movement. 

12 As Exercise 10, but one count for 

each movement. 



GEOUP XL 



PART 1. 



1 a. Lunge forward right and raise 
the arms forward, remain in 
position 4 counts. 
b. Lunge sideways right and move 
the arms sideways right, re- 
main in i^osition 4 counts. 



c. Lunge backward right and 
raise the arms upward, re- 
main in position 4 counts. 

(7. Keturn to position, remain 4 
counts. Begin ! 1-16 counts. 
2 The same exercise left. 



D UMB -BEL L E^VER CI.SES 



127 



3 As Exercise 1, but two counts for 

each movement. 

4 As Exercise 2, but two counts for 

each movement. 

5 a. As Exercise 1, but lunge for- 

ward, and raise the arms 

sideways right. 
6. Lunge sideways right, and raise 

the arms upward, 
c Lunge backward riglit, and 

lower the arms forward. 
d. Return to position. 

6 The same exercise left. 

7 As Exercise 5, but two counts for 

each movement. 



8 As Exercise (5, but two counts for 

each movement. 

9 a. As Exercise 1, but lunge for- 

ward right, and raise the 
arms upward. 

b. Lunge sideways right, and lower 

the arms forward. 

c. Lunge backward, and move the 

arms sideways riglit. 

d. Return to position. 

10 The same exercise left. 

11 As Exercise 9, but two counts for 

each movement. 

12 As Exercise 10, but two counts for 

each movement. 



GROUP XII. 



PART 1. 



Dissimilar Exercises. 



Divide the class into the first and second division. 

Calisthenics. 

Avjus to thrust. 



See 



First division lunge forward right, 
and thrust the arms forward. 

Begin ! 1-2 

Second division lunge forward right, 
and thrust the arms sideways. 

Tlie same exercise, but lunge left. 

As Exercise 1, but the first divis- 
ion executes the exercise of the 
second division, and vice versa. 

The same exercise, but lunge left. 



5 First division lunge forward right, 

and thrust the arms upward. 
Second division lunge forward 
riglit, and thrust the arms back- 
ward. 

6 The same exercise, but lunge left. 

7 As Exercise 5, but the first divis- 

ion executes the exercise of tlie 
second division, and vice versa. 

8 The same exercise, but lunge left. 



PART 2. 



First division lunge forward right, 
bend trunk forward, and thrust 
the arms downward. Begin! 1-2 
Second division lunge backward 
right, bend the trunk backward, 
and thrust the arms upward. 

The same exercise, but lunge left. 



3 As Exercise 1, but the first division 

executes the exercises of tlie sec- 
ond division, and vice versa. 

4 The same exercise, but lunge left. 

5 First division lunge sideways right, 

bend the trunk sideways right, 
and thrust the arms sideways. 



128 



GER3IA N- AMEBIC AN G YMNASTICS 



Second division hinge sideways, 
bright end the trunk forward, 
and thrust tlie arms sideways. 
6 The same exercise, but hinge left. 



7 First division executes the exercises 

of the second division, and vice 
versa. 

8 The same exercise, but lunge left. 



PART 3. 
Divide the Class into Centre and Outer Divisions. 



a. Centre division lunge forward 
right, and raise the arms for- 
ward, remain in position 4 
counts. 
6. Move the arms sideways and 
remain 4 counts. 

c. Move the arms forward and 

remain 4 counts. 

d. Return to position, 4 counts. 

l-ll) counts. 
Outer division lunge forward and 
raise the arms forward. 
6. Move the arms sideways. 

c. Move the arms forward. 

d. Return to position. 

Begin ! 1-4 
The same exercise, but lunge for- 
ward left. 



3 The centre division executes the 

exercises-' of the outer divisions, 
and vice versa. 

4 The same exercise left. 

5 The centre division as Exercise 1, 

but — 
a. Lunge backw^ard, and raise the 

arms sideways. 
h. Raise the arms upward. 

c. Lower the arms sideways. 

d. Return to position. 

6 The same exercise, but lunge back- 

ward left. 

7 The outer divisions execute the 

exercises of the centre division, 
and vice versa. 

8 The same exercise, but lunge left. 



PART 4. 
Divide the Class into Centre and Outer Dia'^isions. 



1 a. Centre division lunge forward 
right, and raise the arms for- 
ward, and remain in position 
four counts. 
6. Centre division bend the trunk 
forward, remain in i)osition 
four counts. 

c. Centre division straighten the 

trunk, and remain in position 
four counts. 

d. Return to fundamental position, 

remain four counts. 

1-16 counts. 
1 a. Outer divisions lunge sideways 
outward and raise the arms 
sideways. 



b. Outer divisions bend the trunk 

sideways outward. 

c. Outer divisions straighten the 

trunk. 

d. Return to fundamental position. 

1-16 counts. 
The same exercise, but the centre 

division lunge forward left, and 

the outer divisions lunge sideways 

inward. 
The centre division executes the 

exercises of the outer divisions to 

the right, and vice versa. 
The same exercise, but the centre 

division to the left, and the outer 

divisions lunge forward left. 



D UMB-BELL EXEKCISES 



129 



As Exei'cise 1. — (i. Centre division 
lunge backward right and raise 
the arms upward. 

h. Bend the trunk backward and 
lower the arms sideways. 

c. Straighten the trunk and raise 

the arms upward. 

d. Return to position. 1-lG counts. 
As Exercise 1. — «. Outer divisions 

lunge sideways outward and 
raise the arms sideways. 
h. Outer divisions turn the trunk 
outward and raise the arms 
upward. 



<-. Outer divisions turn the trimk 
forward and lower the arms 
sideways. 
d. Return to position. 
(3 The same exercise, but the centre 
division lunge backward left, 
and the outer divisions lunge 
inward. 

7 The centre division executes the 

exercise of the outer divisions to 
the right, and vice versa. 

8 The same exercise, but the centre 

division to the left. 



130 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA 8 TICS 



, EXERCISES ^WITH RINGS 



Bv 1)K. KARL ZAPP 



These exercises belong to light gymnastics, and permit of 
a great number of variations after the manner of free gym- 
nastics, dumb-bell and wand exercises, etc. 

Tlie exercises with the rings offer combinations which are 
characteristic of these exercises. These are the combinations 

which result from the position of 
the participants, who are generally 
coupled together in pairs, either 
side by side, face to face, or back 
to back (Fig. 90). The class may 
also be arranged in groups of three 
(triangle), four (square or ring), 
and in a half-circle, circle, or lines 
composed of as many members as 
the room permits. 

With tactics and fancy steps 
beautiful and interesting combina- 
tions and Roundels (^Ileigeii) may be arranged. 

A combination of ring exercises, as well as any other 
combination of light gymnastics, should contain in proper 
alternation one or more groups of exercises for the most im- 
portant groups of nuiscles and the principal parts of the body. 
The following four groups may illustrate the principle : — 




Fig. 90. 



EXERCISES WITH RINGS 131 

Group I. Leg Exercises. 

Group II. step and Lunging Exercises. 

Group III. Trunk Exercises. 

Group IA . Balancing Exercises. 

Group I. contains the more strenuous exercises of the 
legs, such as the bending of knees, kneeling, etc. 

Group II-, the different step-positions and their combina- 
tions. 

Group III. contains the bending and twisting of the trunk 
in all directions. 

Group IV. contains exercises in which the w^eight of the 
body is balanced on one foot, while the other leg is held in a 
certain position, or moved from one position into another. 

All four groups should be accompanied by suitable arm 
movements, making a special group of arm movements super- 
fluous. No strict line of demarcation need be kept between 
the different groups ; the exercise of one group may be com- 
bined with a suitable exercise of any other group. 

The rings afford excellent opportunity for the so-called 
resting exercises. 

The rings are not necessarily indispensable, but afford a 
pleasant variation in the routine free gymnastics, and are 
especially appropriate for higher grades of misses' and ladies' 
classes. 

A. EXERCISES IN POSITION — FACE TO FACE. 

GROUP I. 

Leg and Arm Movements. 

1 Raising the heels in 2 counts, com- arms sideways upwards, or bend- 

bined with or alternating with ing of arms, or straightening of 

such arm exercises as raising of arms from a flexed position. 



132 



GEliMAN-AMEBICAN G YMNASTICS 



:i Bending the knees (on the ball of 
the foot), half way (right angle), 
or as far as possible, quickly or 
slowly, combined with similar 
arm exercises ; care must be 
taken that the body is kept in 
an erect position. 

3 The alternate raising of the heels 

and the bending of the knee with 
arm movements ; i. e., raise heels 
with arms in position sideways, 
1 ; lower, 2 ; bend knees with 
arms upward, 3 ; position, 4. 

4 Raising the heels and bending the 

knees interchained ; i. e., raise 



the heels and bend the arms, 1 ; 
bend the knees and straighten 
the arms sideways or upwards, 2 ; 
reverse, 3-4. 
5 Each of the two partners performs 
a different exercise at the same 
time ; i. e., 

Xo. 1, raise the heels and bend the 
arms, and 

No. 2, bend the knees and straight- 
en the arms upward, 1 ; both re- 
turn to position, 2 ; 

Nos. 1 and 2 exchange exercises, 
3-4. 



GEOUP IT. 

step and Lunging Exercises. 

All tlie step and lunging exercises can be executed in this 
position except those directly forward. Examples : 



Also, step or lunge sideways 
extension of arms in the same 
direction or upward ; or step 
backward with the arms upward 
or cross steps forward or back- 
ward ; or lunge backward with 
extension of the arms forward. 

In a step position raising of the 
heels (rising on the toes), or bend- 
ing of the knees ; i.e., step posi- 
tion left, obliquely forward, with 
bending of the arms, 1 ; rise on 
the toes with extension of arms 
upward, 2 ; reverse, 3-4 ; the 
same exercise right, 5-8. 

The rising on the toes may also 
be done several times in the same 
position before changing. 

Step position backward left, arms 
sideways, 1 ; bend both knees, 
the arms upward, 2 ; reverse, 3-4 ; 




From position — arms bent : 
Step position or lunge obliquely 
forward, with extending the same 
arm in the same direction, the 
other arm in the opposite direc- 
tion (P^ig. 91). 



EXEliCISES WITH HI AGS 



l2o 



oo 



the same with step position of 
the riglit foot, 5-8. 

Eacli of the two partners may per- 
form a different exercise at tlie 
same time. 

Lunging (or charging) in tlie same 
or in the opposite direction, rock- 
ing of tlie knees, or Icneehng. 
Example : — 

o. Lunge obliquely forward left ex- 
tending the arms, 1 ; rock the 
knees (change extension of 



the legs) and bend the arms, 
2 ; reverse, 8-4 ; the same 
right, 5-8. 

b. Lunge obliquely backward, the 

arms forward, 1 ; rock knees, 
the arms outward, 2 ; reverse, 
3-4 ; the same right, 5-S. 

c. Lunge sideways left, the arms 

extended, 1 ; rock, and bend 
arms, etc., 2-8. 

d. Both lunge in one direction (one 

left, the other right). 



GROUP III. 



Trunk Movements. 



Bending backward. 

This can be performed com- 
bined with raising of the arms 
outward or upward, also with 
step or lunging positions, i.e., — 
Bend the trunk backward with 
step position obliquely forward 
left, and the arms sideways, 1 ; 
raise the arms upward, 2 ; re- 
verse, 3-4. 

Bending forward and downward. 



These two movements can only 
be executed in an oblique direc- 
tion. They may be accompanied 
by arm and leg movements. 

Step position backward, 1 ; 
bend forward (hollow back), 2 ; 
reverse, 3-4. 
Turning or twisting of the trunk. 

Performed in one direction, 
one turning left, the other right 
(forward or backward). 



Turning of the trunk may be combined with the various 
trunk and leg exercises, as : — 

Turn the trunk to the front with forward arm overhead and 
forward leg in cross step position backward. Turning of the 
trunk may also be combined with lunging. 



GROUP IV 

Balancing Exercises {StauduKj on One Foot). 

These exercises may be executed in a similar manner as the 
step position, i.e., — 



134 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

a. Raise the left leg and the arms d. Raise the left leg obliquely for- 

sideways, 1; lower, 2. ward, with the arms outward, 1 ; 

b. Raise the left knee and both arms move the left leg backMard, the 

upward, 1 ; lower, 2. arm upward, 2; reverse, 3-4. 

c. Flex the left leg backward and the 

arms outward, 1 ; lower, 2. 

B. EXERCISES IN FRONT POSITION. 

The class may be arranged so that the members stand 

singl}' holding ring in one hand ; or two are conpled together 

holding one ring between them ; or the entire rank may be 

joined together each holding with one hand the neighbor's 

ring. 

G R IT P I. 

Leg Exercises. 

Rising on the toes and bending of the knees Avith all possi- 
ble variations are available, also the performance of different 
exercises by different individuals at the same time. 

GROUP IL 
Step and Lunging Exercises. 

All movements except lunging directly sideways may be 
executed. If the members are standing alone, the ring may be 
moved from one hand to the other during an exercise ; i.e., — 

Step or lunge obliquely sideways left ring overhead, 2 ; lunge or step 

with the arms and the ring ex- obliquely sideways right and the 

tended to the right, the ring in arms to the left, the ring in the 

the right hand, 1 ; close the heels, left hand, 3 ; position, 4. 
with the arms upward and the 

G ROUP II I. 
Trunk Movements. 

All the different movements backward, forward, downward, 
and sideways may be performed. 



EXERCISES WITH RINGS 135 

GROUP 1\. 
Balancing Exercises. 

See exercises in position Face to Face. 

C. EXERCISES IN POSITION — BACK TO BACK. 

GROUP I. 
Leg Exercises. 

In this position, bending of the knees is not very practica- 
ble, as partners are usually in too close proximity. 

Rising on the toes, combined with the arm movements, is- 
available. 

GROUP XL 

Step and Lunging Exercises. 

These exercises may be practised as in the position face to- 
face, and with all possible variations. 

GROUP III. 

Trunk Exercises. 

Trunk exercises are also limited in this position, being 
restricted principally to bending sideways, twisting, and a 
slight bending back^vard in an oblique direction. 

GROUP lY. 

Balancing Exercises. 

These allow of about as much variety as in the position 
face to face. 



136 GERM A N-A MER ICA N G YMNA S Tl CS 



FANCY STEPS 

Bv CHRISTIAN EBERHAKI) 

These exercises, while mainly intended for misses or ladies, 
may also be practised to advantage by young boys. The exer- 
cises have a tendency toward the development of grace, a good 
and erect bearing or carriage, and will be found admirable for 
the development of the respiratory organs. 

Children usually delight in work of this kind, and these 
movements will prove valuable to enliven and cheer up an 
otherwise indifferent or dull class. 

LESSON 1. 

The pupils are ranged in single file, and march around 
the hall. It is advisable to change the direction in which 
the pupils are marching several times during each lesson. The 
hands are placed on the hips, or the arms crossed backward. 

1 Follow (or lock) step left forward. 4 Follow step with raising the knees 

(The left foot advances a nioder- forward. (The knee of the strid- 

ate pace, the right foot follows, ing leg is raised forward at a 

and the fundamental position is right angle, the toes extended 

resumed ; i.e., the heels are downward.) 

locked. ) 5 Follow step with swinging (quickly 

2 Follow step right forward. (The raising and lowering) the legs 

right foot advances and the left forward. 

foot follows. ) Follow step with raising the heels 

3 Follow step left and right alter- backward. 

nately. (Let it here be under- 7 Follow step with raising the heels 

stood that, if no conunand to in front. (In front of the op- 

the contrary is given, the al- posite leg.)* (Fig. 92.) 

ternate movement is ahvays 8 Follow step obliquely forward, 

meant.) (Instead of striding straight for- 



FAJSICY STEPS 



:6i 



ward, stride in an obliciue diag- 
onal direction.) 
9 Follow step forward and sideways 
alternately. (After execnting 
one step forward left and right, 
execute one follow step sideways 
left and right.) 
10 Skip left forward. Galop. (In- 
stead of locking the heels, in 
this exercise, the toes of the 



right foot are placed against the 
heels of the left foot.) 

11 Skip right forward. 

12 Skip left and right forward alter- 

nately. 
18 Skip left sideways (after the class 

has faced to the right). 
14 Skip right sideways (after the 

class has faced to the left). 




Fig. 92. 



V 



V 



\^ 



Fig. 93. 




Fig. 93 b. 



LESSON 2. 



1 Change step (Fig. 93). (The left 

foot advances, the right foot fol- 
lows in such a manner that the 
toes of the right foot are placed 
in about a right angle against 
the heel of the left foot ; then the 
left foot advances again. After 
this, the right foot advances, 
the left foot follows against the 
heel of the right foot, etc. 

2 A Change step, with the leg move- 
. y ments as in Exercises 4, 5, 6, and 

5 -^ 7 of Lesson 1 . 

6 Change step left and right ob- 

liquely forward. 



7 Change step with turning (facing) 

right and left. 

8 Change step with turning (facing) 

left and right. 

9 Double change step (schottische 

step). (The left foot advances 
twice in succession and the 
right foot follows twice, after 
which the left foot advances a 
third time. Then the right foot 
advances as the left did.) 
10 Double change step with turning 
right and left. (The movement 
is now sideways. The tiu'n is ex- 
ecuted on the ball of the foot. ) 



188 



GERM A y- AM ERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



LESSON 3. 



1 I'olka step. (Same as the change Galop step forward four steps 



2^ 

«•> 

O 

4 

5 


7 
8- 



step, only executed with three 
light hops, the most vigorous of 
which is done on the first count.) 

Polka stej) with leg movements 
and variations, as in Exercises 2, 
3, 4, 5, 6, T, and 8 in Lesson 2. 



(hops) with each foot. 
10 Galop step left and right side- 
ways. (The first turn is to 
the right, four hops each way. ) 



LESSON 4. 



Touch step. (The toes of the strid- 
ing leg touch the floor gently at 
a distance somewhat less than 
one half of an ordinary pace ; 
after the touch, the stride is com- 
pleted. ) 

Touch step with bending the oppo- 
site knee. (When the left foot 
touches, the right knee bends.) 

Touch step with crossing the feet 
in front. (The feet are crossed 
during the touch only.) 

Touch step with crossing the feet 
in front and bending the opposite 
knee. 

Double touch step. (The toes 
touch twice, after which the 
stride is finished.) 



G Double touch step, with crossing 
the feet at the second touch. 

7 Double touch step, with crossing 

the feet as in Exercise 6, and 
bending the opposite knee dur- 
ing the second touch. 

8 Double touch step, front and 

rear. (The first touch in front, 
• the second after moving the 
striding leg slightly backward.) 

9 The same as Exercise 8, ^^ ith bend- 

ing the opposite knee during the 
touch in front. 
10 The same as Exercise 8, with 
bending the opposite knee dur- 
ins: the touch in the rear 



LESSON 5. 



1 Double touch and change step. 
(Two touches and then change 
step as in Lesson 2. ) 

-\ 

3 Double touch and change step with 

4 V variations, as in Exercises 0, 7, 
^ 8, 9, and 10 of Lesson 4. 

g; 

7 Double touch and polka step. { The 

same variations can also be used 
liere again. ") 

8 Heel and toe polka. (Double touch 

and polka, but instead of touch- 



ing both times with the toes, the 
heel is touched on the floor in 
the first count, and the toe in 
the second count, with the feet 
crossed in front, while simul- 
taneously with each touch there 
is a slight hop on the other foot. ) 
9 The same as 8, with touching the 
heel in front and tlie toe in the 
rear. 
10 Double polka. Similar to Exer- 
cise 8, but instead of touchin- 



FANCY STEPS 



139 



the heel and the toe, the striding 
leg is swung ohliquely forward 
during the first hop, and crossed 
in front of the other with heel 



raised backward during the sec- 
ond hop, after which the polka 
step follows. 



LESSON 6. 

For this lesson the pupils are ranged in a colunni of twos 
(in couples or pairs). The inner hands are joined and raised 
to shoulder height, the outer hands are placed on the hips. 
The pupils to the left begin with the left, those to the right 
with the riglit, foot. 



1 Change step. 

2 The same as in 1, but obliquely for- 

ward (with opening and closing 
the ranks). 
;] Polka step obliquely forward, etc. 

4 Polka step obliquely forward, with 

facing toward and away from 
each other. 

5 Polka step forward and obliquely 

forward alternately. 
G Polka step forward and sideways 
alternately (without and with 



facing (turning) toward and 
away from each other). 

7 Galop step, four steps each way 

obliquely forward (with opening 
and closing the ranks). 

8 Galop step sideways (with facing 

toward and turning away from 
each other). 

9 Schottische step, obliquely for- 

ward. 
10 Schottische step, with turning as 
in Exercise 8. 



LESSON 7. 



1 Follow step with rising on the toes 

(with balancing). 

2 Rocking step. (Step forward left 

and throw the weight of the body 
onto the left leg, slightly raising 
the right foot off the floor ; at 
2, rock back onto the right foot, 
slightly raising the left foot off 
the floor ; at 3, the left foot is 
placed on the floor as in an ordi- 
nary step or stride. Then the 
right foot is placed forward for 
the forward rock, etc.) 

3 Rocking step, with rocking the 

trunk forward and backward, the 



free leg is kept in a line with the 
trunk. For this exercise the arms 
should be locked (arms crossed 
and the hands grasped). (Fig. 94. ) 
Cross balance step. The left leg 
takes a moderate pace obliquely 
forward to the left, then the right 
foot is crossed in front of the 
left, at the same time balancing 
(rising on the toes and very 
slightly raising the left foot off 
the floor) ; in the third measure 
the feet (body) settle down again. 
Then the right leg strides oblique- 
ly forward to the right, etc. 



140 



G Eli MA N-A MER ICA JSf G VMXA S TICS 



This is best practised first in 
single file, with the hands upon 
the liips. 

5 Cross balance step, with swinging 

left and right arm in a half 
circle overhead. 

6 Cross ])alance step, with bending 

the trunk sideways right and 
left. 

7 Cross balance step, with bending 

the trunk sideways right and 
left, and swinging the left and 
right arm in a half circle over- 
head (Fig. 95) 



8 The same as Exercise 7, but with 
swinging both arms sideways to 
a circle overhead (Fig. 96). 

Q The same as Exercise 7, but swing 
both arms sideways to the left 
and right. (As the trunk is 
bent sideways, the arms shoidd 
point obliquely upward in a line 
with the shoulders. ) 
10 Cross balance hop. Like Exer- 
cise 4. with a light hop on the 
first count. (Spring from the 
right onto the left foot.) 





Fig. 94 a. 



Fig. 94 b. 



LESSON 8. 



Waltz hop. Two hops on each 
foot, the free (unoccupied) leg 
extended backward. 

Waltz hop, the free leg extended 
sideways. 

Waltz hop, the free leg extended 
forward. 

Waltz hop, with swinging the free 
leg obliquely forward in front of 
the other leg (crossing legs for- 
ward). 

The same as Exercise 4, with slid- 
ing the swinging leg over the 



fioor during the first part of the 
swing. 

6 The same as Exercise 4, with rais- 

ing the heel in front and extend- 
ing the leg downward. 

7 Rocking hop. While hopping for- 

ward twice on the left foot, swing 
the right leg backward and bend 
the trunk forward, then the right 
foot comes up to where the left 
foot had been, the right foot ap- 
parently striking the left away ; 
and while hopping forward twice 



FANCY STEPS 



141 



on the right foot, the lefL leg is 
swung forward and the trunk 
bent backward. 
The same as Exercise 7, but ad- 
vancing with the right leg. 
'The same as Exercise 7 or 8, 
but backward instead of for- 
10 I ward (retreating instead of ad- 
\ vancing). 



.f 



Exercises 7, 8, and 9 are best ex- 
ecuted in a column of twos, or 
fours, etc. They will also make 
an excellent impression if exe- 
cuted in a front line, the whole 
class advancing or retreating in 
one line, the arms locked for- 
ward or backward. 




Fig. 95. 




Fig. 96. 



LESSON 9. 
Mazurka Step 



The 2)t(pll'^ (t)'e 

The pupils face each other, the 
hands on each other's shoul- 
ders. 

Mazurka step sideways (around 
the hall ). In the first measure the 
left (or right) foot steps sideways, 
in the second measure the right 
(or left) foot hops up and appar- 
ently strikes away the left (or 
right) foot, and this left (or 
right) foot swings sideways ; in 
the third measure another hop 
follows on the right (or left) foot 



ranyed in twos. 

and the free left (or right) leg 
swings sideways, slightly bent, in 
front of the hopping leg. (The 
exercise is thus : step, hop, hop.) 
The same foot advances all the 
time. 

2 The same as Exercise 1, but around 
the hall the other way. After 
changing places, those foi'merly 
on the inside are now on the 
outside. 

o Mazurka step sideways across the 
hall (best done in single file). 



142 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G VMNASTICS 



4 Mazurka step forward, the left 

foot advancing. 

5 Mazurka step forward, the right 

foot advancing. 

6 Mazurka step forward, left and 

right alternately. In order to 
be able to alternate, the exercise 
must be executed in four meas- 
ures (if the left foot began, this 
same foot is placed down on the 
floor in the fourth measure), 
and the exercise is now : Step, 
hop, hop, step. 



7 Polka mazurka step (mazurka 

step as in 4, followed by the 
polka step). 

8 Polka mazurka step, Avith one 

half turn of the couples (or 
twos). The turn to be contin- 
uously in the same direction. 

9 The same as 8, with the turn in 

the opposite direction. 
10 The same as Exercise 8, with 
turning alternately left and 
ri.o-ht. 



LESSON 10. 



Exercises 1-9 in single tile. Exercises 1-6 inclusive may 
also be done in a front line. 



1 Cross step twirl with one half turn 

in 5 measures. Two ordinary 
■ steps (or paces) forward ; in the 
third measure cross the left foot 
in front of the right ; in fourth 
measure turn right about on the 
balls of the feet ; in fifth meas- 
ure turn back again in the same 
manner. 

2 The same as 1, beginning with the 

right foot. 

3 Cross step twirl with one half turn 

in 4 measures. Similar to Exer- 
cise 1, taking but one step for- 
ward, crossing the feet in the sec- 
ond measure, etc. The turn is now 
alternately left and right about. 

4 Cross step twirl in measures. 

The same as 3, with three steps 
forward instead of one. 

5 Cross step twirl with full (four 

quarter) turn in 5 measures. Ex- 
ecuted as follows : Tliree steps 
forward, cross the right foot in 
front of the left in the fourth 
measure, and turn completely 
around on the balls of the feet in 



the fifth measure. (The turn is 
to the left. ) 

6 The same as 5, beginning with the 

right foot. (The turn is now to 
the right. ) 

7 Stride twirl in four measures. 

Three steps forward, in fourth 
measure execute a full turn to 
the right (four quarter turn) on 
the ball of the left foot, swinging 
right leg in a half circle to the 
right (around the left leg). 

8 The same as Exercise 7, but begin- 

ning with the right foot. (The 
turn is now to the left. ) 

9 Stride twirl in 3 measures. Take 

two steps forward instead of 
three ; the turn is now alter- 
nately left and right. 
10 In couples, or column of twos 
with the arms locked. The same 
as Exercise 1 ; those on the in- 
side (to the left) beginning with 
the left foot, those on the outside 
(to the right) beginning with the 
right foot. (The arms remain 
locked. ) 



FANCr STJ^PS 



148 



LESSON 11. 

In a Column of Twos, 

The inner Jicinds are joined and raised to shoulder height, the outer hands 

are placed on the hips. 



1 March and polka alternately, 8 

measures for each movement. 
(Eight paces forward and 4 polka 
steps forward. ) 

2 March and galop forward alter- 

nately, 8 measures each. 

3 Polka and galop forward alter- 

nately, 8 measures each. 

4 Galop and heel and toe polka for- 

ward alternately, 8 measures 
each. 

5 Beginning with the feet on the 

outer side (those to the left with 
the left foot, those to the right 
with the right foot), march for- 
ward and galop sideways. Dur- 
ing the first 4 galop ste]3S, facing 
toward each other, the hands 
joined and raised shoulder height, 
during the next 4 galop steps 
facing away from each other. 

6 Beginning with the feet on the 



outer side as in 5, polka foi"- 
ward and galop sideways. 

7 Beginning with the feet on the 
outer side, as in Exercise 5, \\vA 
and toe polka forward and galop 
sideways. 

S Beginning with the feet on the 
outer side, as in Exercise ."), 
double polka with opening and 
closing the ranks, and galop side- 
ways. 

9 Beginning with the feet on the 
outer side, march forward 8 
paces, and polka, holding the 
partner, and turning a half turn 
to each polka step as in dancing 
8 measures. 
10 Holding the partner as in dan- 
cing ; heel and toe polka witli 
half turns 8 measures, and 8 
galop steps, with a half turn 
after the fourth step. 



LESSON 12. 



1 Cross step hop in 4 measures, as 

follows : two ordinary steps for- 
ward (beginning with the left 
foot) ; in the third measure cross 
the left foot in front of the right 
foot ; and in the fourth measure 
hop once on both feet. 

2 The same as Exercise 1, but begin- 

ning with the right foot. 

3 Cross step hop in 3 measures. One 

step forward, cross the feet in 
the second, and hop in the third 
measure. (An odd number of 
counts or measures alternates the 
exercise left and right. ) 



4 Cross balance hop. (Similar to 

cross balance step of Lesson 7. ) 
Instead of a step left obliquely 
forward in the first measure, 
spring from the right foot, at the 
same time swinging the left leg 
obliquely forward, and then land- 
ing on the left foot. The second 
and third measures are the same 
as in the cross balance step, only 
livelier. 

5 A combination of change step and 

cross balance step. 

6 Change step and cross step hop 

(see Exercise 1). After the 



144 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



change step, cross the right foot 

in front of the left in the fourth, 

and hop on hoth feet in the fifth 

measure. 
Cross balance step and cross step 

hop. G measures. 

(The cross balance step is to 

the left, the cross step hop to the 

right.) 
Mazurka step and cross balance 

step. 6 measures. 

(During the first 6 measures 

left forward, during the next 6 

measures right forward.) 



9 Mazurka step and cross step hop. 

6 measures. 

(As in Exercise 8, the first 6 

measures left forward, the next 

6 measures right forward. ) 

10 Cross balance step and a full turn 

cross twirl. 6 measures. 

(The first balance step to the 

left, the cross twirl to the right ; 

the next balance step to the 

right, and the cross twirl to the 

left, etc.) 



Many of tlie exercises of these twelve lessons may be varied 
(as partly exemplified in Lesson 6) by opening and closing the 
ranks of two, by changing places with each other, by having 
one pupil circle around the other, wdiile tliis one marks time, 
etc. 

Appropriate arm, trunk, head, and leg exercises or combina- 
tions of these may be executed with many of the steps. 



FOUR LESSONS FOR PUPILS ARRANGED IN 

OPEN ORDER. 



(AS FOR FREE EXERCISES.) 



LE SSON 1. 



Tlie hands upon tJie hips. 



1 Follow step sideways left and right 

with balancing on the toes. 

2 The same as Exercise 1, with 

swinging the arms sideways in a 
circle overhead (Fig. 97). 

3 Two hops alternately on each foot, 

raising the free leg backward 
(waltz hopping). See Lesson 8. 

4 The same as Exercise 3, raising or 

swinging the free leg sideways. 



5 The same as Exercise 3, swinging 

the free leg forward. 

6 The same ag Exercise 3, swinging 

tlie free leg obliquely inward 
(crossing in front of the other 
leg, also with sliding the foot 
over the floor). 

7 The same as Exercise 6, with bend- 

ing the trunk sideways and swing- 
ing one arm in a half circle over- 



FANCY STEPS 



U5 



head (if bending to the riglit SAvins^ the left ann, 
and reverse). 

8 Cross step twirl with a half turn in 4 measures side- 

ways left and right alternately. (Sidestep left, cross 
the right foot in front of the left, turn left about on 
the balls of the feet.) See Exercises 1 and 3, Lesson 
10. 

9 The same as 8, with arm exercises : (for example, 

place the hands on the shoulders, while crossing the 
feet; raise the arms in a circle overhead, while turn- 
ing about; the hands again on the shoulders, while 
turning back ; and, finally, the hands on the hips) 
(Fig. 97). 
10 The same as Exercise 8, adding a hop on both feet 
after turning to the front in the fourth measure 
and while the feet are still crossed, thus executing 
the whole exercise in .5 measures. 

LESSON 2. 




Fig. 97. 



1 Cross balance step sideways left 

and right (see Lesson 7). 

2 Cross balance step with swinging 

one arm in a half circle over- 
head. 
;] Cross balance step sideways with 
bending the trunk sideways. 

4 Cross balance step, with bending 

the trunk sideways and swingin_g 
one arm in a half circle overhead. 

5 The same as in Exercise 3, and 

swinging both arms in a circle 
overhead. 

6 Exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 toward 

each other and away from one 
another (inward and outward). 

7 Change step and cross balance 

step sideways left and right. 
(Execute one change step to the 



left in three measures, cros-s the 
feet in the fourth, and balance 
in the fifth measure.) 

8 The same as Exercise 7, with arm 

exercises as follows : During 
the change step sideways to the 
left, raise both arms sideways to 
the left ; and during the re- 
mainder of the exercise continue 
the movement with the arms in 
the same direction upward, and 
curve them to a circle overhead. 

9 Polka step and cross balance stej) 

sideways left and right. 
10 The same as Exercise 9, toward 
each other, etc. Also with arm 
exercises, as in Exercise 8, add- 
ing a bending of the trunk side- 
ways, etc. 



LESSON 3. 



Mazurka step sideways left. (Any 
stated number of steps. For three 
mazurka steps the counting will 
be: 1,2,3; 1,2,3; 1,2,3,4.) 



The same as Exercise 1, sideways 

to the right. 
One mazurka step sideways left 

with waltz turn. (The class has 



14G 



GEE MA N-A ME RICA N G YMNA S TICS 



now moved about two paces to 
the left and is facing tlie other 
way. After a second mazurka 
step and waltz turn to the left 
the class is back in place, and 
facing as at first.) 

4 The same as Exercise 3, to the 

right. 

5 Mazurka step and cross balance 

step sideways left and right. 

G The same as Exercise 5, obliquely 
inward (toward each other), and 
out^^■ard in such a manner, that, 
during the balance, files one and 
two form one file, and files three 
and four another file, etc. (Fig. 
98). 

7 Stride twirl sideways left and right . 
with two consecutive half turns 
in the same direction. The ex- 
ercise is executed as follows : 
In the first measure the left foot 
is placed sideways to the left ; in 
the second measure a half turn 



left is executed on the ball of 
the left foot, while the right leg 
describes a half circle forward 
around the left leg ; in the third 
measure a half turn is executed 
on the ball of the right foot, 
while the left describes a half 
circle backward around the 
right ; in the fourth measure the 
heels are locked (Fig. 99). 

8 The same as Exercise 7, to the 

right. 

9 The same as Exercise 7, inward 

and outward (either the odd or 
the even files should now be one 
pace farther forward than the 
others), with crossing over or 
changing places of the files. 
(File two crosses over to where 
file one has been, and file one 
to where file two has been, and 
back to places again.) 
10 The same as Exercise 9, but be- 
ginning in the opposite direction. 



T- -r 
\ <-' 

*4 



■■f 



y 



i^*. 



v^"T/ 



"\^ 



Fig. 98. 

LESS 

1 Stride twirl and cross balance step 

sideways left and right. (The 
stride twirl, as before, but in the 
fourth measure the right foot 
crosses in front of the left foot, 
and in the fifth measure the bal- 
ance follows.) 

2 The same as Exercise 1, inward 

and outward (with crossing over 
and changing places as in Exer- 
cise 9 of the third lesson). 



Fig. 99. 



ON 4. 



3 The same as Exercise 2, beginning 

in the opposite direction. 

4 The same as Exercise 1, with a 

hopping movement. (Hop twirl 
and balance hop. ) 

5 The same as Exercise 2, with a 

hopping movement. (Hop twirl 
and balance hop.) 
Cross balance step and cross twirl 
with a full turn. (After execut- 
ing the cross balance step to the 



FANCY STEPS 



14" 



left, place the right foot side- 
ways to the right, cross the left 
in front of the right, and execute 
a complete circle to the right on 
the balls of both feet. Xext the 
right foot begins the cross bal- 
ance, etc.) 
7 Cross twirl and cross balance step. 
(The same as Exercise G, only 
beginning with a full turn.) 



8 Mazurka, stride twirl (two half 

turns), and cross balance step 
sideways left and right. 

9 The same as Exercise 8, inward 

and outward (crossing over in 
the files). 
10 The same as Exercise 9, but be- 
ginning in the opposite direc- 
tion. 



148 



GERM A N-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



HORIZONTAL BAR 



By F. AV. FROEHLICH 



The exercises are arranged, in three grades of four lessons 



eacl 



ABBREVIATIONS OF TERMS USED. 



Sidestand 



SS 



Frontsidestand . FSS 

Rearsidestand . RSS 
Crossstand . . CS 

Leftcrossstand . LCS 

Rightcrossstand, RCS 



Handhang 



HH 



Elbowhang . . EH 



Shoulderhang . ShH 



Bentarmhang . BAH 



Overbold 



Underhold 



OH 



UH 



Twistunderhold, TUH 



Stand directly under the bar, the bar and a line 
drawn through the shoulders run parallel. 

Facing the bar, a distance of one, two, or more feet 
between the body and a vertical line drawn through 
the bar. 

Facing from the bar, at a distance same as FSS. 
Stand directly under the bar, a line drawn through the 
shoulders runs at right angles to the bar. 

A CS with the left flank toward the bar at a distance 
varying as in FSS. 

A CS with the right flank toward the bar at a distance 
varying as in FSS. 

The body hanging suspended from the bar by means of 
the hands ; the legs together, the toes downward. 

The bent arm over the bar forward, the hand down- 
ward, clinched. 

The l)ent arms over the bar forward, the hands close 

together. 
The arms bent to an acute angle, the shoulders close 

to the bar. 

Handhang, the hands width of shoulders apart, the 
back of the hands toward the rear, thumbs inward 
and under the bar. 

The back of the hands toward the front, the thumbs 
outward and imder the bar. 

Raise the arms sideways, thumbs downward, palms 
toward the rear. Raise the arms up toward the 
bar ; in this position take hold, the back of the 
hand toward the front, little fingers inward. 



HORIZONTAL BAR 



149 



Frontrest 



FR 



Rearrest 



RR 



Sidehang 


. SH 


Crosshang 


CH 


Bentarmrest 


. BAR 


Jumpoff . . 


• JO 



The body is supported by means of the arms, tlie bar 
ill front, the hands OH or UH, and width of tlie 
slioulders apart. The body rests against the bar at 
the thiglis, the legs together, the toes downward, 
the chest forward, and tlie back arched. 

Similar to the FR, with the bar in the rear of the 
body. 

See sidestand. 

See crossstand. 

See FR and RR, but the arms bent. 

After finishing an exercise, jump off, landing on the 
feet, bend the knees to an angle and raise the arms 
forward, then change to the fundamental iDOsition. 



G K A 1) E I. 



LESSON I. 
High Bak. 

The bar should be at such a height from the floor, that the person exercis- 
ing can do a HH and have his toes from three to six inches from the floor. 

SS. Jump into — 

1 The HH; OH ; JO ; repeat several times. 

2 As Exercise 1, with UH ; also 1 and 2 alternately. 

3 As Exercise 1, with TUH. 

4 SS at the left end of the. bar, jump to HH ; OH ; 

travel sideways right by moving the right hand 
four or five inches sideways, following with the 
left ; JO. 

5 The same opposite. 

6 As Exercises 4 and 5 with UH ; also with TUH. 

7 As Exercises 4 and 5 in a BAH withUH; also with OH. 

8 As Exercise 4, moving both hands simultaneously, 

bending the arms slightly immediately before the 
change. 

9 As Exercise 8, with UH ; also in a BAH. 

10 A HH ; OH ; change the right hand to UH ; also left 

hand ; change right hand back to UH ; also the 
left hand ; repeat several times ; JO. 

11 As Exercise 10, changing both hands simultaneously 

to UH, bending the arms just before the change. 

12 A HH ; OH ; raise the right knee forward and lower 

in 2 counts ; the same left (Fig. 100). 




Fig. 100. 



150 



GEBMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASIICS 



13 As Exercise 12, alternately in 4 

counts. 

14 As Exercise 12, raising both knees 

forward and lower. 




Fig. 101. 

15 As Exercises 12, 13, and 14 in a 

. BAH, with OH or UH, raising the 

straight legs forward (Fig. 101). 



10 Bend and |traighten the arms as 
often as possible, first with UH, 
then with OH. 

17 At the right end of the bar HH ; 

OH ; travel left sideways with 
a half turn left and right alter- 
nately. 
Explanation. — The right shoulder 
moves forward ; the right hand 
takes OH on the opposite side 
of the bar, the left hand retains 
UH ; then the same left for- 
ward. 

18 At the right end of the bar, 

UH ; travel left sideways with 
a half turn backward. Continue 
changing from UH to OH alter- 
nately. 



LESSON 2. 
High Bar. 



1 Crosshang, right and left hand in 

OH ; on the opposite sides of the 
bar ; bend the arms ; raise the 
right leg forward, throwing it 
over the bar from the right side 
into a crosskneehang ; the arms 
extended ; the left leg and body 
parallel with the bar, change to 
CH. and JO. 

2 The same left. 

3 As Exercise 1, changing to EH 

right and place the left hand on 
the hip (Fig. 102); back to knee- 
hang and CH, and JO. 

4 The same left ; execute the change 

from the kneehang to CH several 
times. 

5 As Exercises 3 and 4 alternately. 

6 HH and OH shortswing forward and 

backward from four to eight 
times; JO. 



Explanation. — The body, remains 
under the bar ; swing the legs 
forward and backward alternate- 
ly ; with the backward swing 
arch the back well, throwing the 
chest forward, and bending the 
arms slightly ; jump off with 
the back ward swing. 

7 HH ; OH ; shortswing forward, back- 

ward ami forward, and then turn 
over backward into a squatdrop- 
hang, the soles of the feet 
against the bar, the knees and 
hips flexed between the hands ; 
turn forward into HH ; JO. 

8 As Exercise 7, and turn over back- 

ward into the rearhang ; JO. 
Explanation. — The knees ex- 
tended, the hips flexed. 

9 As Exercise 7, and inner side- 

kneehang right ; change to squat- 



HORIZONTAL BAR 



151 



drophaiig ; to HH ; and JO. >S('o 
Exercise 1. 
Explanation. — Squat through 
right, tlirowing tlie leg over the 
bar forward ; extend the left leg 
forward in a line with the trunk, 
the arms straight (Fig. lOo). 



10 The same left. 

11 The same as Exercise 9, witli the 

outer-knee hang right. 

12 The same left. 

13 As Exercise 9, and swing the 

left leg upward and downward, 
flexing the left hip ; stop the 



14 
15 




Fig. 102. 



swing, turn backward, squat- 
ting through left backward into 
the rearhang ; JO. 

The same left. 

As Exercise 13, and innerknee- 



backward into kneehang ; squat 
forward into the HH, and JO. 

16 The same left. 

17 As Exercises 1.5 and 16, with out- 

erkneeswingup forward. 



swingup right forward ; drop 18 As Exercise 15, and knee wheel 




Fig. 103. 



right backward ; and drop into 
the kneehang right ; turn back- 
ward into the rearhang ; JO. 
Explanation. — One and one-quar- 
ter circle backward. 

19 The same left. 

20 As Exercises 18 and 19, with outer- 

kneewheel backward. 



21 As Exercises 18, 19, and 20, with- 
out dropping backward into the 
kneehang (in one swing) ; 
change both hands to UH ; turn 
over or drop forward into the 
kneehang ; to HH, and JO. 



P. S. — If necessary, all the kneehangs and kneeupswings 
can be taken through more thoroughly on the low bar. 



152 



GERMAN-A3IEIiICAy GYMNASTICS 



LESSON 3. 
Low Bau. 

Height of the shoulders. 



1 FSS ; OH ; jump into FR ; halt- 
circle with the right leg for- 
ward, inward (Fig. 104) ; half 
circle backward, outward ; JO. 

Explanation. — The right leg de- 
scribes one half circle forward 
over the bar, passing under the 



right hand, which should be re- 
placed, the body supported by 
means of the hands ; the right 
leg extended downward. 

2 The same left. 

3 As Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 




Fig. 104. 

4 As Exercise 1, but half circle with 

the right leg backward inward 
into the FR. 
Explanation. — The right leg passes 
backward under the left hand. 

5 The same left. 

6 FSS : OH ; jump into the FR; a 

half circle with the right leg for- 
ward; outward and a half circle 
backward inward ; JO. 
Explanation.— In the half circle 
forward the right leg passes un- 
der the left hand. 




Fig. 105. 

7 The same left. 

8 FSS; OH ; jump into the FR; half 

circle with the right leg forward 
inward ; crotchwheel backward 
several times, half circle with 
the right leg backward, and 

JO. 

The same left. 

As Exercise 8, but from a FSS 
jump and at the same time half 
circle with the right leg forward, 
outward ; change to UH, and 
crotchwheel forward. 



9 
10 



HORIZONTAL BAR 



153 



11 As Exercise 8 ; after half circle 
forward a quarter turn left, both 



14 




15 



10 



Fig. 106. 

hands in front of the body in 
outerhold ; crotchwheel side- 
ways left or right. 
Explanation. — For the crotch- 
wheel right sideways the left 
hand should be in front of the 
right, and vice versa. 

12 Innerkneehang left ; throw the 

right arm forward over the bar ; 
into the SH; right ; and wheel 
backward. 

13 The same opposite also with hands 

close together. 



RSS. Throw the arms over the 
bar, the forearms under and for- 
ward ; the hands pressed against 
the chest, and swing forward and 
backward in the rear upperarm- 
hang (Fig. 105). 

As Exercise 14, with upperarm- 
wheel forward. 

FSS; OH ; frontswingup back- 
ward into the FR ; JO backward 
(Fig. 100). 
Explanation.— The legs swing 
over the bar, at the same time 
bring the hips against the bar, 
flexed ; then, by means of the 
arms and a straightening of the 
hips, raise the body into FR. 

17 Frontswingup backward ; swing 

the legs forward under the bar, 
bending the arms slightly ; then 
swing backward ; the body free 
from the bar into the free FR; 

JO. 

18 As Exercise 17, and a fronthip- 

wheel backward ; JO. 
Explanation. — With the forward 
swing execute a complete turn 
backward around the bar at the 
moment when the hips touch the 
bar. 
Frontswingup backward ; half 
circle with the right leg forward ; 
inward ; the same left into the 
RR, OH. Sittingwheel backward 
(see knee wheel backward). 



10 




20 As Exercise 19, but with one leg 
or both legs outside of the hands. 



154 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



21, Turn over backward into the 
nesthang several times. Also 
with extending one leg back- 
ward (Fig. 107). 



ExPLAXATiox. — The toes against 
the bar, the knees and the body 
pressed through backwards, the 
back well arched, the head up. 



P. S. After learning the exercises of this lesson thoroughly, 
take them on the bar raised a few feet higher. 



LESSON 4. 
High Bak. 



1 Side HH ; OH ; longswing forward 

and backward ; JO. 
Explanation. — Bend the arms, 
raise the legs forward, the feet 
above the bar ; then extend the 
hips and arms, throv,- the chest 
forward; arch the back well, at 
the same time pushing the body 
as far as possible. Then swing 
backward, renewing the hold by 
slightly moving the hands over 
the bar at the beginning of the 
forward swing. Eepeat several 
times, and jump off with the 
backwards wing. 

2 Longswing, and raise the left 

hand at the end of each back- 
wardswing, replacing it immedi- 
ately. The same right and alter- 
nately ; JO. 

3 As Exercise 2, raising both hands 

simultaneously. 

4 At the left end of the bar, long- 

swing and travel sideways right. 
Move the right hand first, follow- 
ing with the left at the end of 
the backwardswing. 

5 The same opposite. 

As Exercise 4, moving both hands 
simultaneously. 

7 The same opposite. 

8 Longswing, and raise the knees in 

forwardswing: also spread the legs 
in forward and backwardswing. 



9 HH; UH ; longswing, change right 
and left hand to OH ; at the end 
of the backwardswing ; also 
both hands simultaneously. 

10 HH; OH ; longswing, at the end of 

the forwardswing change to an 
outerkneehang right ; to HH; 
JO. 

11 The same left. 

12 As Exercise 10, changing to a 

squatdrophang ; turn backward 
into a rearhang ; JO. 

13 As Exercise 10, changing to sul 

innerkneehang right ; to a HH, 
and JO. 

14 The same left. 

15 HH ; OH ; longswing, with the 

backwardswing change to EH 
right ; to HH, and JO. 

16 The same left. 

17 As Exercise l."3, but from EH to 

SH ; then HH and JO. 
IS The same left. 

19 As Exercise 17, with boLh arms 

EH, then to upperarmhang, fore- 
arms crossed, the hands OH ; 
back to HH; JO. 

20 Shortswing and half turn back- 

ward into a squatdrophang ; ex- 
tend the legs upward in front of 
the bar to a frontdrophang ; 
bend the arms and pullup back- 
ward into the FR ; lower back- 
ward slowly to HH, and JO. 



IIOIUZONTAL BAR 



155 



21 UH frontpulliip backward into the 

FR; OH ; lower backward to 
HH, and JO. 
ExPLAXATioN. — Similar to Exercise 
20, but without the swing and 
squatdrophang, the knees ex- 
tended. 

22 As Exercise 20, turning forward 

into a squatdrophang ; to HH, 
and JO. 

23 HH, OH ; shortswing forward, 

backward and forward with a 
jerkup forward to a BAR right 
(Fig. 108); lower to HH, and 
JO. 

24 The same left. 

25 As Exercise 23, pushing left into 

the FR ; turn forward, the hips 
flexed, until the toes touch the 
bar ; lower with extended legs to 
HH, and JO. 



2G The same left. 

27 As Exercise 25, to FR ; men front- 




hip wheel backward, and finish 
as in Exercise 25. 



GRADE II. 



LESSON 1. 



how Bar 



Shoulder 

At the left end of the bar FR; OH; 
travel sideways right moving both 
hands sinuTltaneously (hopping). 
The same left. 

FR as in Exercise 1; a half circle 
with the right leg forward out- 
ward; the legs in the crossstrad- 
dle position between the hands ; 
travel as in Exercise 1. The same 
left. 

As Exercise 2 ; stop in the middle 
of the bar ; crotehwheel back- 
ward ; one half circle left forward, 
and with one quarter turn right 
JO. 

The same left ; also forward right 
and left. 



fieU/ht. 

5 FR; OH; one half circle right for- 
ward inward ; left forward in- 
w^ard into the RR; UH; lower to 
a rear BAR ; swing the body for- 
ward and backward ; stop and 
lower the body to rearhang (RH) 
JO. 

0. RSS ; throw both arms over the 
bar backward, forearms under 
the bar, and the hands pressed 
against the chest ; the body hang- 
ing on the upper arms (rear 
upperarmhahg) ; swing and rear 
upperarm wheel forward ; JO. 

7 As Exercise 5, lowering into a rear 
upperarmhang and wheel as in 
Exercise G. 



156 



GERMAN-AMEinCAN GYMNASTICS 



As Exercise 7, with a rear 
wheel UH backward ; JO. 




BAR 10 FSS; OH; jump and mount by a 
half circle with the right leg 
forward inward, change the 
right hand to UH, then dismount 
by a half circle left forward in- 
ward and one quarter turn right 
into the LCS. Turn dismount 
forward left (Fig. UO). 

11 The same left. Execute Exer- 

cises 10 and 11 without a stop. 

12 As ExercisTi 10, with a half circle 

right forward outward. The 
same left. 



Fig. 109. 

9 FSS; OH; turn over backward into 
a reardrophang, the hips ex- 
tended, rearpullup forward into 
RR (Fig- 109); change to UH, 





Fig. no. 

and sittingwheel forward ; JO. 
The same backward with OH ; 
JO. 



Fig. ni- 
ls FR right hand UH, left hand OH, 
and frontvault right into the 

RCS (Fig. 111). 
Explanation. - Swing the legs for- 
ward and backward, and then 
with a quarter turn right the 
body passes in a horizontal posi- 
tion over the bar, facing it. 

14 The same opposite. 

15 RR : OH. Flankvault left into 

RSS. 

EXPLANATION. -Similar to Exercise 

13, but without the quarter turn 

right. 
The same left. 
FR: OH. Rearvault right into 

LCS (Fig. 112). 



16 
17 



HORIZONTAL BAR 



Vol 



ExpLAXATiox. — With a quarter turn 
left, raise the legs forward to a 
right angle, clear the har facing 
from it ; replace the left hand, 
raising the right arm sideways, 
when landing ; change to the 
fundamental position. 

18 The same left. 

19 As Exercises 10, 11, and 12 from 

a FSS. 




LESSON 2. 



High Bar. 



Fig. 112. 



HH, OH. 

1 Longswing, during the backswing 

change to EH; right swing; for- 
ward and change to HH; JO. 

2 As Exercise 1, left; also with both 

arms. 

3 As Exercise 1 from EH; change 

to SH ; back to HH, and JO. 

4 The same left ; also with both 

arms. 

5 As Exercise 1, but to SH, then 

swingover backward into the 
FR. Underswing (US) JO into 
the RSS. 
ExPLAXATiox. — us JO is similar to 
the beginning of taking a long- 
swing. See Exercise 1, Lesson 4, 
Grade I. 

6 The same left ; also with botharms. 

7 OH LS; turn backward into the 

squatdrophang ; to a RH JO. 

8 As Exercise 7, but from the squat- 

drophang change to an inner- 
kneehang right ; kneeupswing 
forward; kneewheel backward; 
change to UH and kneewheel 
forward ; lower forward into the 
kneehang ; change to RH; JO. 

9 The same left. 

10 LS; turn as in Exercise 8, and 



outer kneeupswing right for- 
ward ; one half circle right back- 
ward outward into the FR; US 
JO. 

11 The same left. As Exercise 10 

and 11 without a stop. 

12 As Exercise 10, with inner knee- 

swingup right forward ; change 
the right hand to UH ; raiG(; the 
left leg sideways and hook it 
under the bar and wheel for- 
ward ; half circle left forward 
inward into the RR ; JO. 

13 As Exercise 12, with crotchwheel 

backward, OH ; (Fig. 113), 
change the right hand to UH, 
turn, dismount forward left into 
the RCS. 

14 The same left. 

15 LS ; OH and crotchupswing for- 

ward right; dismount as in Ex- 
ercise 13. 
Explanation. — Similar to the in- 
ner kneeswingup, but with both 
knees extended. 

16 As Exercise 15 ; then a half circle 

left forward, inward into the 
RR; change to UH; lower for- 
ward into the RH ; then forward 
into the HH; JO. 



158 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



17 The same left. 

18 As Exercise 16, but lowerbackward 

into the RH. The same left. 

19 LS and frontswingup backward 

into the FR; fronthipwheel 
backward US ; JO. 
Explanation. — With the forward 
swing bend the arms and hips 
slightly, throw the hips against 
the bar, at the same time raising 
upward to a FR. 

20 LS and crotchswingup forward 

right ; a half circle left forward 
inward into the RR; change 



to UH; raise the legs forward 
and drop into the rear BAR; 
straighten the hips and wheel 
forward (Fig. 114) ; lower to 
the RH, and JO. 

21 The same left. 

22 Shortswing forward backward ; 

forward and jerkup forward into 
the FR; lower backward into 
the HH; JO. 
Explanation? — First come to BAR 
right, follow immediately with 
the left, and straighten the 
arms. 




Fig. 113. 




Fig. 114. 



LESSON 3. 



High 
HH OH. 

Raise the legs forward ; raise them 
upward ; instep touching the bar 
to a half drophang ; squat back- 
ward and extend the hips to a 
reardrophang ; lower backward 
to a RH (the hips flexed or ex- 
tended while lowering) ; turn ' 
forward into the HH; JO. 

As Exercise 1, but while in RH re- 



Bar. 

lease the hold with the right 
hand ; execute one complete turn 
around the left arm ; both hands 
OH; JO. 

3 The same opposite. 

4 As Exercise 1, to a reardrophang; 

then a rearpullup forward into 
the RR; JO forward. 

5 As Exercise 4, with a rearswingoff 

backward into the SS. 



IIORIZOXTAL B . 1 11 



ir)9 



Explanation. — Before swinging 
off, lower the body forward so 
that the back rests against the 
bar (Fig. 115) ; then with ex- 
tended hips turn over backward 
and release the hold. 

6 UH; LS and inner kneeswingup 

right forward ; with a half circle 
left forward inward, dismount, 
or JO into the RSS. 

7 The same opposite ; also with a 

quarter turn right into the RCS 
and LCS. 

8 Swingup as in Exercise G, then a 

half circle left forward into the 
RR; UH and sittingwheel for- 
ward and JO forward in a con- 
tinued swing. 

9 HH right hand OH ; left hand UH ; 

and LS inner kneeswingup right 
forward with half turn left, 
changing the right hand to OH 
extend the right leg, bend the 
left, the body resting on the left 
thigh, outer kneewheel left back- 
ward three times ; half a circle 
left backward outward; hip- 
wheel backward and US ; JO in 
a continued swing. 

10 The same left. 

11 HH; LS; with the forward swing 

half turn left, the same with the 
next forward swing ; repeat sev- 
eral times (Fig. 116). 



Exi'LAXATioN. — With the half turn 
release the hold of both hands 
and take OH on the opposite side 
of the bar. 




Fig. 115. 



12 
13 



The same right. 

As Exercise 11 ; after the half 
turn, crotchswingup right for- 
ward; half turn left crotch- 
wheel backward ; US JO. 
Explanation. — The left leg squats 

forward with the US and JO. 
14 The same opposite. 




Fig. 116. 



15 HH OH; LS and turn backward 
into the reardrophang; rearpull- 
up forward ; half turn left into 



the FR; hipwheel backward 
with a JO backward into the 
FSS. 



160 



GERMAy-AMERICAX G YMNASTICS 



16 The same opposite. 

IT As Exercise 15, but in a continued 

swing, that is to a RR. 
18 The same opposite. 



19 HH; LS and change to SH right ; 
to FR ; with a backward swing 
freehipwheel backward two 
times and US JO. 



LESSON 4. 
High Bar. 



HH ; OH ; and LS ; turn backward 
to an innerkneehang right and 
left ; release the hold of both 
hands ; straightening the hips 
and with a forward swing exe- 
cute a dropkneehang ; swingoff 
into the RSS (Fig. 117). 




Fig. 117. 

E X p L AX A Ti o X. — Dropkneehang : 
body hangs in the knee joints, the 
hips extended, the head down- 
ward. 

2 As Exercise 1, to an innerkneehang 

right and left, swing backward 
and forward several times and 
execute a sitting upswing back- 
ward into the RR. Half circle 
right and left backward, inward 
into the FR ; right hand UH ; 
frontvault left into the RCS. 

3 The same opposite. 



4 HH ; OH ; LS ; and frontswingup 

backward into the FR ; half turn 
left backward into the RR UH ; 
and a backwheel forward ; lower 
forward into the RH ; JO. 

5 The same opposite. 

G LS several times, then during the 
forward swing keep the hips ex- 
tended so that the body swings 
into a horizontal position; break 
the swing by suddenly bending 
the hips and throwing the feet 
against the bar and quickly 
dropping the legs to HH and JO. 

7 As Exercise C ; but instead of 

dropping the legs, throw them 
forcibly forward from the bar, at 
the same time pull the body up- 
ward ; forward to a BAR right ; 
with the next backwardswing 
straighten both arms to a FR : 
US; JO. 

8 The same left. Exercises 7 and 

8 can also be done to SH right. 

9 UH ; frontpullup backward into 

the FR ; change to OH and lower 
backward slowly into the HH, 
holding the legs forward in 
position; lower the legs; JO. 

10 OH ; frontpullup backward ; lower 

brckward into a half drophang, 
turn backward into the RH ; turn 
forward into the HH; JO. 

11 HH : shortswing jerkup forward 

right and follow quickly with the 
left into the FR ; US into the HH ; 



HORIZONTA L BA 11 



1()1 



LS swing backward forward and 
frontswingup backward into the 
FR; US JO. 



Explanation. — A frontswingup 
backward is similar to a front- 
pullup backward. 



G Pv A D E I T T. 

LESSON 1. 
Low Bak. 

Height of the shoulders or hips. 



FR ; OH. 

1 Circle right forward inward into 

the FR and flankvault right into 
the RSS. 

2 The same left. 

.3 Circle right forward outward into 
the FR and frontvanlt left into 
the RCS. 

4 The same opposite. 

5 Circle right forward inward, left 

forward inward and rearvault 
right into the LCS. 

6 The same opposite. 

7 Flankswing left (half circle with 

both legs) forward into the RR ; 
flankswing right backward into 
the FR and squatvault forward 
into the RSS. 
Explanation. — The legs pass 
throngh between the hands, the 
knees bent and together. 

8 The same opposite. 

9 The above exercises can also be 

done from a FSS. 

FSS ; OH ; squat forward into the 
RR, seiaarate the legs, sit on the 
bar and change both hands to an 
inner close hold (the hands to- 
gether), then straddle sitting- 
wheel backward. JO forward. 
This can be done at first witli 
one hand on the outside. 

FSS ; OH ; straddlevault forward 
into the RSS. 



10 



11 



12 As Exercise 11, but into the 

straddle seat, and wheel back- 
ward as in Exercise 10. 

13 FR ; squat forward right into a 

crossstraddlerest (the right leg 
forward, the left backward), 
shears left sideways ; squat 
left backward into the FR 
and flankvault left into the 
RSS. 
Explanation. — Shears : one half 
circle right back^^ard, inward 
and left forward, inward ; the 
legs crossing over the bar at the 
same time. 

14 The same opposite. 

15 As Exercise 12, after the wheel 

drop backward into an inner- 
kneehang right and kneeswing- 
up forward, with a half circle 
left forward dismount. 

16 The same opposite. 

17 FSS ; UH ; frontswingup back- 

ward ; raise the trunk and strad- 
dle the legs sideways ; hook the 
toes under the bar and toewheel 
forward (Fig. 118) ; JO back- 
ward. 

18 FR ; squat forward into the RR ; 

squat backward into the FR ; 
hipwheel forward ; squatvault 
forward into the RSS. 

19 FR ; OH. Turn over (handspring) 

forward. 



162 



GERM A N-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



ExPLANATiox. — Swing the legs for-' 
ward under the bar, bending the 
hips and arms slightly ; then 
swing them backward upward 
and tiu'n over forward, executing 



a complete turn, landing on the 
feet. Push off strongly with the 
hands, the back well arched. 
Exercise this at first with bent 
arms, then with extended arms. 



P. S. Learn the above exercises thoroughly before attempt- 



ing them on the high bar. 




Fig. 118. 



LESSON 2. 



High Bak. 



HH. 

1 The right hand UH; the left Ot : 

LS and inner kneeswingup right 
forward and with a half circle 
left forward inward and a half 
turn right come into the FR OH, 
fronthipwheel backward with a 
JO backward into the FSS. 

2 The same opposite. 

3 OH ; LS : sitting swingup forward : 

sittingwheel backward into the 
RR and swingoff backward into 
the FSS. 

4 As Exercise 3, with sittingwheel 

forward with UH ; and JO for- 
ward into the RSS. 

5 As Exercise 3, with a straddle 

sitting swingup, forward wheel 
backward and JO forward. 



6 HH, OH ; frontpidlup forward into 

the FR, change right to UH and 
frontvault left into RCS. 

7 The same left. 

8 As Exercise C, with squatvault 

forward into the RSS. 

9 HH : OH : shortswing jerkup for- 

Mard into the FR ; drop back- 
ward into the HH, and again 
the shortswing jerkup US ; 
JO. 

10 HH ; OH ; frontpullup forward, a 

half turn left into the RH. 
Lower the body forw. Avith ex- 
tended hips and knees into the 
reardrophang; turn forward into 
the HH ; JO. 

11 HH : OH ; LS a half turn left in 

the forward swins: and a front- 



HOBIZONTAL BAR 



163 



swingup backward into the FR ; 
US ; JO. 

12 The same opposite. 

13 LS and a rearswingnp forward 

into the RR ; rearhipwheel back- 
ward ; JO forward. 

14 As Exercise 13 witli UH and a 

backwlieel forward into the rear 
BAR ; a half turn left into a 
front BAR, push up for^^•ard 
and straighten the arras into the 
FR ; squatvault forward. 

15 The same opposite. 

IG HH ; OH ; LS and longswing jerk- 
up forward into the FR ; US 
JO. See Exercise 7, Lesson 4, 
Grade II. 

17 As Exercise 16, and a freehip- 



wheel backw'ard w^ith JO back- 
Avard. 

18 As Exercise 17, with a rearvault 

right into the LCS. 

19 As Exercises 10, 17, and 18 with 

UH ; for the longswing jerkup 
and OH for the rearvault. 

20 LS and longswing jerkup forward ; 

freehipwheel backward into the 
FR; change to UH and swing 
over forward into the HH; LS 
and JO at the end of the back- 
wardswing. 

21 As Exercise 20, but at the end of the 

backward swing, change to OH, 
and frontswingup backward into 
the FR ; flankvault left into RSS. 

22 The same opposite. 



LESSON 3. 
High Bak. 



1 HH OH ; turn backward into the 

reardrophang ; lower backward 
into a rear horizontal lever (head, 
trunk, and the legs in one line ) ; 
lower into the RH ; JO. 

2 As Exercise 1, but from the lever, 

rise to a reardrophang, squat for- 
ward into a f rontdrophang ; lower 
into the HH, the legs forward ; 
lower the legs ; JO. 
Z Raise the legs forward ; frontpull- 
up forward ; turn forward into 
frontdrophang ; squat backward 
into a rearlever, then sink to a 
RH : release the hold right and 
four quarters turn around the left 
arm into the HH and JO. 

4 The same opposite. 

5 Frontpullup backward into the FR ; 

lower backward into the HH, the 
legs being held forward and re- 
peat; lower the legs and JO. 



6 HH ; OH ; longswing jerkup for- 

ward; swing out backward and 
repeat ; US JO. 

7 Longswing jerkup forward ; squat 

forward right ; shears left side- 
ways ; a half circle left back- 
,-j ward outward and flankvault 
right. 

8 The same opposite. 

9 Longswing jerkup forward ; free- 

hipwheel backward and squat- 
vault forward. 

10 As Exercise 9, but after the free- 

hipwheel, swingout backward 
and rearswingup forward into 
the RR ; JO forward with a half 
turn into the FSS. The same 
opposite. 

11 Longswing jerkup forward ; US 

and repeat with a rearvault 
right. 

12 The same left. 



164 



GERM A K-A MEliICA N G YMNA S TICS 



13 HH ; OH ; longs wing pullup for- 

ward with a f rontliipwheel back- 
ward, and JO backward (similar 
to a slow pullup). 

14 As Exercise 13, with UH ; but 



change to OH for the fronthip- 
wheel. 
UH LS and rearswingup forward 
into RR with a half turn left into 
the FR ; squat forward and JO. 




Fig. 119. 



LESSON 4. 
High Bah. 



1 UH longswing jerkup forward ; 

swingover forward and long- 
swing pullup forward into the 
FR ; change to OH and freehip- 
wheel backward ; rearvault right 
into the LCS. 

2 The same opposite. 

3 UH longswing pullup forward ; 

toewheel forward with a swing- 
over forward ; at the end of the 
backwardswing change to OH 
and rearswingup forward with 
JO forward. 

4 OH, longswing jerkup forward with 

a circle right forward inward 
and flankvault right into the 
RSS. 

5 The same left. 

6 As Exercise 4, but circle right 

forward, outward and a rear- 
vault right into the LCS. 

7 The same opposite. 

8 Longswing jerkup forward and a 

flankvault left. 

9 The same right. 

10 As Exercise 8, with a rearvault 
left. 



11 The same right. 

12 As Exercise 8, with a rearvault 

right. 

13 The same left. 

14 As Exercise 8, with squatvault 

forward. 

15 As Exercise 8, with a straddle- 

vault forward. 

16 HH ; UH right hand, OH left hand ; 

the hands close together ; raise 
the legs forward, at the same 
time executing a half turn left; 
bend the arms and pullup right 
forward into the BAR right; ex- 
tend the liips, release the hold 
left, and a half turn left ; into 
the rear BAR ; take UH left 
lower to a rearlever. JO. 

17 The same opposite. 

18 HH hold as in Exercise 16, the 

hands apart ; turn over back- 
ward to a rearlever ; move the 
hands close together ; one quar- 
ter turn right and change to a 
BAR right ; lowering the legs, 
release the bold left, change to 
OH left ; a quarter turn right 



UOlilZONTAL BAR 



165 



19 

20 



21 



and push upward into the FR ; 
lower backward into the HH, the 
(Fig. 119) legs forward ; JO. 
The same oiiposite. 
HH ; OH 1 longs wing jerkup for- 
ward into the FR, dropjerknp 
forward ; rearvault right into 
the LCS. 
Explanation. — Dropjerknp : simi- 
lar to tiie longswing jerkup, drop 
the trunk backward, the feet 
against the bar, swing them from 
the bar about 4 to 6 inches, re- 
turn and forcibly straighten 
hips, jerkup up to FR. 
HH ; OH ; longswing pullup, with 
a half circle right and left for- 
ward inward ; also forward out- 
ward ; also with fi-ont, rear, 
flank, squat, or straddle vaults 
forward. 
HH ; OH ; LS ; and frontswing- 
over backward with longswing 
jerkup forward ; dropjerknp for- 
ward ; US ; JO. 
Explanation. — Frontswingover is 
similar to a frontswingup back- 
ward, without stopping and 
touching the bar ; the body 
again coming into the HH and 
LS. 
HH ; OH left hand, UH right hand ; 
LS and with the backwardswinir 



22 



23 



into the HH and repeat and 
flank vault left forward. 

26 HH ; OH ; longswing jerkup for- 

ward; underswing and louii- 
swing pullup forward ; dropjerk- 
np forward and high frontvault 
left. The same opposite. 

27 The same as Exercise 26, but 

swing to a handstand (Fig. 120), 
squat forward. JO. 




29 



release the hold left a half turn 
left, taking OH left and raising 
feet to the bar with the turn and 
a longswing jerkup forward into 
the FR ; freehipwheel backward 
with JO. 

24 The same opposite. 

25 Shortswing jerkup forward ; drop 

Remarks. —A great variety of exercises can be done on the 
horizontal bar combined Avith buck, parallel bars, or vaulting 
board. 



Fig. 120. 

28 HH ; OH ; front pullup forward 
into the FR ; lower forward into 
a frontlever ; squat backward to 
a rearlever ; rise to a reardrop- 
hang and rearpullup forward 
into the RR ; change to UH and 
lower forward to a rearlever JO. 
The same as Exercise 27, with UH 
and giant swing forward. 

30 The same as Exercise 27, and giant 
swing backward. 



1G(3 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



PARALLEL BARS 



Bv A. E. KINDER VATER 



Three sets of graded exercises for parallel bars, each set 
containing six lessons, three of which begin from the cross- 
stand, or crossrest, i.e., the bars rnnning at right angles to 
the width of the body; and three from the sidestand or siderest, 
i.e., the length of the bars running parallel with the width 
of the body. 

ELEMENTARY GRADE. 

LESSON 1. 
Crossstand facing the bar, the hands grasping the ends. 





Fig. 121. 

1 Hop up into the rest ; the head 
erect, the back hollow, the legs 
pressed together and straight, the 



Fig. 122. 

toes down. Resume the first posi- 
tion (or stand). Repeat this 
several times (Fig. 121). 



PARALLEL BARS 



167 



2 Rest as in Exercise 1, and raise tlie 

legs forward or baclcvvard, riglit 
and left alternately, or both 
(straight or bent legs). 

3 Rest as in Exercise 1, turn the body 

to the right and left alternately 
(around the longitudinal axis), 

4 Rest as in Exercise 1, raise the 

straight legs forward and back- 
ward right and left alternately 
and both ; also left forward, and 
right backward, or vice versa. 

5 Rest as in Exercise 1, lift the hands 

(for a moment) right and left al- 
ternately or both (hop in place). 



G Rest as in Exercise 1, travel, lifting 
the hand and grasping forward 
with the right hand, and return ; 
also left, and return. 

7 Rest as in Exercise 1, travel for- 

ward, grasping three times with 
the right and three times with the 
left hand. 

8 Rest as in Exercise 1, travel for- 

ward, grasping right and left 
alternately. 

9 Rest as in Exercise 1, hop forward 

to the other end (short hops, 
both hands grasping forward si- 
multaneously). 





Fig. 123. Fig. 124. 

LESSON 2. 
Mounts and Dismounts. 

Crossstand facing the 6«r.s, iJie liands on the ends. 



Mount to inner crossseat on the 
right thigh, in front of the right 
hand (Fig. 122). Dismount into 
the first position ; repeat several 
times. The same exercise left. 

Mount into the ridingseat, in front 



of the right hand (Fig. 123). 
Dismount into the first position. 
The same exercise left. 
3 Mount into the straddleseat in front 
of the hands on both bars (Fig. 
124). Dismount into first position. 



168 



GERM A N- AM ERIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



Mount into the outer crossseat left 
in front of the right hand (Fig. 




Fig. 125. 

125). Dismount into tlie first 

position. The same exercise left. 

5 Turn and jump into the rest, back 



to the bars ; swing the body back- 
ward and place one foot on each 
bar — front cross-leaningrest (fa- 
cing the bars, the arms, legs, and 
body straight). Swing through 
forward, jump off and alight on 
both feet, the back to the bar 
(Fig. 126). 

Rest facing the bars ; swing the 
body forward and place one foot 
on each bar, the outer edge of the 
feet resting on the bars (extend 
the legs and arch the back), rear 
cross-leaningrest, back to the 
bars (Fig. 127), swing through 
backward, jump off and alight 
on both feet facing the bars. 

Cross-leaningrest facing the bars 
as in Exercise 5, draw the feet 
toward the hands into the squat- 
ting position (knees outside of 
the arms, the head erect). Re- 
sume the first position and alight 
as in Exercise 5. 




Fig. 126. 



Fig. 127. 



8 Rest in the centre of the bars; 
swing the body backward into 
the squatting position right 
(place the right foot on the right 
bar behind the hand, the knee 



bent, the left leg extended 
downward between the bars, 
the head erect). Alight and 
stand in the centre of the 
bars. 



PARALLEL BARS 



1G9 



Rest in the centre of the bars ; 
squatting position, riglit foot on 
the left bar (behind tlie hand, 
the left leg extended downward, 
on the outside of the left bar). 
Jump off sideways left. 



10 As Exercise 8, with the left leg 
extended downward, on the out- 
side of the right bar; also chan- 
ging from the squatting position 
on one bar over into the other. 
Jump off sideways. 



LESSON 3. 
Upperarmhang and Kindred Exercises. 



Upperarmhang in the centre of the 
bars (Fig. 128). Resume stand 
in the centre of the bars. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, raise 
the knees ; the heels ; swing the 
straight leg forward, backward, 
and sideways right and left alter- 
nately, or both. Resume stand 
in the centre. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, and 
swing the body forward and back- 
ward. Resume stand in the cen- 
tre. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing 
as in Exercise 3, and in the fore- 
swing straddle the legs, hollow 
the back, the arms and the thighs 
resting on the bars (lying on the 
bars the body horizontal, the face 
upward). Resume the hang and 
stand in the centre. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing 
the body as in Exercise 3, and in 
the backswing straddle the legs 
sideways over the bar (remain 
lying on the bars on arms and 
thighs, face dowuAvard). Resume 
the hang and stand in the centre. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing 
forward and lie on the bar as in 
Exercise 4, raise the body into the 
straddleseat in front of the hands. 
Dismount sideways right or left. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing 
backward and lie on the bar as in 
Exercise 5, raise the body into 



the straddleseat behind the 
hands. Dismount sideways right 
or left. 




Fig. 128. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing 
as in Exercise 3, and in the fore- 
swing raise the body into the 
straddleseat in front of the hands, 
swing the body backward through 
the bars into the cross-leaning 
rest facing the bars (as in Exer- 
cise 5, Lesson 2). . Alight side- 
ways right or left. 

Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing 
the body as in Exercise 3, and in 
the backswing raise the body 
into the straddleseat behind the 
hands, sw^ng forward through the 
bars into the cross-leaningrest 
back to the bars (as in Exercise 
6 of Lesson 2). Alight sideways 
rifirht or left. 



170 



GERM A y-A MERICAy G YM^A S TICS 



LESSON 4. 
Hangstand and Exercises in the same. 

Outer sidestand facbuj tJte bars^ ordinary grasp on the nearer bar. 



Front hangstand; place the feet 
forward below the bars (Fig. 129). 
Position. 




As Exercise 1, raise the legs for- 
ward or sideways right or left 
alternately (straight or bent); 
change the hands to the reversed, 
combined, or twisted grasp; bend 
and straighten the arms. 

As Exercise 1, placing one or both 
feet against the second bar, bend 
and straighten the legs (the arms 
remain straight). 

As Exercise 1, placing one or both 
legs over the second bar into a 
kneehang on one or both legs; 
the hands remain on the first 
bar (Fig. 130). 

As Exercise 1, placing the heels 
against the second bar (the arms 
and legs straight); while in this 
position, raise one or the other 
leg towards the first bar, or move 



sideways right and left: also bend 
and straighten the arms; change 
grasp, .etc. 

6 As in Exercise 1, raising the body 

upward between both bars into 
the reversedliang (the feet up- 
ward, the head downward); while 
in this position, lower the body 
onto the second bar by bending 
the arms and pushing the body 
over. Jump off forward. 

7 As Exercise 1 ; raise the knees, be- 

tween the hands ; toes against the 
inside of the first bar; bend the 
body through into the nest, and 
retiu-n, 

8 As Exercise 1, raising the knees 

and squat through between the 
hands; turn the body over back- 
ward, the feet on the floor (ex- 
tending the arms, legs, and back), 
into the rearhangstand (Fig. 131). 




Fig. 130. 

As Exercise 8, bend the knees,, 
squat through and straighten the 
body over into the reversedliang 
(feet upward, the head down- 
ward \ on the outside of the first 
bar, and return. 



PARALLEL BARS 



171 




Fig. 131. 



Fig. 132. 



LESSON 5. 
Rests and Mounts. 

Sidestaud, facing the bars. 



1 Sidestand in front of the bar, the 
hands on the first bar, ordinary 
grasp ; hop into the siderest, on 
the first bar (Fig. 132) ; repeat 
several times ; the same adding 
exercises of the legs, as swing- 
ing the straight leg sideways 
right and left alternately or both 
(straddle), or placing the feet 
onto the nearer bar, the legs ex- 
tended, sideways right and left. 
2 Siderest on the first bar; swing the 
right or left leg over the first bar 
and retnrn (half circle right for- 
ward). 

5 Rest as in Exercise 2 ; grasp over 
onto the second bar, moving the 
body forward into the side-lean- 
ingrest, facing the bars (Fig. 
I'^^S). Jump backward into the 
sidestand, the hands on the first 
bar. 



As in Exercise 3 ; in the leaning- 
rest exercise the legs and arms ; 
as kneeling, right knee on the 
first bar and extending the left 
leg backward, horizontally ; vice 
verm, or kneeling on both knees ; 
bend the arms, etc. 




Fig. 133. 



5 As Exercise 3, raise the right knee, 
and place the right foot on the 



172 



G Eli MA N-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



first bar, the other leg extended 
aslant downward (the arms 
straight) ; also with both feet on 
the first bar in tlie squatting po- 
sition. 

6 As Exercise 3, swing the right leg 

over the first and between both 
bars, execute a quarter turn left 
(three quarter leg circle). Re- 
sume the first position ; the same 
left, and then alternately. 

7 As Exercise 3, circle with the right 

leg, inward over the first bar; 



the same left, and also alter- 
nately. 

8 As Exercise 3 ; swing the right 

and the left leg over and sit on 
the first bar, the hands on the 
second (inner seat). 

9 As Exercise 8, hook the toes under 

the second bar and bend the 
body backward until the hands 
touch the floor ; or lower the 
body out horizontally, with the 
arms crossed on the chest (Fig. 
134). 




Fig. 134. 



LESSON 6. 
Mounts and Changes from the Cross and Siderest. 



Crossstand facing the bars ; mount 
into the inner sideseat, the right 
leg on the left bar at the side of 
the left hand (Fig. 135). Re- 
sume the stand, the same left, 
and alternately. 

As Exercise 1, then swing the left 
leg in a circle over the left bar, 
at the same time turning the 
body one half turn to the right 
(and grasping forward with the 
left hand over onto the right bar) 
into the side-leaningrest facing 
the bars. Jump backward into 
the sidestand, the hands on the 
first bar. 

Stand as in Exercise 1, mounting 
into the outer crossseat onto the 



right bar (see Lesson 2, Exercise 
4). One quarter turn left, the 
right hand grasping over onto 
the left bar, into the side-lean- 
ingrest, facing the bars. Half a 
turn left into the outer sideseat 
on the right bar, both hands 
on the right bar ; push off for- 
ward. 
Stand as in Exercise 1, mounting 
into the side straddleseat on both 
bars in front of the hands ; one 
quarter turn to the left raising 
the body into the cross straddle- 
seat, left hand grasping reverse 
on the left bar (Fig. 136); alight 
by swinging the right leg forward 
over both bars, at the same time 



PARALLEL BARS 



173 



turning tlie body one quarter 
turn to the left, the left hand 
keeps its hold. Turn dismount 
forward right. 
Stand as in Exercise 1, mounting 
into the innerseat right on the 
left bar (as in Exercise 1), turn 
right about into the side-leaning- 
rest (as in Exercise 3) ; swing 
the left leg forward over both 
bars, the right hand grasping 
over onto the left bar, into the 
straddleseat behind the hands ; 



alight by swinging the right leg 
backward over both bars, and 
turning right into the sidestand, 
both hands on the first bar. 
6 Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as 
in Exercise 3, half a turn left cir- 
cling with the right leg through 
the centre again into the outer 
crossseat on the right bar (now 
in front of the left hand), facing 
the starting-point. Kearvault 
sideways right (over the other 
bar). 





Fig. 135. 



Fig. 136. 



Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as 
in Exercise 1, turn right and cir- 
cle the left leg forward over the 
left bar, through the centre and 
then onto the former right bar, 
into a side straddleseat in front 
of the hands : swing backwards 
through the bars into a cross- 
leaningrest, facing the bars ; 
jump down sideways right or left. 

Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as 
in Exercise 4, grasp forward with 



the hands, swing through for- 
ward into the cross-leaningrest 
back to the bars, jump down side- 
ways right or left. 
Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as 
in Exercise 4, grasp forward- 
swing through forward, into the 
outer crossseat on the right bar, 
in front of the hand ; swing 
through backward and vault over 
the left bar behind the hand. 
Frontvault left. 



174 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



INTERMEDIATE GEADE. 

LESSON 1. 
Swinging in the Rest, •with Exercises of the Arms and the Legs. 

Crossrest in the centre of the bars. 



Swing forward and backward sev- 
eral times, the feet at least as 
high as the head, the arms 
straight (Fig. 137) ; vault over 
the right bar behind the hand. 
Frontvault right 




Fig. 137 a. 

2 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the 

backswing open and close the 
legs above the bars (sidestraddle). 
Vault over the left bar in front of 
the hand. Eearvault left. 

3 Swing as in Exercise 1, and strad- 

dle the legs sideways in the fore- 
swing (above the bars). Front- 
vault left. 

4 Swing as in Exercise 1, and strad- 

dle the legs sideways in both back 
and foreswing. Eearvault right. 

5 Swing as in Exercise 1, and cross- 

straddle the legs (right forward, 
left backward, or vice versa). 
Frontvault with one quarter turn 
left, facing the bars. 

6 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the 

backswing bend and straighten 
the legs (heels touching the 
seat). Eearvault left with one 
quarter turn right,facing the bars. 



7 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in 

the foreswing bend and straight- 
en the legs (the knees touching 
the chest). Frontvault left with 
one quarter turn right, facing 
the bars. 

8 Swing as in Exercise 1, bend and 

straighten the legs, as in the Ex- 
ercises 6 and 7 in the back and 
foreswing. Eearvault right with 
one quarter turn left, facing bars. 

9 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the 

backswing bend and straighten 
the arms. Eearvault left with 
one quarter turn left. 
10 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the 
foreswing bend and straighten 
the arms. Frontvault left with 
one half turn right. 




f37 b. 



11 Swing as in Exercise 1, bend and 
straighten the arms as in Exer- 
cises and 10 in both back and 
foreswlngs. Frontvault right 
with one half turn left. 



PARALLEL BAUS 



175 



LESSON 2. 

Sw^inging in the rest with lifting the hands alternately or simultane- 
ously (walking or hopping) on and from place. Shearsmount, 
circling and straddling off at the end. 



1 Crossrest at the end, facing the bars ; 

swing and lift one liand moment- 
arily from tlie bars in either back 
or foreswing, or the right hand in 
the fore, the left hand in the 
backswing, also lifting both hands 
simultaneously in either fore, 
back, or in both swings. 

2 Swing as in Exercise 1, lift the 

hand and grasp forward (small 
steps), right and left alternately. 

a. Only in backswing ; 

b. Only in foreswing ; 

c. In both back and foreswing, to 

the end of the bars (travelling 
forward). 

3 Swing as in Exercise 1, and lift 

both hands simultaneously (hop- 
ping). 

a. Only in the backswing ; 

6. Only in the foreswing ; 

c. In both back and foreswing, to 
the end of the bars. 

4 The same as in Exercises 2 and 3, 

but travelling or hopping back- 
ward. Begin the exercise with 
back to the bars. 

5 Swing as in Exercise 1, travel for- 

w'ard, the hands grasping forward 
alternately in each backswing 
to the end of the bars, swing 
backward to the front-leaning- 
rest (facing the bars). Straddle- 
off forward over the right bar 
with one quarter turn to the left 
(the left hand remains on the 
left bar). 

6 Swing as in Exercise 1, travel for- 

ward to the end of the bar, grasp- 



ing forward on the foreswing ; in 
the last backswing cross the legs 
and turn about into the straddle- 
seat in front of the hands (shears- 
mount backward). Place the 
outer edge of the feet on the 
bars, raise the body with arched 
back into the back-leaningrest 
(back to the bars). Straddleoff 
backward over the left bar, alight 
facing the bars. 

7 Swing as in Exercise 1, travel, 

grasping forward right and left 
with each swing to the end of 
the bars ; swing back into the 
front-leaningrest (as in Exercise 
5); bend and straighten the arms 
several times ; straddleoff for- 
ward over both bars, alight back 
to the bars. 

8 Swing as in Exercise 1 ; hop for- 

ward with both hands in the 
backswing to the middle of the 
bars ; in the last foreswing cross 
the legs and turn about into the 
straddleseat behind the hands 
(shearsmount forward); grasp 
back to the ends of the bars 
and raise the body into the rear- 
leaningrest. Straddleoff back- 
ward over both bars, alight facing 
the bars, 

9 Swing as in Exercise 1, and hop 

forward on both hands in each 
foreswing to the centre of the 
bars ; shearsmount backward into 
the straddleseat (twice) ; grasp 
forward to the ends of the bars, 
swing through forward, back- 



176 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



ward and straddleoff forward 
over both bars. Alight back 
to the bars. 
10 Swmg as in Exercise 1, and hop 
forward on both hands in the 
fore and backswing to the centre 
of the bars ; shearsmoimt for- 



ward into the straddleseat ; grasp 
backward and sliearsmount back- 
ward into the same seat ; grasp 
forward to the ends of the bars, 
and turn ove forward with 
bent arms, alight back to the 
bars (handspring). 



LESSON 3. 



Armhang, half turnover, uprise, upstart, and vaults. 



1 Cross upperarmhang in the centre 
of the bars (Fig. 128; swing fore 
and backward several times ; in 
the foreswing straddle the legs 
sideways above the bars, arch the 
back and lie on the bars (face up- 




' . ^v !a^~ 



Fig. 138. 



ward and body horizontal), rest- 
ing on the upper arms and thighs 
(see Exercise 4 of Lesson 3, First 
Grade); rise into the straddleseat 
in front of the hands ; swing 
through backward and frontvault 
right. 
Swing as in Exercise 1, in the back- 
swing, straddle the legs sideways 
above the bars and lie on the bars 
as in Exercise 1, with face down- 
ward (see Exercise 5 of Lesson 
3, First Grade) ; rise into the 
straddleseat behind the hands ; 
swing through forward and rear- 
vault left. 



G 



Swing as in Exercise 1, in the fore- 
swing raise the legs well over the 
body (the feet above the head 
half-turnover) (Fig. 138); from 
here drop quickly into the strad- 
dleseat in front of the hands. 
Upstart. Swing through back- 
ward and frontvault left. 
Swing as in Exercise 1, half turn- 
over as in Exercise 3 ; swing 
down, then backward and uprise 
from the backswing into the 
front-leaningrest; swing through 
forward and rearvault right. 
Swing as in Exercise 1, half turn- 
over as in Exercise 3 ; swing 
through backward and uprise 
in the next foreswing into the 
straddleseat in front of the 
hands, raise the feet and body 
into the rear-leaningrest ; swing 
through backward and front- 
vault right. 
Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in 
the backswing into the rest ; 
swing forward into the rear-lean- 
ingrest ; swing backward and 
frontvault left. 
Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in 
the foreswing into the rest ; swing 
backward into the frontleaning- 
rest ; swing forward and rear- 
vault right. 



PARALLEL BARS 



177 



Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise 
in the backswing into the rest ; 
swing forward and rearvault left 
with one quarter turn right, fa- 
cing the bars (the whole exer- 
cise without interruption \ 

Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in 
the foreswing into the rest ; 



swing backward and frontvault 
right with one quarter turn left, 
facing the bars. 
10 Swing as in Exercise 3 ; half turn- 
over and upstart into the rest 
with straight arms ; swing back- 
ward and forward and rearvault 
right, with one half turn left. 



LESSON 4. 

Sidestand facing the bars, mounts, leaningrest, dismounts, 
combinations, and vaults. 



Sidestand facing the bars ; take 
a short run and mount from the 
left into the ridingseat behind 
the right hand on the first bar, 
the left hand grasping the second 
bar ; raise and swing both legs 
through forward into the side- 
seat right in front of the left 
hand on the second bar (the left 
leg between the bars); circle the 
left leg forward over the second 
bar and dismount with a quarter 
turn right — turn dismount for- 
ward left. 

Mount into the ridingseat in front 
of the right hand on the first 
bar ; raise and SAving the legs 
through backward into the side- 
seat left behind the left hand on 
the second bar (the right leg 
outside of the second bar) (Fig. 
139) ; raise the legs, swing through 
forward and rearvault left. 

Mount right into the straddleseat 
on both bars behind the hands ; 
swing through forward into the 
outer crossseat in front of the 
right hand ; one quarter turn left 
into the side-leaningrest facing 
the bars (or forward). The 
hands grasping the second bar ; 
push off backward. 



Moinit right into the cross-leaning- 
rest facing the bars ; swing 
through forward and backward 
and shears backw^ard into the rid- 
ingseat on the first bar (in front 
of the right hand); dismount to 
the left, rearvault over the sec- 
ond bar. 




Fig. 139. 

Mount right into the cross-leaning- 
rest facing the bars ; swing 
through forward then over the 
first bar and with a quarter turn 
right come into the front side- 
leaningrest ; reverse the grasp of 



178 



GERM A N-A MEBICAN G YMXA S TICS 



the left hand and frontvault 
riglit over both bars. 
Mount right into the straddleseat 
in front of the hands on both 
bars ; raise the body into the rear 
cross-leaningrest ; swing through 
backward with shears backward 



into the straddleseat in front of 
the hands ; change the left hand 
to the reversed grasp. Turn dis- 
mount forward with three quar- 
ter turns left, the right leg cir- 
cling forward over both bars. 



LESSON 5. 
Side leaningrest and combinations. Sidestand facing the bars. 

All exercises begin with a short run. 



Jump into the front-leaningrest, 
the right hand on the first, the 
left on the second bar ; swing 
through and over the second bar 
into the outer sideseat on the 
second bar, both hands grasping 
the same bar; pushoff forward. 




Fig. 140. 

As in Exercise 1, but froin the 
outer sideseat, change to the 
rear side-leaningrest, both hands 
grasping the first bar. Reverse 
the grasp and change to the front- 
leaningrest by turning right or 
left about ; pushoff backward. 



3 Jump into the side-leaningrest as 

in Exercise 1 ; lower the body for- 
ward; the chest on the second bar, 
the hands grasping the first bar 
reversed (the body lies horizon- 
tally on both bars); raise the legs 
and the body upward, upper- 
armstand (Fig. 140), return and 
jump off backward facing the 
bars. 

4 As Exercise 3 ; from the upperarm- 

stand turn over forward onto the 
feet; while ttirning, change the 
hands over to the second bar. 

5 Jump into the side-leaningrest as 

in Exercise 1, both hands grasp- 
ing the second bar; half tttrn 
right or left into the rear side- 
leaningrest; the hands reversed; 
bend the hips and lower the 
body, throitgh between the bars, 
into the hammockhang on the 
heels and the hands, by drop- 
ping the feet, come to a stand. 

6 As in Exercise 5; out of the rear- 

leaningrest, lower the body 
backward and lie on the bars, 
the body horizontal, the hands 
grasping the first bar; raise the 
body backward, the feet up- 
ward, and roll off backward, 



PARALLEL BABS 



179 



alight facing the bars. The hands 
give up their hold as soon as 
the feet are turned towards the 
floor. 

7 Jump into the front-leaningrest, 

the hands grasping the second 
bar; the flankvault right or left 
over both bars. 

8 Jump into the front leaningi'est, 

the hands on the second bar ; 
frontvault right or left over both 
bars. The off hand changes to 



the reversed grasp before vault- 
ing. 
9 Jump into the front-leaningrest; 
the hands on the second bar, 
rearvault over both bars. 
10 Jump into the front-leaningrest; 
the hands on the second bar; 
step with the right foot on the 
first bar, turn over forward, 
(pushoff with the foot and the 
hands). Alight back to the 
bars. (Handspring.) 



LESSON 6. 

Vault over the first bar into a seat or leaningrest and vault over 

the second bar. 



1 Sidestand facing the bars, take a 

short run and frontvault right 
over the first bar, the right hand 
grasping the second bar; swing 
through forward in^o the strad- 
dleseat in front of the hands; 
swing through backward and 
frontvault right. 

2 Stand as in Exercise 1, rearvault 

right over the first bar, the right 
hand grasping the second bar; 
swing through backward into the 
straddleseat behind the hands; 
swing through forward and rear- 
vault right. 

3 Frontvault right, over the first bar, 

as in Exercise 1 ; swing through 
forward into the rear cross-lean- 
ingrest; swing through backward 
and frontvault right, with a quar- 
ter turn right or left. 

4 Rearvault right over the first bar, 

as in Exercise 2; swing backward 
into the front cross-Ieaningrest: 
swing through forward and rear- 
vault right with a quarter turn 
left. 



5 Frontvault right over the first bar, 

swing through forward to side- 
seat right on the left bar, see 
Exercise 1, Lesson G, of the First 
Grade ( the right thigh in front 
of the left hand, the left leg be- 
tween the bars). Turnmount 
left forward into the straddleseat 
on both bars behind the hands; 
swing through forward and lear- 
vault left with a quarter turn 
left. 

6 Rearvault right over the first bar; 

swing through backward and 
shears backward into the strad- 
dleseat on both bars in front of 
the hands; swing through back- 
ward and frontvault left, with 
one half turn right. 

7 Frontvault right over the first bar, 

swing through forward and shears 
forward into the straddleseat on 
both bars behind the hands; 
swing through forward, and rear- 
vault left with one half turn 
right. 



180 



GEEMAN-AMEHICAN G YMNASTICS 





Fig. 141 a. 



Fig. 141 b. 



ADVANCED GRADE. 



LESSON 1. 



Swing in the centre of the bars, -with bending and straightening the 
arms (^dipj. Mounts and vaults. 



1 Crossstand, take a short run and 

jump into the crossrest in the 
centre of the bars; Swing, bend 
and straighten the arms during 
the fores wing (foredip) several 
times (Fig. 141). Frontvauh 
right. 

2 As Exercise 1, but bend and 

straighten the arms during tlie 
backswing (baclalip) several 
times. Rearvault right. 

3 As Exercise 1, one foredip, two 

intermediate swings with straight 
arms, and one backdip. Rear- 
vault left. 

4 As Exercise 1, fore and backdip 

without intermediate swings (the 
arms straight at the end of each 
swing). In the backswing front- 
vault left. 

5 xVs Exercise 1, one foredip and 

mount into the sideseat left on 
the right bar in front of the 
hand; circle forward with the 
right leg over the right bar, at 
the same time turning the body 
left about, into the straddleseat 
on both bars behind the hands. 



Turnmount forward right, fore- 
dip and rearvault right. 
() As Exercise 1, backdip and shears- 
mount backward into the strad- 
dleseat in front of the hands; 
backdip with frontvault right. 

7 As Exercise 1, one or more fore- 

dips; after the last swing shears 
forward into the straddleseat be- 
hind tbe hands; swing through 
forward and rearvault left with 
half a turn left. 

8 As Exercise 1, backdip and shears 

backward into the straddleseat 
in front of the hands; from 
here repeat the dip and shears 
backward into the straddleseat; 
swing through backward and 
frontvault left with one half 
turn right. 
As Exercise 1, foredip with one 
half turn right or left into the 
upperarmhang; uprise in the 
foreswing to the rest and then 
appropriate vaults. 
10 As Exercise 9; with backdip and 
uprise in backswing and appro- 
l^i-iate vaults. 



PARALLEL BAliS 



181 



LESSON 2. 
Dip vrith hopping, shoulderstand, upstart, and vaults. 

^4// exercises on this lesson begin from the crossrest. 



Foredip with hopping forward 
(both hands grasping forward 
siniuUaneousJy) to the other end 
of the bar ; in tlie last swing 
straddleoff forward over both 
bars (push off strongly with the 
hands). 




Fig. 142. 

Backdip, with hopping backward 
to the end of the bars ; in the 
last swing straddleoff backward 
over one or both bars (assistance 
needed). 

In the centre of the bars; alternate 
the foredip and hopping forward 
with the backdip and hopping 
backward ; in the last swing 
front or rearvault over the right 
bar. 

Foredip with hopping forward to 
the centre of the bars ; in the 
last backswing lower the right 
shoulder onto the right bar and 
raise the body into a vertical po- 



sition — shoulder standright (Fig. 
142); turn over sideways and 
alight at the right side of the 
bars. 

5 Backdip with hopping backward to 

the centre of the bars; in the last 
swing raise the body into the 
shoulderstand left; straighten the 
arms partly and frontvault right. 

6 Foredip with hopping forward to 

the centre of the bars; in the 
last backswing raise the body 
vertically into the upperarni- 
stand (Fig. 443); lower the legs, 
straighten the arms partly and 
swing forward with rearvault 
risrlit. 




Backdip with hopping backward to 
the centre of the bars ; in the 
last backswing raise the body into 
the upperarmstand ; bend the 



182 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



hips and roll forward with strad- 
dling the legs sideways into the 
straddleseat on both bars in front 
of the hands; swing backward 
and execute a high frontvault 
over the right bar. 

Foredip with hopping forward to 
the centre of the bars ; in the last 
swing rise into a shoulderstand 
right; change to the upperarm- 
stand ; bend the hips and upstart 
into the rest ; swing through for- 
ward ; pushoff and alight at the 
end of the bars with a quarter 
turn right or left. 

Backdip with hopping backward 
to the centre of the bars ; in the 
last backswing rise to the upper- 
armstand ; bend the hips, roll 
forward slowly, and uprise into 
the rest with straight arms ; raise 
the legs forward ; leglever ; swing 



backward into the handstand 
(Fig. 144); swing through for- 
ward with rearvault right and 
half turn left. 




Fig. 144. 



LESSON 3. 

Roll with bent and straight hips. Uprise, upstart, and vaults. 

All the exercises of this lesson begin from the upperarmhang in the centre 

of the hars. 



1 Swing forward and backward; in 

the last foreswing roll over back- 
Avard, straddling the legs into the 
straddleseat behind the hands; 
roll over forward Ton the arms) 
through the bars (^closing the 
legs) and uprise in the back- 
swing into the rest; swing for- 
ward and rearvault right. 

2 Saving, and in the last backswing 

bend the hips, roll forward strad- 
dling the legs into the straddleseat 
in front of the hands; roll over 
backward into the armhang, clos- 
ing the leers and straicrhtenins: the 



hips ; uprise in the foreswing into 
the rest with straight arms; rear- 
vault right. 

3 Swing and roll over backward (a 

complete turn) with straight body; 
bend the hips to a half turn over 
and upstart into the rest; swing 
forward and rearvault left. 

4 Swing and roll over forward (a 

complete turn) with straight 
body ; uprise in the backswing, 
into the rest drop back onto the 
arms with the hips bent to the 
half turn over and upstart ; swing 
back and frontvault right. 



PARALLJEL BARS 



183 



Swing and roll baekM'anl as in Ex- 
ercise 3, and nprise in the fore- 
swing into the rest; swing back 
into tlie handstand; swing for- 
ward and rearvaiilt right with a 
half turn riglit. 

Swing and roll over forward as in 
Exercise 4; with tlie retnrnswing 
roll over backward as in Exercise 
5 to a half turn over ; upstart into 
a handstand ; frontvault right 
with a half turn left. 

Swing, and in the foreswing roll 
over backward (with straighten- 
ing the hips quickly) into the 
upperarmstand ; lower the legs 
slowly into the lever on the right 
elbow (Fig. 145); change to the 
left elbow lever and frontvault 
left with half a turn right. 

Swing and roll over backward as 
in Exercise 7 into a handstand 



with bent anus ; straightening 
the arms and walk forward on 
the hands to the end of the bar; 
straddleoff forward. 




Fig. 145. 

Swing and roll over backward as 
in Exercise o; in the next back- 
swing uprise to a handstand; 
walk forward on the hands to the 
end of the bars and turn over 
(handspring) forward with 
straiijht arms. 



LESSON 4. 

Vaults over the first bar into the rest; intermediate exercises and 
vaults over the second bar. 

All exerciser in this lesson J>e;jinfrom a side.stand, in front of the bars. Take 
a sJiort run, vault over tlte JirH bar, each hand (jraspiyKj one bar. {These 
exercises sJiould be practised on the low bar first.) 



1 Frontvault right over the first bar; 

swing forward; backward and 
frontvault right. 

2 Rearvault right over the first bar; 

swing backward; forward and 
rearvault right. 

3 Frontvault right over the first bar; 

swing forward and rearvault right. 

4 Rearvault right over the first bar; 

swing backward and frontvault 
right. 

5 Frontvault right over the first bar; 

swing forward; backward, and 



during the backswing circle the 
left leg backward over the first 
bar (lift the left hand momenta- 
rily, the riglit leg in the mean- 
time swings backward betw^een 
the bars); swing forward and 
rearvault right. 
6 Rearvault right over the first bar; 
swing backward; forward, and in 
the foreswing circle the left leg^ 
forward over the first bar (the 
right leg meanwhile swinging 
between the bars); swing back- 



184 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNAS TICS 



ward and frontvault right over 
the second bar. 

7 Frontvault right over the first bar; 

swing forward and backward, 
and in the backswing straddle 
the legs over both bars ; swing 
forward and rearvault right. 

8 Eearvault right over the first bar; 

swing backward and forward, 
and in the foreswing straddle 
the legs over both bars ; swing 
backward and frontvault right. 

9 Frontvault right over the first bar; 

swing forward; backward and in 
the backswing circle backward 
with both legs over the first bar; 
swing forward and rearvault right. 



10 Rearvault right over the first bar; 

swing backward and circle for- 
ward with both legs over the first 
bar; swing backward and front- 
vault right. 

11 Frontvault right over the first bar; 

swing forw^ard and circle back- 
ward with both legs over the 
first bar, and frontvault right. 

12 Rearvault riglit over the first bar; 

swing backward; circle forward 
with both legs over the first and 
rearvault right. (Rearvault 
over both bars to be executed 
without intermission) — double 
rearvault rioht. 



LESSON 5. 

Vaults over the first bar into the armhang, roll, uprise, 
upstart, and vaults over the second bar. 

All exercif>es begin as i)i Lesson 4. 



1 Frontvault right over the first bar 

into the armhang in the centre 
of the bars; swing forward, back- 
ward and uprise in the backswing 
into the rest. Swing forward 
and rearvault right. 

2 Rearvault right over the first bar 

into the armhang in the centre; 
swing backward, forward and 
uprise in the foreswing into the 
rest ; swing backward into a 
handstand and frontvault right. 

3 Frontvault right over the first bar 

into the armhang in the centre; 
swing forward to a half turn over; 
upstart into the rest ; swing back 
to a handstand; swing forward 
and rearvault right with half a 
turn left. 

4 Rearvault right over the first bar 

into the armhang in the centre; 



swing backward, forward, and 
roll backward with straight body ; 
uprise in the foreswing into the 
rest; swing backward into a 
handstand; turn over sideways 
with straight body, alighting in 
the crossstand. 

5 Frontvault right over the first bar 

into the armhang in the centre; 
swing forward, backward and 
uprise in the backswing into the 
elbow lever right ; lower the 
legs, swinging through the bars 
(straightening the arms) and 
hold them in a balance over the 
bars; one quarter turn right (the 
left hand grasping over to the 
second bar), pushoff forward. 

6 Rearvault right over the first bar 

into the armhang in the centre; 
swing backward, forward and 



PARALLEL BARS 



185 



roll backward with straightening 
the body quickly into a shoulder- 
stand right ; push up to a hand- 
stand ; step over with the left 
hand onto the second bar with 
a quarter turn right and a high 
frontvault over the second bar. 
7 Frontvault right over the first bar 
into the armhang in the centre ; 
roll backward (straight hips) and 
uprise in the next backswing to 
a handstand ; step over into a 



handstand on the second bar and 
squatoff forward. 
Rearvault right over the first bar 
into the armhang in the centre; 
roll forward (straight hips) and 
in the returnswing quickly roll 
over backward with straight hips 
into a handstand with bent anus; 
straighten the arms, step over to 
a handstand on the second bar; 
turn over or straddleoff forward. 



LESSON 6. 

Vaults over both Bars. 

These should be practised on tJie low bars first. 

Lessons 4 and 5. 



T/ie exercises h('(jui as In 



1 Squat forward over the first bar 

into a stand in the centre; flank- 
vault right, the hands grasping 
the second bar. 

2 Straddle forward over the first bar 

into a stand in the centre ; squat 

forward, the hands grasping the 

second bar. 
8 Squat forward over both bars, the 

hands grasping the second bar; 

also w^ith the hands grasping the 

first bar. 
4 Straddle forward over both bars, 

the hands grasping the second 

bar. 



5 Flankvault right over both bars, 
the hands grasping both bars. 

Frontvault right over both bars, 
the hands grasping both bars. 

7 Rearvault left over both bars, the 

hands grasping both bars. 

8 Exercises 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 with a 

quarter or a half turn right or 
left. 

9 Turn over both bars (handspring), 

both hands grasping either the 
second or the first bar (assis- 
tance necessary). 



186 



GERM A N-AMElilCAN G YMNA !S TICS 



SIDE HORSE 

Bv WILLIA:\r A. STECHEK 

Every exercise begins with a run. 

I 6 Rearvaiilt left with a quarter turn 

1 Flankvault right (Fig. 14(3). riglit. 

2 Frontvault right (Fig. 147). 7 Eearvault left with a half turn 

3 Rearvault left (Fig. 148). right. 

4 Frontvault right with a quarter 8 Squatvault forward (Fig. 149); 

turn left. also with a quarter or half turn 

5 Frontvault right with a half turn left or right. 

left. 




Fig. 146. 

9 Straddlevault forward (Fig. 150); 3 Wolf s vault in form of a rearvault 
also with a quarter or half turn (Fig. 152). 



left or right (help), 



TI 



1 Wolfs vault left (Fig. 151). 

2 Wolfs vault in form of a frontvault. 



4 Thief s vault (Fig. 153). (Spring 
off with one foot, the board about 
three feet from the horse. ) Also 
with a quarter or half turn left 
or risfht. 



SIDE UORSE 



187 





Fig. 147. 



Fig. 148. 




Fig. 149. 



Fig. 150. 



188 



GERM A N-A MER ICA N G YMNA S TICS 




Fig. 151. 



Fig. 152. 





-> 



Fig. 153. 



SIDE HORSE 



189 




Fig. 154. 



5 Free jump forward (as Exercise 4, 

but without the help of the 
hands); also with a quarter or a 
half turn left or riglit. (When 
springing off left, turn left.) 

6 Pike's leap, resting the hands mo- 

mentarily on the pommels (Fig. 
154), and then on the shoulders 
of the leader. 

7 Pike's leap, resting the hands on 

the shoulders of the leader. 

Ill 

1 Jump into the freerest several 

times (land on the balls of the 
of the feet, bending the knees 
well) (Fig. 155). 

2 As Exercise 1, after landing on the 

board, mount right into the riding- 
seat on the croup (stridemount), 
(Fig. 156), dismount into the 
sidestand on the right side. 



For description of sidestand, etc., 
see explanations on page 20. 




Fig. 155. 

As Exercise 2, from the ridingseat 
swing the legs backward three 
times (the knees and heels locked, 



190 



GERMAN-AMER WAN G YMNA S TICS 



the legs straight), pushoff back- 
ward. 

As Exercise 2, from the riding- 
seat swing the legs backward and 
cross them (right under the left) 
with a turn left about (shears left 
backward); straddleoff forward. 

As Exercise 4, with two shears 
backward, but with a right about 
(left leg under); swing both legs 
backward and dismount to the 
right. 



IV 

Stridemount left into the ridingseat 
on the nec'k; dismount onto the 
board. 

As Exercise 1, then left shears 
backward; swing both legs for- 
ward three times and dismount 
to the right with a quarter turn 
left. 

As Exercise 2, after the shears, 
swing the legs forward and cross 
them (left under right) with a 




Fig 156. 



turn left about (shears left for- 
ward), (Fig. 157 shows the exer- 
cise in the saddle); push off 
backward. 

As Exercise 1, then shears left for- 
ward (the hands on the neck) 
and shears right forward, dis- 
mount left with a quarter turn 
right. 

As Exercise 1, then shears left for- 
ward and backward; dismount 
left by swinging both legs 
(closed) backward. 



Jump into the frontrest, then 

1 One half circle right inward and 

return (Fig. 158); several times. 

2 As Exercise 1, then complete the 

circle by passing the leg back- 
ward under the left hand (keep 
the body well over the horse). 

3 One half circle right outward (pass- 

ing under the left hand) and re- 
turn, several times. 

4 As Exercise 3, then complete the 



SIDE HOUSE 



191 




-> 



Fig. 157. 




Fig. 158. 



Fig. 159. 



192 



GEEMAN-AMEBICAN G YMNA S TICS 



circle by passing backward under 
the right hand. 

5 As Exercise 1, jump down back- 
ward and squatvault forward. 

^ As Exercise 2, jump down back- 
ward and squatvault forward 
with a quarter turn left or right. 

7 As Exercise 3, jump down back- 

ward and straddlevault forward. 

8 As Exercise 4, jump down back- 

ward and straddlevault forward 
with a quarter turn left or right. 



VI 

Mount left into the ridingseat on- 
to the croup (facing outward — 
stridemount left by the opposite 
side) (Fig. 159); straddleoff for- 
ward. 

As Exercise 1, then swing the legs 
backward into the front-leaning- 
rest (Fig. 160); straddleoff for- 
ward. 

As Exercise 2, from the leaning- 
rest, shears left backward into 




Fig. 160. 



the ridingseat on the croup ; push- 
off backward. 

4 Mount as in Exercise 1 into the 

saddle, then shears left and right 
backward; dismount left back- 
ward onto the board and front- 
vault right. 

5 As Exercise 4, with shears left and 

right forward; dismount back- 
ward onto the board and rear- 
vault left. 



YII 
Note. — A feint left is as follows : 
From the rest, the left leg is 
moved over the neck and around 
the left arm (the body in the 
meantime executing a quarter 
turn right), until the leg is in 
a horizontal position on the off 
side of the horse. The return 
movement takes place immedi- 
ately (Fig. 161). 



SIDE HORSE 



193 



1 Feint left; jump down upon the 

board and repeat riglit several 
times. 

2 Feint left and right as a continu- 

ous movement, without jumping 
down. 

3 Feint left and one half circle right 

inward and return. 

4 As Exercise 3, and a circle right 

inward. 

5 One half circle right forward with 



both legs (into the backrest) 
(Fig. 1G2). Pushoff forward 
(raising the legs well upwards). 

G As Exercise 5; from the backrest 
one half circle left backward with 
both legs. Pushoff backward 
(raising the legs backward). 

7 Feint left and one half circle right 
forward with l)Oth legs ; squat 
backward into the frontstand. 





Fig. 161. 



Fig. 162. 



8 As Exercise 7, but the squat back- 
ward into the frontrest, then 
squat forward with one quarter 
turn left. 

^ Y 1 1 1 

1 One half circle right forward under 
the left hand into the crossstrad- 
dle position on the saddle, then 
turndismount left forward. 

Note. — A turndismount is as fol- 
lows : — The right leg being in 
front, tlie weight of the body is 



thrown over onto the right hand. 
The left leg then describes a half 
circle forward, the body at the 
same time executing a quarter 
turn right and the scholar lands 
in the crossstand on the off side 
of the horse in line with the 
iwmmel (Fig. 163). 

As Exercise 1, then turnmount left 
forward into the ridingseat on 
the croup (facing the saddle); 
pushoff backward. 

As Exercise 2, from the seat dis- 



19-i 



GEBM AX-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



mount onto the board ; squat left 
forward (one leg) and turndis- 
mount right forward. 

Jump into the freerest, then squat 
right forward ; face left about ; 
turnmount right forw^ard onto 
the croup. Dismount right with 
a quarter turn left. 

One half circle left inward; turn- 
mount right forward; dismount 
onto the board and wolf's vault 
right forward. 




6 Jump into the freerest, squat for- 
ward into the backrest, one half 
circle left inward and immedi- 
ately turnmount left forward onto 
the croup. Stride dismount right 
backward onto the board and 
straddle vault forward. 



IX 

One half circle left forward with 
both legs (into the backrest), one 
half circle right inward and re- 



turn. (The right leg moves 
backward over the croup into the 
crossstraddle position in the sad- 
dle, and return.) Pushoff for- 
ward. 

As Exercise 1, one half circle right 
inward, then complete the circle 
by passing right forward under 
the left hand. Pushoff forward 
with one half turn left. 

Wolf's vault right forward into the 
backrest ; circle outward right 
(the right leg passing first under 
the left hand). Turnmount right 
forward onto the neck. Stride- 
mount right onto the croup (Fig. 
164), pushoff backward with 
one half turn left. 

Wolf's vault left forward into the 
backrest ; one half circle right 
inward ; one half turn right ; turn- 
mount left forward onto the neck; 
stridemount left by the opposite 
side into the ridingseat in the 
saddle (facing the croup, the 
hands grasping the pommels, 
right forward, the left leg swings 
around backward and passes 
under the right hand, landing the 
body in the saddle). (Similar to 
Fig. 177, Long Horse.) Kepeat 
this stridemount onto the croup; 
then dismount tothe left by swing- 
ing both legs forward and facing 
right about. 

Squat forward into the backrest, 
one half turn left (hopping) squat 
forward and one half circle left 
backward with both legs ; one 
half circle right forward with 
both legs ; turnmount right for- 
ward onto the croup. Swing 
both legs backward and dis- 
mount to the right with one half 
turn left. 



SlUiJ HOB Si] 



195 




Jump and swing tlie legs backward 
into the freerest; execute a quicl<: 
sidestraddle and sink into the 
frontrest. Tlien circle right in- 
ward and left inward ; rearvault 
left. 

As in Exercise 1, raising the heels 
backward (Fig. 165). From the 
frontrest one half circle right in- 
ward, swing the legs sideways left 
and right (keep the body well 
over the horse). Jump off for- 
Avard, when the legs again swing 
to the left. 

As in Exercise 1, raising the knees ; 
one half circle right inward ; then 
continue the circle with the right 
leg, at the same time executing 
a half circle left inward (the left 
leg crossing over the right); 
{shears left sideways); one half 
circle left outward and rearvault 
left. (^Yhen executing the shears, 
see that the legs are kept per- 
fectly straight, and that the 
weight of the body is momen- 
tarily carried over onto the hand 
keeping its hold.) 



As in Exercise 1, with crossstrad- 
dle; one half circle right inward; 
shears left and right sideways ; 
turnmount left forward onto the 




croup ; feint right and rearvault 
right. (From the ridingseat on 
the croup the left hand grasps 



196 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



the farthest pommel, the right the 
second ; the body being raised, 
the right leg executes the feint, 
which is immediately followed by 
the vault over the neck.) 




Fig. 166. 

As in Exercise 1, with crossing the 
legs ; one half circle right inward 
followed instantly by shears left 
and right sideways, squat right 
backward, feint right and rear- 
vault right with one half turn 

left. 

XI 

Feint right with both legs (Fig. 
160) ; then a circle right outward ; 
sidestraddle stand on the horse 
(croup and neck), high jump for- 
ward swinging the arms up. 

As in Exercise 1, after the circle 
right jump onto the board, follow- 
ing immediately with a turn- 
mount onto the neck (Fig. 167); 
swing back into the leaningrest 
and shears left backward (lean 
forward as far as possible). 



As in Exercise 2, but the turn- 
mount takes place from the rest; 
shearsdismount left backward. 
As in Exercise 3, but after the 
mount shears left forward ; then 
shearsdismount left forward ( Fig. 
168) (sit back as far as possi- 
ble, the hands behind, and push- 
off backward the moment the 
legs cross). 
Feint right with both legs ; one 
half circle left forward with both 
legs ; hop left about into the 
frontrest ; feint right and turn- 
mount right backward (onto the 
croup); shears left forward and 
rearvault right over the neck, 
both hands grasping the farthest 
pommel. 




Fig. 167. 

XII 
1 Rearvault left with one half turn 
left into the crossstand alongside 
of the neck (lean far over to the 

left side). 



SIBE HORSE 



197 




Fig. 168. 



Fig. 169. 



Rearvault left with rearmount left 
into the ridingseat on the neck 
(help at the left side). Swing 
both legs backward and squat off 
forward. 

Double rearvault left over the croup 
and neck (Fig. 169). (The body 
must be kept close to the left arm. 
After the body has passed over the 
neck, the right hand is placed on 
the neck, and the left dropped to 
the side. The body 
executes a quarter turn 
left.) (Help at the left 
side.) 

Triple rearvault left (Fig. 
170) (over the croup, 
the neck, and the sad- 
dle). The body exe- 
cutes a three quarter 
turn left and comes 
into a crossstand on the 
right side of the horse 
(help at the right side). 



As in Exercises 3 and 4, with a feint 

left. 
As in Exercises 3 and 4, with a 

feint left with both lees. 




Fig. 170. 



198 



GERMAN-AMERICA X G YMNASTICS 



LONG HORSE 



By WILLIAM A. STECHEK 



All exercises begin with ii run. 



II 



1 Flankvault right. 

2 Frontvault right, 
o Eearvault left. 

4 Stride vault right (Fig. 171). (The 
right leg swings in a circle inward 
over the horse, and the scholar 
comes into a crossstand at the 
left side of the horse. ) 




Fig. 171. 

5 Frontvault with one quarter or one 

half turn left or right. 

6 Rearvault with one quarter or one 

half turn left or right. 

7 Stride vault with one quarter or one 

half turn left or rijiht. 



1 Jump into the freerest, the hands 

on the croup (several times). 

2 As in Exercise 1, with the hands 

in the saddle ; sidestraddle and 
sink in the ridingseat on the 
croup ; dismount left sideways. 
8 Jump, the hands on the neck, into 
the ridingseat in the saddle (Fig. 
172); swing the legs backward 
into the leaningrest; jump off 
left sideways witli a quarter turn 
right. 

4 Jump as in Exercise 2, but directly 

into the leaningrest; jump off left 
sideways with a half turn right. 

5 As is Exercise 3, then straddleoff 

forward from the ridingseat. 

As in Exercise 4, then straddleoff 

from the leaningrest (lean for- 
ward as far as possible, the fin- 
gers over the end of the horse). 
7 As in Exercise 3, then swing 
the legs backward into the 
freerest and straddleoff for- 
ward. 

Ill 

1 Jump into the freerest, the hands 

in the saddle ; sink into the 
ridingseat in the saddle ; swing 
the legs backward into the free- 
rest several times, dismount left 



LONG HOUSE 



199 



sideways with a quarter turn 
left. 

2 As in Exercise 1, swing tlie legs 

backward; shears left backward 
several times; place the hands 
behind the body, and dismount 
left sideways with a quarter turn 
right. 

3 As in Exercise 1, place the hands 

behind the body, and swing the 
legs forward several times, closing 
them over the horse ; dis- 
mount left sideways with 
a half turn right. 

4 As in Exercise o, then 

shears right forward sev- 
eral times; the hands in 
front, swing the legs back- 
ward, and with a quarter 
turn left come into the 
leaningrest s i d e w a y s, 
junipoff forward. 

5 As in Exercise 3 ; then 

shears right forward and 
left backward; frontlean- 
ingrest, the hands on the 
neck, then shears left 
backward into the front 
stand. 

6 As in Exercise 5; after the shears 

forward and backward swing the 
legs backward into the freer- 
est, the hands over the end of 
the horse and shears backward 
(shearsdismount backward). 

1 Stridemount right forward into the 

ridingseat on the croup (facing 
the board); dismount left side- 
ways. 

2 Stridemount right forward by the 

opposite side (the right leg passes 
by the left side, the scholar faces 



the saddle); dismount left side- 
ways. 

As in Exercise 1, landing in the 
saddle ; stridemount right forward 
onto the croup (similar to Fig. 
164); pushoff backward. 

As in Exercise 2 ; repeat onto the 
neck ; straddleoff forward. 

As in Exercise 3 ; then flankvault 
right forward (from the riding- 
seat over the croup). 




Fig. 172. 

As in Exercise 2; then rearvault 

right forward (over the saddle). 
As in Exercise 2; then frontvault 

left forward (over the saddle). 
As in Exercises 6 and 7, with the 

vaults with one quarter or one 

half turn left or ri2:ht. 



V 

Jump into the frontrest in the sad- 
dle, on the left side of the horse 
(Fig. 173); pushoff backward. 

As in Exercise 1 ; circle with the 
right leg inward ; jump down and 



200 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 




Fig. 173. 



Fig. 174. 



directly up into the f reerest ; push 
off bacliward, 

3 As in Exercise 1; circle with the 

right leg outward, jump down 
and flankvault left forward. 

4 As in Exercise 2, after the circle 

jump down, and rearvault left. 

5 As in Exercise 3, after the circle 

jump down, and rearvault right. 
G As in Exercise 4, with the squat- 
vault forward (help). 

7 As in Exercise 4, with the wolfs 

vault left forward. 

8 As in Exercise 4, with the straddle- 

vault forward (help). 

As above, with the vaults with one 

quarter or one half turns left or 
right. 

yi 

1 Jump into the freerest with raising 

the trunk upwards (the trunk 
and legs at right angles). 

2 As in Exercise 1, the head touch- 

ing the horse, and roll over for- 



6 



ward into the ridingseat — roll 
forward (Fig. 174) (help at both 
sides); dismount left sideways. 

Roll forward lying flat on the horse 
(help); rise up, dropping the legs 
on the left side, into the crossseat 
left; the hands behind, pushoff 
forward. 

Roll forward left obliquely into the 
crossstand at the left side (help 
at the left side). 

Roll forward into the ridingseat; 
shears forward; roll backward in- 
to the frontstand (the body sinks 
backward rapidly, the hands 
catching hold of the horse over 
the head. The legs are then 
quickly raised upward and back- 
ward, the hands at the same 
time pressing the body from the 
horse) (help at both sides). 
Roll forward into the ridingseat 
and then immediately roll back- 
ward into the stand on the board 
(help). 



LONG HORSE 



yii 



Long leap into the freerest on the 
neck ; pushoff left sideways. 

As in Exercise 1, then straddleoff 
forward (Fig. 175). 

As in Exercise 1, straddling off 
right sideways (before pushing 
off a quarter turn left is executed, 
the right leg in front, the left 
behind) (help). 

As in Exercise 1, straddling back- 
ward (with a half turn) (help). 

As in Exercise 1, with a rearvault 
left into the crossstand at the left 
side of the neck. (Lean far over 
to the left) (help). 

As in Exercise 1, with squat for- 
ward (help). 

As in Exercise 1, with a turnover 
(handspring) with bent arms 
(Fig. 176) (help). 

As in Exercise 7, with straight 
arms (help). 



:i^l- 



201 



for- 



left forward (shearsmount 
ward); straddleoff forward. 
2 Shearsmount left forward onto the 
croup ; stridedismount right back- 
ward. 





<J 



i^-- 



Fig. 175. 



YIII 



1 Jump, immediately swinging the 
legs forward, the hands behind 
the body and executing a shears 



Fig. 176. 

As in Exercise 2, feint right and 
stridemount right forward by the 
opposite side (Fig. 177) ; j)lace the 
hands behind and dismount right 
sideways. 

As in Exercise 2, feint right and 
rearvault right. 

As in Exercise 2, feint right and 
rearvault right with a half turn 
left. 

As in Exercise 2, feint right and 
rearvault right with a rearmount 
into the ridingseat in the saddle 
(keep the body as closely to the 
right arm as possible and lean to 



202 



GERM A X- AMERICAN G YMXA S TICS 



the right side) ; the hands behind, 
dismount right sideways. 
7 As in Exercise 2; feint riglit and 
rearvault right over croup and 
neck (double rearvault right). 

IX 

1 Jump, and with a half turn left 

straddlemount backward into the 
ridingseat on the cr'oup (after 
the turn lean well forward, rest- 
ing the hands on the horse in 
front of the body); dismount left 
sideways. 

2 Jump as above, but instead of 

sinking into the seat, circle the 
left leg backward over the horse, 
and land in the crossstand (stride- 
vault left backward) (Fig. ITS) 
(help).. 

3 As Exercise 2, resting on the left 

hand, swing the right leg forward 
at the same time springing off 
with the left and flankvault right 
forward (Fig. 179) (also called 
a fencer's vault). 

4 As in Exercise 3, with a frontvault 

right. 

5 As in Exercise 3, swinging the left 

leg forward and a rearvault left. 

6 Lay the springboard at an obtuse 

angle to the horse, and execute 
the fencer's mounts and vaults. 
Help is needed, when vaulting 
over the saddle anl neck. 

X 

1 Jump into the siderest on the right 
side of the horse; swing the left 
leg backward executing a three 
quarter turn left into the riding- 
seat in the saddle (turnmount 
backward); the hands behind, 
dismount right sidewavs. 



2 Turnmount left backward into the 

saddle; shears left forward; dis- 
mount right sideways with a 
quarter turn left. 

3 As in Exercise 2, then a quarter 

turn left (crossstraddle position) 
and turnmount right forward 
onto the croup; the hands behind, 
dismount right sideways with one 
half turn left. 

4 As in Exercise 2, but onto the 

neck; shears left forward; the 
hands behind, the fingers over 
the end of the horse, shears left 
forward dismount at the same 
time — (shearsdismount forward 
— see Fig. 108) (help). 

XI 

1 Frontvault right into the siderest 

on the left side of the horse 
(three quarter turn left); squat 
forward (help). 

2 As Exercise 1 ; feint right and one 

half circle with both legs left for- 
ward into the backrest; pushoff 
forward with one half turn right. 

3 As in Exercise 2, from the back- 

rest, one half circle with both 
legs right backward into the 
frontrest; straddle over forward 
(help). 

4 As in Exercise 1, feint right, circle 

right leg outward and turnmount 
right backward; front leaningrest 
on the neck and squat forward 
(help). 

.5 As in Exercise 2, from the back- 
rest one half circle of both legs 
right backward, turnmount left 
backward; sink down backward 
and roll backward over the neck 
(help). 

() As in Exercise 1, feint right with 
both legs, and flankvault left. 



LONG HOUSE 



203 




Fig. 177. 





Fig. 178. 



Fig. 179. 



204 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



7 As in Exercise 6, witli front or 

rear vault. 

8 As in Exercise 6, with double rear- 

vault. 

XII 

1 Free jump (spring off with one 
foot) into a stand on the horse; 
fall forward into the front lean- 
ingrest; straddleoff backward. ■ 



As in Exercise 1 ; after the straddle- 
off, immediately execute a flank- 
vault right. 

As in Exercise 2, with a high 
frontvault (Fig. 180); also a 
frontvault with one quarter or 
one half turn right. 

As in Exercise 2, with a rearvault ; 
also a rearvault with one quarter 
or one half turn risrht or left. 




Fig. 180. 




From the stand on the horse as in 
Exercise 1, lean forward and turn 
over forward (handspring) with 
bent or straight arms (help). 

From the stand on the horse as 
in Exercise 1, handstand on the 



neck and pushoff left sideways 

into the crossstand (Fig. 181). 
As in Exercise 6, squatting off from 

the handstand (help). 
As in Exercise 6, straddling off 

(help). 



VERTICAL LADDER 205 



VERTICAL LADDER 



Bv DR. HENRY HARTUNG 



These exercises may be arranged into three parts or 
grades, according to the degree of difficulty, and shoukl l)e 
practised accordingly. As it is not the intention to enu- 
merate all the exercises possible in a certain set or order, it 
is left to the option of the teacher to arrange the move- 
ments belonging to certain related groups into such com- 
binations as may suit his own purposes. 

The vertical ladder must be fastened into such a frame 
or position as to allow free access to it from all sides, since 
exercises may be practised on all four sides of the appa- 
ratus. 

After ascending one side of the ladder it is not absolutely 
necessary for the pu^^il to descend on the same side ; but, as 
it should be the teacher's object to make his lesson as diver- 
sified and interesting as possible, he may allow the pupil 
to execute one quarter or one half turn around the ladder, 
and then descend on the opposite or outer side. 

There are four distinct holds or positions of the hands to 
be remembered. 

1. Palms downward (the arms in position forward), or 
forward (the arms in position overhead), the dorsal 
surface upward or backward (upperhold, ordinary 
hold). 



206 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

2. Palms upward (the arms forward), or backward (the 

arms overhead), the forearms in supination (under- 
hold, reversed hokl). 

3. The pahns inward, the dorsal surfaces outward, the 

radius turned upAvard in the forward, and back- 
ward in the upward position of the arms (outer- 
hold). 

4. Palms outward, the dorsal surfaces inward, the arms 

in state of extreme pronation, the ulna upward in 
forward position, or backward in upward position 
of the arms (innerhold). 

A great variety of holds or positions may be taken on 
the rounds or the rails of the ladder, or on both. They 
are : — 

1. With both hands, the palms forward on the rounds. 

2. With both hands, the palms backward on the rounds. 

3. With both hands, tlie palms inw^ard on the rails. 

4. With both hands, the palms outward on the rails. 

These form the simple and most common holds. 

Combinations of these may be made in various ways, con- 
stituting the mixed holds. 

The movements of the hands in climbing or walking up- 
ward or downward are executed by having the one hand 
leading, the other following to the same round, or by having 
one hand leading, the other passing to the next round or 
next space on the rail. The movements of the feet are exe- 
cuted in the same way. 



VERTICAL LADDER 



207 



LESSON 1. 



1 Walking up and down the ladder, 

the hands on the rails at the 
height of the shoulders, the right 
or left hand leading, the other 
hand following to the same height 
(Fig. 182), the feet advancing 
on the rounds in a similar man- 
ner. 

2 Like Exercise 1, with the hands on 

the rounds. 

3 Like Exercise 1, with the limbs of 

the same side moving simulta- 
neously. 

4 Like Exercise 2, with the limbs of 

the same side moving sinudta- 
neously. 



5 Like Exercise 1, 
with one hand 
on the rail, the 
other on the 
round. 

G Like Exercise 3, 
with one hand 
on the rail, the 
other on the 
round. 

7-12 Like Exercises 
1-6, the advan- 
cing hand and 
foot passing to 
the next round 
or space instead 
of the same. 




Fig. 182. 



Re:mark. — These exercises may be practised by placing 
the hands on the rails, the palms outward or inward, or on 
the rounds, the pabns upward or downward. 



LESSON 2. 



Walking up and down the ladder, 
the hands on the rails, the feet 
on the rounds, the right hand and 
left foot leading, the other limbs 
following to the same rounds or 
space. 

The same exercise reversed (the 
left hand and right foot lead- 
ing). 

The Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 



■4 Like Exercise 1, with the hands on 
the rounds. 

5 Like Exercise 2, with the hands on 
the rounds. 

Like Exercise 1, with one hand on 
the rail, the other on the round. 

7-12 Like Exercises 1-6, with the 
advancing hand and foot passing 
to the next round or space, in- 
stead of the same. 



Walking up and down the ladder, 
the left hand on the rail, the right 
hand on the hip, the hand ad- 
vancing one space, the feet fol- 
lowing successively (first one, 
then the other, to the same 
round). 



LESSON 3. 

! The same exercise reversed. 

; Like Exercise 1, with the hand on 
the rounds instead of on the 
rail. 

[ Like Exercise 1, one hand advan- 
cing alternately with the other 
(one returning to the hip, while 



208 



GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



the other passes to the next 
round). 

5 Like Exercise 1, the foot and the 
liand of the same side advancing 
simultaneously. 

Like Exercise 5, with the opposite 
foot and hand. 

7, 8 Like Exercises 5, 6, with the 
hand on the round instead of on 
the rail. 

Like Exercise 5, but after simul- 
taneous movements of the limbs 
of one side, the other foot passes 
to the next round, the hand also 



passing to the next round or 
space. 

10 Like Exercise 9, the limbs of the 

opposite side leading. 

11 Any of the previous exercises, but 

in advancing, the hand changes 
from the palm outward (on the 
rails), or from the palm down- 
ward, to the palm upward (on 
the rounds). 

12 Any of the previous exercises, but 

while advancing to next round 
or space, the liand changes 
from rail to round, or vice versa. 



Re:maeks. — In the exercises of this lesson, or whenever 
there is onlj^ one hand employed, the other hand may be 
placed either on the hip, the shoulder, or on the hack, or in 
any other position to be determined by the teacher. 



LESSON 4. 

]\Iost of the exercises of this lesson may l)e executed in 
the same Avay as indicated in Lessons 1, 2, and 3, variations 
being brought about by taking more difficult positions of 
the body and limbs. 



Walking up and down the ladder, 
the legs in the squatting position 
(the knees bent, the body erect). 

Walking up and down the ladder, 
omitting one round or space, the 
limbs of the same side leading, 
those of the opposite side follow- 
ing to the same round or space. 

Like Exercise 2, the advancing 
limbs passing to the second 
higher round or space. 

Like Exercise 2, the limbs of the 
opposite sides moving simulta- 
neously. 

Like Exercise 3, the limbs of the 



opposite sides moving simul- 
taneously. 

6 Walking up and down the ladder, 

taking hold with one hand and 
one forearm on the rails. 

7 Like Exercise 6, taking hold on 

the rounds. 

8 Walking up and doMn with cross- 

ing the feet. 

9 Walking up and down on the 

knees, the hands in various 
positions and holds. 
10 Walking up and down in the 
squatting position, taking hold 
with only one hand. 



VERTICAL LADDER 



201) 



LESSON 5. 



1 Hopping up and down the ladder 

on both feet, the hands advan- 
cing successively to the same 
round or space. 

2 Like Exercise 1, the hands passing 

alternately to the next round. 

3 Like Exercise 1, the hands passing 

simultaneously to the next round 
or space. 

4 Like Exercise 1, but on one foot, 

the other leg being extended. 

5 Like Exercise 2, with only one 

foot. 

6 Hopping up and down the ladder 



on one foot, taking hold of the 
rail with the hand of the o})po- 
site side. 

7 Like Exercise G, with the hand on 

the round instead of on the rail. 

8 Like Exercise 6, with the hand 

changing from rail to the round, 
and vice versa, while advancing. 
9, 10, and 11. Like Exercises 6, 
7, and 8, using the hand and 
foot of the same side. 
12 Hopping up and down in the 
squatting position, with various 
holds of the hands. 



LESSON 6. 



Position in front of the ladder. Jump into the hanging 
position back turned towards the ladder, the hands on one 
round, the palms forward or backward. In this position : — 



1 a. Raise the right knee forward 
(bending the leg to a right 
angle, the toes pointed down- 
ward ) . 

b. Raise the left knee. 

c. Raise both knees, repeating each 

movement several times. 

■2 Like Exercise 1, raising the legs 
forward horizontally (Fig. 183), 
repeated several times. 

8 Spread the legs to a straddle posi- 
tion sideways and close; repeat. 

4 Cross the legs, one above the other; 

repeat. 

5 Place one hand on the hip and re- 

turn to its former hold, the body 
being suspended by one arm. 

6 Like Exercise 6, changing from 

one hand to the other. 

7 Like Exercise 6, at the same time 




Fig. 183. 

changing the hold of the hands 
from the i^alms forward to the 
palms backward, and vice rer.sa. 



210 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



LESSON 7. 



1 Walking up and down the ladder, 

the ladder between the legs, with 
any of the various holds and ad- 
vances (Fig. 184). 

2 As Exercise 1, but hopping instead 

of walking. 

3 Walking upward in any of the 

various ways described and slid- 
ing downward, the legs strad- 
dling the rails, the hands pass- 
ing from one to the next round 
(Fig. 185). 

4 As Exercise 3, the hands sliding 



simultaneously to the next round 
or space. 

5 As Exercise 3, with the legs ex- 

tended downward. 

6 As Exercise 4, with the legs ex- 

tended downward on one side. 

7 As Exercise 3, with the legs closed 

and bent backward in a right 
angle to the thigh (raising heels). 

8 As Exercise 7, the hands sliding 

simultaneously. 

9 Hopping upward in any of the 

various ways described, and slid- 
ing downward. 



r^ 



Fig. 184. 




Fig. 185. 



Walking up and down the ladder 
backward, the arms overhead, 
and the hands on the rounds 
(Fig. 186). 

As Exercise 1, with the hands on 
the sides. 



Fig. 186. 



LESSON 8. 




Fig. 187. 



3 As Exercise 1, with the arms down 

and at the sides, the hands tak- 
ing hold on the rounds (Fig. 
187). 

4 As Exercise 3, with the hands on 

the rails. 



VEBTICAL LADDER 



211 



Walking up and down the ladder 
backward having one arm over- 
head, the other one downward, 
the hands on the rounds or 
rails. 

Change from the rear standing 
position on one round to the front 



position, by twisting through 
under one arm. 

Walking upward as in Exercise 1, 
then execute one half turn into 
the front position and slide down- 
ward. 

Walking up and down by continu- 
ally circling around the ladder. 




>^ 




LESSON 9. 



Fig. 188. 



Fig. 189. 



1 Sit on one round facing the ladder 

and raise the arms upward, the 
hands in various holds on the 
rounds or rails, and change posi- 
tion onto the next round. Re- 
peat several times. 

2 Sit on the seventh or eighth round, 

let go with the hands and lower 
the body gradually, until coming 
to a hanging i)<^sition on the 
knees (Fig. 188). Return to sit- 
ting position. 
8 As Exercise 2. After bending 
backward into the hanging posi- 
tion take hold of the round in 
reach and extend the legs upward 



on the opposite side of the ladder, 
supporting the body on tlie arms 
(Fig. 189). Return to the hang- 
ing and sitting position. 

As Exercise 3, but after taking hold 
of the round in reach, remove 
the legs slowly from between the 
rounds, extend them upwards, 
and turn over, landing on the feet. 

Sit on one round and hook the feet 
under one of the lower rounds. 
Lower the body backward gradu- 
ally until it assumes a horizontal 
position, the arms folded on the 
chest or raised upward (Fig. 190). 
Return. 




As Exercise 5, but raise the arms 
upward and lower the body grad- 
ually backward through the hori- 
zontal position and downward, 
the arms and the body having 
the same direction. 



212 



GERM AN- A M ERIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



LESSON 10. 



Jump into the hanging position, 
facing tlie ladder, tlie liands on 
the rounds, tlie legs in the strad- 
dle position extended over the 
sides of the ladder. Climb up 
and down, one hand leading, the 
other following on the same 
round. 

As Exercise 1, taking hold of the 
rails. 

As Exercise 1, with one hand on 
one round, the other on the rail. 

5, and 6. As Exercises 1, 2, and 
3, with the hands passing alter- 



10 



nately to the next higher round 
or space (hand over hand). 

Climb upward, but sliding down- 
ward, the legs placed around the 
rails, the hands sliding sinuil- 
taneously on the rounds. 

As Exercise 7, but in sliding down- 
ward, take hold on tlie rails. 

As Exercise 7, but in sliding keep 
the legs extended and closed, or 
in the straddle position. 

As Exercise 9, the hands taking 
hold on the rails. 



LESSON 11. 
Position facing the ladder. 



Jump into the hanging position, the 
hands on the rails, hop up and 
down, the legs extended and rest- 
ing in the straddle position on the 
sides. 

As Exercise 1, with the hands on 
the rounds. 

As Exercise 1, hop downward with 
only one hand, the other hand 
placed on the hip. 

As Exercise 2, hop downward with 
only one hand, the other arm 
raised sidewavs. 



1 Walking ivp and down the ladder, 

skipping two rounds, the right 
foot beginning, the left following 
to the same round. The hands 
move on the rounds in a similar 
way. 

2 As Exercise 1, with the hands on 

the rails. 

3 As Exercise 1, the hands moving 

simultaneously. 



As Exercise 1, the hands changing 
from the rails to the rounds, and 
vice versa. 

As Exercise 3, with the right and 
left hand changing alternately 
from round to round in hopping 
downward. 

As Exercise 3, but in hopping 
downward, the hand changes 
from the round to the rail, or 
vice versa. 



LESSON 12. 



As Exercise 2, the hands moving 

simultaneously. 
Hopping up and down the ladder 

on both feet, skipping one round, 

the hands on the rounds or rails. 
As Exercise 5, hopping on one 

foot only. 
As Exercise 5, taking hold with 

one hand only. 



VEliTICAL LADDER 



2ia 



8 As Exercise 6, changing from one 

foot to the other, aUernately. 

9 Hopping up and down the ladder 

on both knees, the hands moving 
simultaneously on the rounds or 
rails. 



10 As Exercise 0, but with hold of 

only one hand. 

11 As Exercise 9, but on one knee 

only, the other leg extended. 

12 As Exercise 10, but on one knee 

only, the other leg extended. 





Fig. 191. 



Fig. 192. 



LESSON 13. 



1 Jump into the rest, both hands 

on one round, the legs extended 
in the straddle position, resting 
on the rails (Fig. 191 ). Return to 
the standing position and repeat 
by advancing the hands to the 
next higher round. 

2 Walk upward and jump into the 

rest, the hands on the eighth 
round, lower the body slowly into 
the hanging position, by bending 
the arms gradually, the legs slid- 
ing down on the rails. 

3 As Exercise 2, but keep the arms 

extended, while sliding down- 
ward into the hanging position. 



From the rest, lower the body 
slowly until the extended arms 
assume a horizontal position and 
return to the rest. 

From the rest, bend and straigliten 
the arms repeatedly. 

From the rest, climb up and down, 
one hand following the other to 
the same round. 

As Exercise 6, but hand over hand. 

Climb up and down, hanging by 
one hand and supporting with 
the other (Fig. 192). The hands 
move alternately. 



214 



GEE MA N-A M ERIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



LESSON 14. 



Walking up and down the ladder 
backwards, taking hold with only 
one hand on a round or rail, the 
other hand on the hip. 

Hopping up and down the ladder 
backwards, on both feet, the 
hands following overhead on the 
rounds or rails. 

As Exercise 2, with the arms down- 
ward, at the sides, the hands tak- 
ing hold on the rails or rounds. 

As Exercise 2, but on one foot 
only. 



5 As Exercise 3, but on one foot 
only. 

C Climb up and down the ladder 
backwards, the hands on the 
rounds, the legs extended in the 
straddle position over the rails, or 
closed. 

7 As Exercise G, but raising the knees 

forward, while climbing. 

8 As Exercise 6, raising the legs for- 

ward to a horizontal position. 





Fig. 193. 



Fig. 194. 



LESSON 15. 



Flag sideways, vertically (Fig. 198). 
(The body is suspended sideways, 
vertically, by one hand on one 
round, the leg of the same side 
bracing against another round. 
The other limbs are extended in 
the opposite directions. ) Dimin- 
ish the space between the hand 
and foot, by moving the hand or 
foot to the next round. 



2 Flag sideways on the feet, the body 
in a horizontal position (Fig. 
194). (One foot braces against 
one round below, the other foot 
is hooked under a round or fas- 
tened by means of a strap around 
the ankle.) The body must be 
lowered into a horizontal posi- 
tion (sideways). 

8 Flag sideways, horizontally on the 



VERTICAL LADDER 



215 



hands, both arms being extended, 
one being in the hanging, the 
other in tlie supporting position 
on tlie rounds, the body is in a 
horizontal position (Fig. 195). 
From the position facing the side 
of the ladder, climb upward and 
downward, the hands on the 
rounds, the legs extended down- 
ward, and closed or in the straddle 
position. 



5 As Exercise 4, with the legs ex- 
tended in the straddle position 
and raised forward horizontally, 
the ladder between them. 

G As Exercise 5, with the legs closed 
and raised forward to a horizontal 
position on one side of the ladder. 

7 As Exercise 4, with the back 

turned toward the ladder. 

8 As Exercise 6, but hopping upward, 

the hands on the rounds or rails. 




Fig. 195. 



216 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



INCLINED LADDER 

The ladder is inclined to an angle of from forty-five to 
seventy degrees. Most of the exercises already described 
for practice on the vertical ladder may also be executed on 
the slanting ladder, especially the climbing and walking 
movements. In order to save space and avoid repetition, the 
teacher is referred to the Lessons 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 12, 13, 
and 14 of the foregoing Part. 

It should not be forgotten, that whenever an exercise is 
descril:>ed with only one kind of hold or position of the hands 
or feet, it should also be practised with all the other holds 
or positions which the exercise may permit. 

LESSON 1. 

The exercises of this lesson are to be executed on the 
under side, from the position underneath and facing the 
ladder. 

1 Jump into the hanging position, 4 As Exercise 8, but spread the legs 

the hands on the rails, and re- to the erossstraddle position (one 

turn to the standing position. leg forward, the other backward) 

Repeat, and jumi) to the next and close. Repeat several times, 

higher space. 5 Jump into the hanging position as 

2 As Exercise 1, but grasp a round. in Exercise 1, then raise — 

In repeating grasp the next a. The right knee forward, 

higher round. b. The left knee forward. 

3 As Exercise 1, with the back turned c. Both knees forward. 

towards the ladder. In the hang- 6 Jump into the hanging position as 
ing position spread the legs side- in Exercise 2, then raise — 
ways to the straddle position and a. The right foot backward, bend- 
close. Repeat several times. ing the knee to an acute angle,, 



INCLINED LADDER 



217 



the thigh remaining vertical 
and the knees locked. 

6. The left foot to same position. 

c. Both feet simultaneonsly to the 
same position (Fig. 10()). 

7 Jump into the hanging position as 

in Exercise 3, and raise — 
a. Tile right leg sideways, the left 
remaining in a vertical posi- 
tion. 
h. The left leg sideways, tlie right 
remaining in a vertical posi- 
tion. 

c. The right leg sideways in front 

of the left leg. 

d. The left leg sideways in front 

of the right leg. 

8 Jump into the hanging position 

as in Exercise 3, and raise — 
a. Tiie right leg forward to a hori- 
zontal position. 
h. The left leg forward to a hori- 
zontal position. 
c. Both legs forward simultane- 
ously to a horizontal position. 

9 Jump into the hanging position, 

as in Exercise 1, hend the arms 
to a right angle, and straighten. 
Repeat several times. 
10 Jump into the hanging position, 
the hands on the rails, or on one 
round, and reverse the hold 
with — 

a. The right hand, and return. 

h. The left hand, and return. 

c. The right and left hands alter- 
nately, and return. 



d. Both hands simultaneously, 

and return. 

11 Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on a round, and 

change the hold with — 

«. The right hand to the rail, and 

return. 
h. The left hand to the rail, and 
retiu'n. 




Fig. 196. 

c. The right and the left hand 

alternately to the rail, and 
return. 

d. Both hands simultaneously, 

and return. 
12 Jump into the hanging position 
and swing the legs forward and 
backward, the body remaining 
firm, and the legs closed and 
well extended — (shortswing;. 



LESSON 2. 
Position underneath and facing the ladder. 



Jump into the hanging position, 
facing the ladder, the hands on 
the rails. Release the hold, — 

a. With the right hand, and lower 



the arm sideways downward 
to the side, and return. Repeat 
several times. 
With the left hand, and return. 



218 



GERM AN- A MEEICAN G YMNA S TICS 



As in Exercise 1, with tlie hands 

on one round, lowering — 
(I. The right arm forward, down- 
ward, and return. 
h. The left arm forward, downward, 
and return. 




Fig. 197. 

Jump into the hanging position, 
the hands on the rails, and swing 
the body sideways, quickly rais- 
ing and returning the hand of 
the side towards which the body 
swings (Fig. lt)7). 

As Exercise 3, with the hands on 



one round, and reverse the hold 
with the right hand,when swing- 
ing to the right, and the left 
hand, when swinging to the 
left. 

5 As Exercise 3, but swing the body 

in a circle. 

6 As Exercise 3, changing the hands 

from the rails to the rounds al- 
ternately while swinging. 

7 From the hanging position, the 

hands on the rails, swing the 
body sideways, and climb up- 
ward and downward, the hands 
moving alternately to the next 
space. 

8 As Exercise 7, with the hands 

grasping on the rounds instead 
of on the rails. 

9 As Exercise T, with one hand on 

the round, the other on one rail, 
the hands moving alternately to 
the next higher round or space. 
10, 11, and 12. As Exercises 7, 8, and 
9, but from the hanging position 
back turned towards the ladder. 



LESSON 3. 
Position underneath and facing the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on the rails, place both 
feet on one round so ac tO have 
the body and legs extended and 
in the same direction, the arms 
also straightened. Bend and 
straighten the arms alternately 
(Fig. 198). Repeat several times. 

2 Take the position as in Exercise 1, 

with both hands on one round. 
Place — 

a. The right on the hip, and return. 

b. The left hand on the hip, and re- 

turn. 




Fig. 198 



IXCLIXED LADDER 



219 



Repeat each movement several 
times. 

Take the position as in Exercise 1, 
the hands on the rails, the palms 
inward. Reverse the position of 
the hands simnltaneonsly and re- 
turn, bending the arms slightly 
while executing the movement. 
Repeat several times. 

As Exercise 3, with both hands on 
one round. Repeat several times. 

Take the position as in Exercise 
1. The hands remaining firmly 
on the rails or the rounds, step 
upward, bending the body, the 
feet passing on the rounds toward 
the hands as high as possible, 
and return. 

As Exercise 5, the feet remaining 
in position, while the hands pass 
downward on the rounds or rails. 



7 As Exercise 5, with both feet ad- 

vancing simultaneously (hop- 
ping). 

8 As Exercise 0, with both hands 

sliding downward simultanc;- 
ously. 

9 As Exercise 7, but on one foot 

only, the other leg extended and 
raised forward at the side of the 
ladder. 

10 As Exercise 8, with only one foot 

remaining in position on the 
round, the other leg extended 
and raised forward in posi- 
tion. 

11 From the position as in Exercise 

1, advance the feet upw^ard into 
the squatting position, then al- 
ternately straighten and bend 
the knees, the hands remaining 
in position. 



LESSON 4. 
Position underneath and facing the ladder. 

Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on the rails or on one 

round. Climb up and down, the 

hands passing alternately to the 

same round or space, the body 

and legs remaining extended in 

the hanging position. 
As Exercise 1, but the hands pass 

alternately to the next higher 

round or space (hand over hand). 
As Exercise 1, with one hand on 

one rail, the other on one round. 

Reverse the position of the hands 

in climbing downward. 
As Exercise 1, changing the holds 

of the hands alternately from the 

rails to the rounds, and vice versa. 
As Exercise 1, but while climbing 

reverse the position of the hands 




Fig. 199. 



220 



GEE MA X-AMEBICA N G YMNA S TICS 



(from palms forward to palms 
backward, and vice versa) on 
the rounds, and (from palms in- 
ward to palms outAvard, and vice 
versa) on the rails. 



As Exercise 1, keeping the arms 
bent to a right angle while climb- 
ing (Fig. 199). 

7-12. As Exercises 1-0, in the hang- 
ing position, back turned towards 
the ladder. 



LESSON 5. 

The exercises of tliis lesson are to Ije executed on the 
upper side of the hidder from the position in front of and 
facing the hidder. 

1 Walking upward on the rounds, 
the hands on the hips (Fig. 200). 
On the top of the ladder take a 
sitting position, facing the ladder, 
the legs around the sides, and 
slide down backward, the hands 
passing down alternately on the 
rounds or rails. 




Fig. 200. 



2 Walking upward as in Exercise 1, 
raising the arms forward in posi- 
tion. On the top, face left or 
right about, take a sitting posi- 
tion, the legs around the sides, 
and slide down forward, the 



hands passing behind the body on 
the rounds or rails. 

3 Walking upward as in Exercise 1, 
raising the arms sideways in posi- 
tion. On the top take a lying 
position forward, the legs ex- 
tended in the straddle position 
over the sides, and slide down- 

ward, the hands passing alter- 
nately on the rounds or rails. 

4 As Exercise 2, raising the arms 

overhead in position. On the 
top face right or left about, take 
a lying position on the back, the 
legs extended in a straddle posi- 
tion over the sides, the arms 
overhead on the rails or rounds, 
and slide slowly downward. 

5 As Exercise 1, folding the arms on 

the chest while walking upward. 
Take a straddleseat and slide 
downward. In the sitting posi- 
tion, take hold with only one 
hand on one rail or round, the 
other hand is placed on the hip 
or shoulder. 

6 As Exercise 2, folding the arms 

on the back in walking upward. 
In sliding downward, place the 
hands in front of the body on 
the rails or rounds, the hands 



IS CLIN ED LADDER 



221 



passing alternately to the same 
rail or round. 

7 As Exercise C, in sliding down- 

ward the hands passing alter- 
nately to the next round or 
space. 

8 As Exercise (5, in sliding down- 

ward the hands sliding simulta- 
neously to the next round or 
space. 

9 As Exercise 0, in sliding downward 

fold the arms on the chest. 
10 As Exercise 1, on the top change 
to the hanging position on the 



under sitle of the ladder and 
walk downward, the feet pass- 
ing on the rounds, the hands on 
the rails. 

11 As Exercise 10, slide downward 

on the under side of the ladder, 
the legs are placed around the 
rails, the hands pass alternately 
on the rounds. 

12 As Exercise 10, climb downward 

on the under side of the ladder, 
the body in the hanging posi- 
tion, the hands passing down 
alternately on the rails. 



LESSON 6. 
Position underneath and facing the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 
the Jiands on one round or on the 
rails. Place the feet on one 
round so as to keep the body and 
legs extended. Walking up and 
downward, the hands and the feet 
moving alternately to the same 
round or space. 

2 As Exercise 1, the hands and the 

feet passing alternately to the 
next round or space. 

3 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the 

same side moving simultaneously, 
those of one side leading, the 
other following to the same round 
or space. 

4 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the op- 

posite sides moving simultane- 
ously, passing to the next higher 
round or space. 

5 Walking upward on the under side 

of the ladder in any of the pre- 
viously described ways. In mov- 
ing downward place both legs 
around the sides of the ladde^r, 



the hands move alternately on 
the rails or rounds. 

6 As Exercise .5, the hands also mov- 

ing simultaneously on the rounds 
or i-ails. 

7 Jump into the hanging position 

and place one leg around the side 
of the ladder, the other on one 
round. Climb upward by mov- 
ing the hands and feet alter- 
nately. In passing downward 
reverse the position of the legs. 

8 Jump into the hanging position 

and place both legs aronnd the 
sides of the ladder. Climb up- 
ward by moving the hands and 
the legs alternately. 

9 As Exercise 8, the hands slidine- 

simultaneously upward. On the 
top of the ladder quit the hold 
with the legs and assume the 
hanging position. Jump to the 
floor. 
10 Climb upward in any of the 
various ways mentioned. On 



222 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



the top change the position from 
underneath to above the ladder, 
by climbing around one of the 
sides. Take the sitting posi- 
tion, back turned towards the 
ladder, then bend forward, catch- 
ing hold of the rounds, sup- 
porting the body on the hands 
extend the legs upward in strad- 
dle position over the sides, and 
walk downwards (in the front 
leaningrest), the hands moving 
to the same round or space 
(Fig._201). 

11 As Exercise 10, but, in walking 

downward on the hands, move 
the hands alternately to the 
next round or space. 

12 As Exercise 10, but in walking 



downward on the hands, hop 
with both hands simultaneously 
to the next round or space. 




Fig. 2G1. 



LESSON 7. 
Position underneath the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position 

facing the ladder, the hands on 
one round, the palms turned 
backward. Bend the arms to a 
right angle and climb up and 
downward (hand over hand). 

2 As Exercise 1, with the back turned 

towards the ladder, and the hands 
on the rails. 

3 From the position sideways under- 

neath the ladder, jump into the 
hanging position on one of the 
rails, and climb sideways upward 
and downward, the higher hand 
leading, the other following. 

4 As Exercise 3, crossing the hands 

in advancing. 

5 As Exercise 1, with the hands 

omitting one round or space in 
advancing. 

6 As Exercise 2, raising the legs for- 

ward to a horizontal position 
while climbing. 



7 As Exercise 4, with the hands on 

two rounds instead of one side, 
and raise the knees forward in 
position, the legs being bent to 
right angles. 

8 As Exercise 3, with one hand on 

one rail, the other on one round, 
and the feet raised backward, 
the knees bent to a right angle. 
The hands move alternately. 

9 As Exercise 1, swing the body 

slightly forward and backward. 
The hands advance at the end 
of each backward movement. 

10 As Exercise 9, but the back turned 

toward the ladder. The hands 
advance at the end of each for- 
ward movement. 

11 As Exercise 1, swinging the body 

sideways. 

12 As Exercise 2, swinging the body 

sideways. 



INCLINED LADDER 



223 



LESSON 
Position underneath and 

1 Jump into the lianging position, tlie 

hands on the rails. Hop up and 
downward, the body and legs re- i 
niaining quiet. 

2 As Exercise 1, with the hands mov- 

ing on the rounds. 

3 As Exercise 1, "with one hand on 8 

one round, the other on one rail. 
Reverse the hold of the hands in 
passing downward. 9 

4 As Exercise 1, but while advancing 

to the next round reverse the 
hold of the hands. 

5 As Exercise 2, but while advancing 

to the next round, reverse the 
hold of the hands simultaneously. 10, 

6 As Exercise 3, but Avhile advancing 

change the hold of the hands 
simultaneously, one hand from 



facing the ladder. 

the round to the rail, the other 
from the rail to the round. 

Jump into the hanging position 
sideways, both hands on one of 
the i-ails, hop sideways up and 
downward. 

As Exercise 7, with the hands on 
two rounds, one arm bent, the 
other extended. 

As Exercise T, with one hand on 
one round, the other on one 
rail. On the top, change the 
position to the opposite side of 
the ladder, and change the posi- 
tion of the hands. 

11, 12. As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, 
with the back turned toward the 
ladder. 



LESSON 9. 



Exercises on the upper side of the Ladder. 

Position in front of and facing the ladder. 



Take the lying position on the lad- 
der, face downward, the hands 
overhead on one round, the legs 
extended in the straddle position 
over the sides. Climb upward, 
and downward, the hands pass- 
ing alternately to the same or to 
the next round. 

As Exercise 1, the hands passing 
simultaneously to the next roiuid. 

As Exercise 1, but in advancing, 
the hands change alternately from 
the rounds to the rails, and vice 
versa. 

As Exercise 2, the hands changing 
simultaneously from the rounds 
to the rails, and vice versa. 



5-8. As Exercises 1-4, but in the 
lying position backward, face 
upward. 

9 From the position forward, facing 
the ladder, support the body 
on both hands on one round 
(front leaningrest), the feet 
resting on the sides. Climb up- 
ward and downward, the hands 
passing alternately to the same 
or to the next round (Fig. 202). 

10. As Exercise 9, both hands advan- 
cing simultaneously to the next 
round or space. 

11 As Exercise 9, but in the position 
of support, the back turned 
toward the ladder, the body and 



224 



GERM A X-AMERICA X G YMXA S TICS 



legs well extended (rear leaniug- 
rest^. the head rather backward 
than forward ^Fig. -03 \ the 
hands advancing alternately on 
the rails or roimds. 



12 As Exercise 11. both hands pass- 
ing simultaneously to the next 
round or space. 





Fig 202. Fig. 203. 

LESSON 10. 

Exercises on the upper side of tlie ladder. 

Position back turned to-wards the ladder. 



1 WalkiuiT upward and backward, the 

feet and the hands on the rounds, 
(rear leaningresl\ skipping one 
round in advancing. Tlie limbs 
of the same side begin, those of 
the opposite side follow to the 
same round. 

2 As Exercise 1. the limbs of the oi> 

posite sides beginning right hand 

and left foot\ the other limbs 

passing to the second higher 

rounds. 
■3 As Exercise 1, both hands moving 

simultaneously. 
1 As Exercise 1. taking hold with 

only one hand, the other is placed 

on the hips. 



b Hop upward and backward on one 
or both legs, omitting one round. 
The hands pass simultaneously 
to the next round or space. 

As Exercise 5. on one or both 
legs, taking hold with only one 
hand, the other is placed on the 
hip. 

7 Walking forward upward, and 
backward downward, without 
taking hold with the hands 
(which are placed on the hips 
or in any of the various positions 
mentioned previously), the feet 
passing from round to round. 

S As Exercise 7. but backward up- 
ward and forward downward. 



INCLINED LADDER 



225 



As Exercise 8, but on the toj) face 
right or left about, and walk down 
backward. 



10 As Exercise 7, omitting one or two 

rounds with every step. 

11 As Exercise 8, omitting one or two 

rounds with every step. 



LESSON 11. 

Exercises on the upper side of the hidder. 

Position in front of and facing the ladder. 



1 Take the lying position, facing 
the ladder, the hands over the 
head on one round, and the legs 
extended in the straddle position 
over the sides. Raise the body 
upward into the position of sup- 
port, holding the arms well ex- 
tended and bracing firmly against 
the round. Return into the 
lying position, reversing the pre- 
vious movement. 

2 As Exercise 1, travelling up and 

down the ladder. 

3 As Exercise 1, using only one arm 

for support, the other hantl grasp- 
ing the wrist of the bracing arm. 

4 As Exercise 1, with only one arm, 

the other hand resting on the 
hip. Travel iip and down the 
ladder by using the arms alter- 
nately. 

5 Take the position of support on 

only one arm, the other hand on 
the hip, the feet resting on the 
sides. Hop upward in this posi- 
tion, changing to the opposite 
hand in hopping downward. 

6 Take the lying position facing the 



ladder, the head downward, the 
legs extended in the straddle 
position upward. Support the 
body on the hands, the arms 
extended. (See Fig. 201.) Walk 
up and downward, the hands 
moving alternately to the same 
round. 

7 As Exercise 0, the hands moving 

alternately to the next round. 

8 As Exercise C, hopping up and 

downward (both hands moving 
simultaneously to the next 
round). 

9 As Exercise 8, the hands on the 

sides, in moving upward, and 
hopping on only one hand, in 
coming downward. 

10 Take the sitting position, facing 

the ladder, the legs extended 
and spread sideways in the strad- 
dle position, the hands on one 
round. Support the body on 
the hands, and walk up and 
downward, the hands passing 
alternately to the same round. 

11 As Exercise 10, the hands passing 

alternately to the next round. 



LESSON 12. 

Exercises on the under side of the ladder. 
Position underneath and back turned towards the ladder. 
Jump into the hanging position, round so as to have the body 

the back turned towards the lad- and the legs well extended r Ei- 

der, and place the feet on one 204). Walk upward and down- 



226 



GERM A N-A M ERIC A N G YMNA S TICS 



ward, the hands and feet moving 
alternately to the same round. 
As Exercise 1, the limbs of the 
same sides moving simultane- 
ously. 




Fig. 204. 

3 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the 

opposite sides moving simultane- 
ously. 

4 As Exercise 1, the hands or the 

feet advancing simultaneously, 

5 Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on one round or the 
rails. Hop upward and down- 
ward, omitting one round or 
space. 

6 As Exercise 5, at the same time 

changing the position of the 
hands from the rounds to the 
rails, and vice versa. 

7 Jump into the hanging position 

on one hand, on round or jail, 
the other hand on the hip. 
Hop upward and downward. 

8 As Exercise 7, changing the hand 

from the round to the rail in ad- 
vancinsr. 



9 As Exercise 7, hopping sideways 
upwards, the hand on one rail. 
On the top, change to the oppo- 
site side, and hop downward on 
the other hand. 
10 Jump into the hanging position 
facing the ladder, the hands on 
the rails or on the rounds. Turn 
the body over backward, the legs 
passing between the arms, and 
extend the legs upward (Fig. 
205). Holding the body in this 
position, climb upward and 
downward. 
As Exercise 1, in the hanging 
position, back turned toward 
the ladder, turn the body over 
completely, legs extended down- 
ward. Climb upward and 
downward, the hands moving 
alternatelv. 



11 




Fig. 205. 

12 As Exercise 11, the hands moving 
simultaneously in coming down- 
ward. 



HORIZONTAL LADDER 



227 



HORIZONTAL LADDER 



Bv Dr. HENKY HARTUXG 

Most of the exercises on the under side of the inclined 
ladder can be practised on the horizontal ladder. The teacher, 
therefore, is referred to the respective exercises in the pre- 
vious part. 

The ladder must be raised to such a height, that when 
the body is in the hanging position, with the arms fully 
stretched, the extended feet will not touch the floor. 

It should also be remembered, that wdienever an exercise 
permits, it should be executed with all the different holds and 
positions of the hands. 

LESSON 1. 
Position underneath and at one end of the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 
both hands on one round or on 
the rails. Raise the knees for- 
ward and turn the body over 



2 As Exercise 1, tlien push the feet 
through the space between two 
rounds and hang on the knees, 




Fig. 206. 

backward, halfways, j^lacing both 
feet against one round, and re- 
turn (Fig. 206). Repeat several 
times. 




Fig. 207. 



228 



GERM A N-A M ERIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



letting go with both hands (Fig. 
207). The body assumes a verti- 
cal position. Return. 




3 As Exercise 1, but from the hang- 

ing position sideways, facing in- 
ward, both hands on one of the 
rails. 

4 As Exercise 2, but from the hang- 

ing position sideways facing out- 
ward, hanging on one rail. 

5 As Exercise 3, while in the hanging 

position on the knees, swing the 
body fore and backward, the arms 
either overhead or folded on the 
chest. 

6 As Exercise 2, at the end of the 

ladder swing the body fore and 
backward. At the end of the 
backward swing quickly remove 
the legs from the ladder, and 
jump to the standing position 
(kneedrop). 

7 As Exercise 1, retaining the hold, 

then straighten the legs upward, 



bringing the body into a vertical 
position (Fig. 208). Bend and 
straighten the arms several 
times. Return. 

8 As Exercise 1, then straighten the 

legs upward, the body and the 
legs in a vertical position, turn 
the trunk right and left. Re- 
turn. 

9 As Exercise 1, but hold with the 

toes of both feet on to a round 
back of the hands, press the 
body backward as far as possi- 
ble (nest) (Fig. 209). Re- 
turn. 

10 As Exercise 9, taking hold with 

only one foot, the other leg ex- 
tended backward in a horizontal 
position. 

11 As Exercise 1, then turn the body 

over completely backward into 
the hanging position backward, 
the legs extended downward. 
Let go with both hands, and 
jump to the floor. 




Fig. 209. 

12 As Exercise 11, but without touch- 
ing the rounds with the feet in 
turning over backward, then 
return to the hanging position 
forward, and repeat. 



HORIZONTAL LADDER 



229 



LESSON 2. 



Position side"ways facing in-ward at one end of the ladder. 



Jump into the hanging position on 
one of the rails. Move tlie riglit 
hand sideways repeatedly until 
the hands are apart at full reach 
(Fig. 210). Return the hand to 
the starting position, llepeat the 
same with the other hand. 

As Exercise 1, moving the hands 
simultaneously. 

As Exercise 1, moving the hands 
alternately. 

Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 
cross one hand over the other, 
and return. The same with the 
other hand, and simultaneously 
with t)oth hands. 

As Exercise 1, but instead of re- 
turning the hand to the starting 
position, advance the other hand 
to the hand first moved, and con- 
tinue these movements, thus trav- 
elling sideways from one end of 
the ladder to the other. 

As Exercise 5, the hands moving 
sideways on the rounds, instead 
of the rails. 

As Exercise 5, moving the hands 
alternately on the rail in the 
same direction to the end of the 
ladder, and return to the start- 
ing-point. 

As Exercise 7, with the hands on 
the rounds, and as far apart as 
possible. 



9 As Exercise 7, with one hand 
always crossing over the other 
in travelling sideways. 
10 As Exercise 7, the hands moving 
simultaneously sideways on one 
side. 




Fig. 210. 

11 As Exercise 10, both hands mov- 
ing simultaneously sideways on 
the rounds. 

12. As Exercise 10, with one hand on 
one round, the other on the rail, 
both moving simultaneously to 
the next round or space. 



LESSON 3. 
Position underneath and in the middle of the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 
the hands on the rails, the palms 
forward. Quit the hold with one 



hand and turn the body forward 
one quarter turn around the 
other arm, taking hold of the 



230 



GERMAN-AMERICAy^ G TMJVASTICS 



rail -with both hands. Return to 
the first position, and repeat 
with tlie otlier arm. 

2 As Exercise 1, turning one quarter 

turn backAvard around one arm, 
and return. 

3 As Exercise 1, with a half turn at 

the same time swinging the ex- 
tended arm dow^nward and for- 
ward upward (describing a half 
circle), taking hold on the rail 
as far away from the stationary 
hand as possible. Return and 
repeat Avith the other arm. 

4 As Exercise 3, turning backward, 

circling the arm downward and 
then backward upward. 

5 As Exercise 1, hanging with both 

hands on one round, the palms 
forward. Turn one quarter turn 
forward, the hand changing to 
another round, and return. 

6 As Exercise 5, turning backward 

around one arm, and return. 

7 As Exercise 5, circling one arm 

downward and forward to a 
round in farthest reach. Return, 
and repeat with the other arm. 



8 As Exercise 7, turning and cir- 

cling the arm backward. 

9 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 

but the palms turned backward. 
Turn one quarter turn back- 
ward around one arm, circling 
the other arm, and taking hold 
on the same rail which the sta- 
tionary hand holds. Return, 
and repeat with the other 
arm. 

10 From the hanging position on one 

side, facing the ladder, palms 
backward, turn three quarters 
turn around one arm backward, 
the other arm circles backward 
upward, taking hold of the op- 
posite rail. Return. 

11 Hanging position on one round, 

the palms forward. Turn one 
hall turn forward around one 
arm, circling the other arm for- 
ward upward, taking hold on the 
same round. Return. 

12 As Exercise 11, but the palms 

backward and turn backward 
around one arm. 



LESSON 4. 
Position sideTvays facing outward at one end of the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 
both hands on one rail, the palms 
forward. Turn one half turn 
forward to the right around the 
right arm, and advance left hand 
on the same rail, beyond the 
right, the palm forward. Then 
turn one half turn forward 
around the left arm, changing 
hold with the right hand : con- 
tinue this travelling from one end 
of the ladder to the other. 



2 As Exercise 1, beginning from 

position palms backward, and 
turn one half turn backward 
instead of forward, being care- 
ful to always take the position, 
the palms backward, when re- 
treating. 

3 As Exercise 1, the hands on two 

rounds, the palms inward. Exe- 
cute one half turn backward con- 
tinually, and alternately around 
the right and left arm, always 



HORIZONTAL LADDER 



231 



placing the moving liand in posi- 
tion, the pahns inward. 

4 As Exercise 3, but the palms out- 

ward and turn forward, always 
placing the advancing hand in 
position, the pahns outward. 

5 First movement like that of Exer- 

cise 1, taking hold with the 
advancing hand, the palm back- 
ward. Then execute one half 
turn backward around the first 
arm moved, and take a hold with 
the advancing hand, the palm 
forward, thus describing a whole 
circle in the same direction. 
Continue this travelling from one 
end of the ladder to the other. 

6 As Exercise 5, beginning with the 

position palms backward, and 
reverse the movements and posi- 
tions of the hands, continually 
describing circles backward. 



7 As Exercise 5, with the hands on 

two rounds, the palms inward. 

1st movement : turn one half 
turn backward around one arm, 
change the hold palm outward. 

2d movement: turn one half turn 
forward around the other arm, 
change the hold, the palms in- 
ward. Travel in this manner 
from one end of the ladder to 
the other. 

8 As Exercise 7, beginning with the 

position, the palms outward, and 
turn first backward, then for- 
ward. 
9-lG As Exercises 1-8, swinging the 
advancing arm in a circle down- 
ward and upward, to the farthest 
reach on the rails or rounds, 
thus skipping several rounds or 
spaces. 



LESSON 5. 
Position side^ways facing inward at one end of the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position on 

one of the rails and swing the 
body sideways, raising right and 
left hand quickly when swing- 
ing to the corresponding sides. 

2 As Exercise 1, raising both 

hands simultaneously and return 
quickly, at each sideways move- 
ment of the body. 
8 As Exercise 1, travel sideways from 
one end of the ladder to the 
other, both hands advancing al- 
ternately in the same direction. 

4 As Exercise 1, reversing the hold 

of the hands alternately when 
swinging sideways. 

5 As Exercise 1, alternately crossing 

one arm over the other and re- 
turn . 

6 As Exercise 4, at the same time 



travelling from one end of the 
ladder to the other. 

7 As Exercise 5, and travel from one 

end of the ladder to the other. 

8 As Exercise 2, and advance both 

hands simultaneously, travelling 
from one end of the ladder to the 
other. 

9 As Exercise 3, with the hands on 

the rounds, both hands advan- 
cing alternately in the same 
direction. 

10 As Exercise (3, with the hands on 

the rounds, and change from 
palms inward to palms outward, 
when advancing. 

11 As Exercise 7, with both hands 

on the rounds. 

12 As Exercise 8, both hands moving 

simultaneously on the rounds. 



232 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



LESSON 6. 
Position underneath and at one end, facing the ladder. 



Jump into the hanging position, 

tlie hands on the sides, the pahns 

inward. 

a. 1st movement: Advance the 

right hand one space, and raise 

the right knee forward to a 

right angle (Fig. 211). 




Fig. 211. 

2d movement: Advance the left 
hand to the same space, and 
straighten the leg downward. 

h. The same movement, but with 
the left leg and left hand. 
Continue alternately to the 
end of the ladder. 

Hanging position, the hands on one 
round, the palms forward. 

a. 1st movement: Advance the 
right hand to the next round, 
and raise the right leg forward 
horizontallv. 



2d movement: Advance the left 
hand to the same round, and 
lower the leg. 
b. As «, but with the left leg and 
left hand. Continue. 

3 As Exercise 1, with the palms out- 

ward. Raise the feet backward, 
bending the leg to a right angle. 
Continue. 

4 As Exercise 2, with the palms back- 

ward, liaise the legs sideways, 
and return alternately. Con- 
tinue. 

5 1st movement: As in Exercise 1. 
2d movement: pass the left hand 

to the next round, straighten the 
right leg, at the same time rais- 
ing the left knee. Continue. 

6 1st movement: As in Exercise 2. 
2d movement: pass the left hand 

to the next ronnd, and lower the 
right leg, at the same time i-aise 
the left leg forward. Continue. 

7 1st movement : As in Exercise 3. 
2d movement : pass the left hand to 

the next space, lower the right 
foot, at the same time raise 
the left one backward. Con- 
tinue. 

8 1st movement : As in Exercise 4. 
2d movement: pass the left hand 

to the next round and lower the 
right leg, at the same time raise 
the left leg sideways. 
9-16 As Exercises 1-8, beginning 
from the hanging position at one 
end of the ladder, the back turned 
towards the ladder. All move- 
ments of the legs, however, re- 
main as in the previous exer- 
cises. 



HORIZONTA L LABBER 



233 



LESSON 7. 



Position underneath and at one end of the ladder, facing it. 



Jump into the hanging position on 
the rails, the palms inward. Hop 
forward and bacJiward on both 
hands (the hands move simul- 
taneously forward to the next 
space), and raise both knees 
forward to right angles on the 
first movement of the hands, 
straighten the legs on the second. 
Continue. 

As Exercise 1, with the hands on 
one round, the palms forward, and 
raise both legs forward to a hori- 
zontal position on the first move- 
ment, lower the legs on the 
second. Continue. 

As Exercise 1, with the hands on 
the rails, the palms outward, on 
the first moveuient raise both feet 
backward, bending the knees to 
right angles. 

2d movement: Straighten the legs 
downward. Continue. 

As Exercise 2, with the palms back- 
ward. 

On the first movemeut bend both 
feet upward (the legs remain 
extended). 

On the second movement straighten 
the feet. Continue. 



5 As Exercise 1, with one hand on 

one rail, the palm inward, the 
other on one round, the palm 
forward, hop fore and backward 
in this position. 

On the first movement spread the 
legs sideways to a straddle posi- 
tion. 

On the second movement close the 
legs, 

6 As Exercise 5, with one hand on 

one rail, the palm outward, the 
other on one round, the palm 
backward. Hop fore and back- 
ward. 

On the first movement spread the 
legs to a cross straddle position, 
one leg forward, the other back- 
ward. 

On the second position close the 
legs. 
7-12 As Exercises 1-6, the holds and 
positions of the hands as well as 
the hopping movement fore and 
backward are executed the same 
as in the previous exercises, but 
the legs are to be raised and kept 
in one of the positions indicated 
in the first movement of the first 
six exercises. 



LESSON 8. 



Position side-ways, facing invrard. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 
both hands on one rail, the palms 
forward. 
1st movement: Bend the arms 
slowly to right angles, and raise 
the legs forward to a horizontal 
position. 



2d movement : Straighten the arms 

and lower the legs. Repeat. 
As Exercise 1, but in the first move- 
' ment straighten the right arm 
sideways, the hand on the rail, 
and raise the right leg side- 
ways. 



234 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



2d movement : Back to position, and 
the same with the opposite limbs. 
Eepeat. 

Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 
cross the limbs of one side over 
those of the opposite sides, and 
return to position. Repeat. 




Fig. 212. 

Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 
then bend the arms and reverse 
the hold with both hands simul- 
taneously. At the same time raise 
the knees forward to right angles. 
Return to the starting position. 

Hanging position as in Exercise 1. 
Bend the arms to right angles, 
and — 

a. Raise the right elbow over the 

right rail, and raise the right 
foot backward ; 

b. As «, but with the left arm and 

left foot ; 

c. As a, but exercising both arms 

and feet simultaneously (Fig. 
212). (Underarm hang.) 



6 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 

bend the arms, and — 

a. Straighten the right arm over 

the upper side of the ladder, 
raising the right leg forward 
horizontally, and return to 
position; 

b. As a, but with the left arm and 

the left leg ; 

c. As «, but with both arms and 

legs simultaneously. 

7 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 

bend the arms and swing the 
body fore and backward. At 
the end of the backswing move 
both arms to the elbows over the 
rail of the ladder, and return to 
the previous position at the next 
backward movement. 

8 As Exercise 7, moving the entire 

arms over the upper side of the 
ladder. (Upperarm hang. ) 

9 As Exercise 7, but at the end of 

the backswing slide both hands 
sideways outward to the farthest 
reach, return at the next back- 
ward movement. 

10 As Exercise 9, crossing the arms 

sinuiltaneously. 

11 As Exercise 7, but at the end of 

the backswing, hop with both 
hands toward one side ; con- 
tinue from one end of the ladder 
to the other. 

12 As Exercise 11, with one hand 

on one rail, the other on one 
round. 



LESSON 9. 
Position underneath and in the middle of the ladder. 

a. Raise the right hand quickly 
and return ; 

b. Raise the left hand quickly and 



Jump into the hanging position, 
the hands on the sides, the palms 
inward. Turn the body over 
backward into the hanging posi- 
tion backward, and — 



return ; 



HORIZONTAL LADDER 



235 



c. Raise both hands quickly and 
return. 

As Exercise 1, but in the hanging 
position backward : — 

a. Spread the legs to the side-strad- 
dle position and return ; 

6. Spread the legs to the cross- 
straddle position (one leg for- 
ward, the other backward), 
and return ; 

c. Raise and straighten the knees. 

d. Raise the feet backward, bend- 

ing the knees, and return. 
Jump into the hanging position 
sideways at one end and facing 
outward, both hands on one 
rail, the palms backward. Turn 
the body over backward half- 
ways into the reversed hanging 
position. Straighten the legs up- 
ward and travel sideways to the 
opposite end of the ladder, the 
hands move alternately. 




Fig. 213. 

4 As Exercise 3, facing inward turn 
the body over completely into 
the hanging position backward 

(Fig. 213). 



As Exercise 4, but after taking the 
reversed hanging position, bend 
the arms and raise the body up- 
M-ard onto the upper side of the 
ladder (Fig. 214). Jump down 
forward. 




Fig. 214. 

As Exercise 5, then change the 
holds of both hands to palms 
backward on one side, and 
slowly roll over backward into 
the hanging position backward ; 
then turn the body over forward 
into the hanging i^osition for- 
ward. 

7 Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on both rails, the 
palms inward. Turn the body 
over backward halfways, 
straighten the legs through the 
space between the two rounds, 
bend the arms, and wind the 
body through the space, coming 
into the front leaningrest. Re- 
turn, reversing the movements. 

8 As Exercise 7, winding through 

one space to the upper side of 
the ladder, coming into the rear 
leaningrest. Walk in the direc- 



236 



GERMAX-AMURICAN G YMNA S TICS 



tion of the head or feet in this 
position, and at the end of the 
ladder jump down sideways. 
9 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 
turn the body over backward, 
placing both feet on one round 
behind the body, straighten the 
body and extremities. Return. 
10 Position as in Exercise 9, and 
' lower — 
a. The right foot and return ; 



h. The left foot and return ; 

c. Bend and straighten both arms. 

11 Position as in Exercise 9, and 

travel in the direction of the 
head, feet and arms moving 
alternately, one hand and foot 
leading. 

12 As Exercise 11, travelling in the 

direction of the feet, both hands 
movins: simultaneouslv. 



LESSON 10. 
Position underneath the ladder. 



Jump into the hanging position, 
the hands on the rails, the palms 
inward. Eaise the body and the 
legs to a horizontal position for- 
ward (frontlever) and try to hold 
it for some time (Fig. 215). 




Fig. 215. 

2 As Exercise 1, with both hands on 

one of the rails. 

3 As Exercise 1, with both hands on 

one round. 

4, 5, and G As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, 
but turn the body over backward, 
and straighten it into a horizontal 
position backward: the head, 
body, and the legs in the same 
plane (rearlever). Hold the posi- 
tion for some time, then bend the 
knees and turn the body forward 
into the hanging position. 

7 Turn tlie body over backward into 
the rearlever, then lower the body 



slowly downward without bend- 
ing the legs. Return in the re- 
verse order. 

8 Frontlever, then turn the body 

over into the rearlever, and re- 
turn. Repeat. 

9 Hanging position, both hands on 

one round. Turn the body over 
backward half ways, spreading 
the legs to a sidestraddle posi- 
tion, and travel forward and 
backward, the hands moving 
alternately. 

10 Frontlever, the hands on the rails 

or on one round, travel in the 
direction of the head or the feet, 
the hands moving alternately. 

11 As Exercise 10, but in the rear- 

lever. 

12 From the position sideways, facing 

outward, frontlever, the hands 
on one of the rails, the palms 
backAvard. Hold the body and 
the legs extended, and slowly 
turn into the reversed hanging 
position, the head downward. 
Then bend the arms and turn 
the body over backward into the 
front leaningrest on top. Front- 
vault. 



HORIZONTAL LADDER 



237 



LESSON 11. 
Position underneath the ladder. 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on one round, the 
palms forward. Quickly turn 
(hop) left or right about. 

2 As Exercise 1, with both hands on 

the rails instead of on one round. 

3 As Exercise 1, but while turning 

jump to the next round. 

4 As Exercise 2, but while turning 

move the hands to the next 
space. 

5 As Exercise 1, with the body swing- 

ing forward and backward, the 
turning at the end of the fore- 
swing. 

6 As Exercise 5, with the hands on 

both rails, and the turning at the 
end of the backs wing. 



7 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, 

catch hold of one wrist, bend 
and straighten the arm re- 
peatedly. 

8 As Exercise 7, hopping from one 

round to another, forward and 
backward. 

9 As Exercise 7, placing one hand 

on the hip. 

10 As Exercise 9, and raise both legs 
to a horizontal position. 

12 As Exercise 11, and turn around 
on one hand as far as possible, 
and return. Change the hands, 
and repeat with the other arm. 



LESSON 12. 
Position underneath the ladder 



1 Jump into the hanging position, 

the hands on both rails or one 
round. Swing the body forward 
and backward, and at the end 
of each forward movement raise 
botli knees and hop forward. 

2 As Exercise 1, hopping forward at 

the end of the backswing, at the 
same time bending and straight- 
ening the knees. 

3 As Exercise 1, hopping forward in 

the fore and backswing, bending 

and straightening the knees with 

every advance. 
4, 5, and 6 As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, 

omitting one round or space when 

advancing. 
7 As Exercise 1, but at the end of 

the forward movement turn the 

body over backward into the 



rear hanging j^osition, and con- 
tinue swinging. Return and 
repeat. 

8 As Exercise 7, but after turning 

over backward, return at once 
into the front hanging position 
and continue swinging. Eepeat. 

9 As Exercise 7, but from the rear 

hanging position let go with 
one hand and execute a whole 
turn around one arm, taking 
hold again with the hand. Re- 
peat the same, but turn around 
the other arm. 
10 As Exercise 7, beginning from the 
hanging position, both hands on 
one rail, the palms backward, 
facing the ladder. After turn- 
ing the body over halfway, 
immediately pull the body up- 



•238 



GERM A N- AM ERIC A N G YMXA S TICS 



ward over the upper side of 
the ladder into a sitting position, 
then roll over backward and 
jump down backward, quickly 
letting go. 

11 As Exercise 10, but from a sitting 

position on the ladder change 
to the rear leaningrest. Bend 
the arms and slowly lower the 
body backward into a rearlever 
underneath the ladder. Jump 
to the floor. 

12 As Exercise 11, but from the rear 

leaningrest, bend the arms, 
transfer the weight of the body 



onto one hand, letting go with 
the other, and turn around the 
supporting arm. Take hold 
again with the other hand, 
which now carries the weight of 
the body and around which the 
body executes one half turn 
backward, the free hand swing- 
ing backward, taking the same 
hold as in the original position. 
Continue the turning forward 
and backward from one end of 
the ladder to the other. Rear- 
vault. 



SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON INCLINED LADDERS 239 



SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON POUR 
INCLINED LADDERS 

(" Gemeinuebung-en ") 
Bv DR. KARL ZAPP 

These exercises are to be performed by a class of girls 
from thirteen to sixteen years of age. On each of the ladders 
three girls perform simultaneously. In going up the ladder, 
the first girl starts, the second follows after four counts, and 
the third ditto ; 'all of them reaching the starting position 
in sixteen counts. 

GROUP L 
Exercises in the leaning position. 

1 Mount on the upper 

side, and assume 
the leaning posi- 
tion (Fig. 216). 
Raise the left and 
right leg alternate- 
ly, IG counts ; turn 
over on the under 
side of the ladder 
into position in 4 
counts ; then Nos. 2 and 3 jump 
down ; No. 1 moves downward 
4 counts and alights ; all return 
to their places while the next set 
marches up. 

2 Raise the left and right arm alter- 

nately. 

S Raise one arm and one leg alter- 
nately. 

4 Raise one arm and one leg (oppo- 
site) simultaneously. 




Fig, 216. 



240 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



GROUP II. 
Exercises in the hanging position. 

Mount on the lower side (using the hands and the feet), 
then let go the feet, and assume a hanging position on the sides 
or rounds. 



1 Raise the right and left knee aher- 

nately, then both, 10 counts, and 
repeat. 

2 Raise the leg sideways and move 

crosswise, left and right. 

16 cotmts. 



3 Raise the leg forward, move back- 

ward left and right. 16 counts, 

4 Raise both knees, then straighten 

the left leg forward and the right 
leg backward, etc. 16 counts. 



N. B. — After each of these exercises, the girls return to 
the class and the next twelve take their places. 

GROUP III. 
Standing on the ladders. 

Mount on the ladder ad libitum^ and stand in the sidestancl, 
one foot two rounds higher than the other. 



1 Hands on shoulders ; straighten 

arms outward, and reverse. 

16 counts. 
Then turn over on the lower side, 
and jmnp down as in Group I. 

2 Hands on shoulders ; move them 

upward, forming an arch over the 
head, etc. 16 counts. 



3 Raise the arms outward, move them 

upward, forming an arcli over the 
head. 16 counts. 

4 Raise the arms to the left, move 

them npward, then sideways 
right, then down. 16 counts. 



These exercises may also he executed in the crossstand 
(back or face toward the ladder). 



GROUP IV. 

Hanging position. 

Mount on the upper side and turn over ; or mount on the 
lower side. 



SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON INCLINED LADDERS 241 



Ilang on the rounds in the side or 
crosshang, twist the body left and 
riglit. 10 counts. 

This can also be combined with leg 
exercises. 

Hang by one hand and place the 
left or the right hand on the 
shoulder or hip, or raise the arm 
outward. 16 counts. 



Hang by one hand, and raise the 
arm sideways, place the hand on 
the shoulder, then sideways, and 
return. 16 counts. 

Hang by one hand, and turn the 
body; resume the hold. 

10 counts. 



GKOUP Y. 
Hangstand on the lov/er side. 

]\Ioiint as stated before, Init let the feet remain on the 
rounds. 



1 Draw the body (chest) up towards 

the ladder four times. 

2 With arms bent, change grip, or let 

go and straighten one arm side- 
ways. 



;> With arms bent, straighten one arm 
and move one leg outward sim- 
ultaneously. 

4 Let go with one hand and turn the 
body (hangstand sideways). 



G Pv U P V I. 



Miscellaneous exercises. 



Sitting on one rail (hands behind), 

swing the legs over to the other 

rail. 

Eear leaning position, move the 

left leg and right arm outward 

simultaneously ; move the arm 

overhead and cross the leg in 

front of the right (knee bent), 

and reverse. 



Hang by the knees, lower the body 
with extension of arms; raise the 
body, and take hold again. 

In hangstand; change position of 
the hands (grip) simultane- 
ously — 

a. On the rounds ; 

I). On the rails ; 

c*. From the rounds to the rails, and 
reverse. 



242 



GERMAJSr-AMERICA X G YMNA S TICS 



RINGS 



Bv Du. CARL ZIEGLER 



Springing. 
The rings must be witliin easy reach. 



Grasp the rings, walk backward as 
far as possible, then run for- 
ward and swing backward sev- 
eral times. Jump off with the 
backswinsf. 




Fig. 217. 

The same as Exercise 1, but run 
backward and swing forward. 

Combine Exercises 1 and 2, i.e., 
run both forward and backward. 

As Exercise 1, and with the fore- 



swing face about. Turn back 
into the original position at the 
finish of the swing. 

5 The same as Exercise 4, executing 

a whole turn. This should not 
be attempted luitil the foregoing 
exercises have been successfully 
performed. 

6 Run backward, and turn at the 

end of the backswing. 

7 As Exercise 1, with bending the 

arms at the finish of the fore- 
swing (Fig. 217), at the finish 
of the backswing straighten the 
arms (sinking down slowly). 

8 As Exercise 2, and bend the arms 

at the end of the backswing ; 
straighten the arms at the end 
of the foreswing. 

9 As Exercise 7 or 8, swinging back 

and forth several times in the 
bent arm position. 
10 Combine Exercises 7 and 8. At 
the finish of the foreswing bend 
and straighten the arms quickly, 
then take several steps and bend 
and straighten the arms again, 
etc. 



RINGS 



243 



Note. — After having mastered the foregoing exercises thor- 
oughly, try tlieni with the rings raised out of reach, i.e., so 
that you must jump for them and have some one swing you or 
give you "a start." 

II 

Without Swinging. 
The rings must be as high as the shoulders. 



1 Grasp the rings, then allow the body 

to drop backward slowly into the 
fronthangstand (Fig. 218). 
Note. — The arms should be parallel, 
the body straight and inclined 
backward from the feet, which 
should be planted firmly upon 
the floor, the chest should be 
well forward, the head in a line 
with the body. 

2 As Exercise 1, then raise the left 

leg forward and upward (the leg 
perfectly straight). 

3 As Exercise 1, then raise the left 

knee. (The thigh and the body 
form a right angle, the thigh and 
leg also.) 

4 Step forward and sink into the front- 

hangstand, then execute a half 
turn over backward, both legs 
bent, into the inverted squathang 
(Fig. 219). 
Note. — To turn over backward, jump 
off lightly with both feet and 
throw them quickly upward; at 
the same time bend both knees, 
drawing them up closely to the 
body. 

5 As Exercise 4, then straighten the 

body upward into the inverted 
hang. (See Fig. 109.) Let the 
feet touch the ropes at first ; later 
have the legs and the feet together. 



6 As Exercise 4, then place the feet 
within the rings and turn the 
body over backward and down- 
ward (retaining the hold with 
the hands and the feet) into the 
nest. 




Fig. 218. 

7 As Exercise 6, then straighten the 

left leg backward (remove the 
foot from the rings and replace 
after a short pause). 

8 As Exercise 6, then straighten the 

left arm forward. (Let go of 
the rines and straighten the 



244 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



10 



arm, then grasp the ring again 
after a short pause.) 

Combine Exercises 7 and 8 
^(straighten the left arm and 
riglit leg, or the right arm and 
left leg) (Fig. 220). 

As Exercise 4, then pass the feet 
through the rings into the knee- 
hang ; the hands remain, i.e., do 
not give up their hold. 



11 



12 



As Exercise 10, then let go with 
the hands, straighten the back 
and fold the arms — kneehang 
(See Fig. 117). 

As Exercise 4, then continue the 
turn backward and straighten 
the legs downward into the 
hangstand backward (See Fig. 
131). 



Note. — After executing an exercise, always return to the 
original or starting position in the reverse order. 





F/g. 219. 



Fig 220. 



Ill 



"Without S-winging. 
The rings must be as high as the shoulders. 



1 Stand directly between and under 
the rings, grasping them. Al- 
low the body to sink backward 
slowly into the fronthang- 
stand (Fig. 218). 
Bend and straighten the arms 
rapidly. 



2 As Exercise 1, sinking forward 

slowly into the rearhangstand 
(the arms above the head) (Fig. 

221). 

3 As Exercise 1, but sinking side- 

ways left (Fig. 222). 



RINGS 



245 



4 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, chan- 

ging from one to tlie other 
throiigli the upright position. 

5 As Exercise 4, sideways left and 

right alternately, 

6 As Exercise 2, then change to po- 

sition forward by describing a half 
circle to the left passing through 



the position sideways. Reverse 
into the first position. 
7 As Exercise 2, then change to po- 
sition sideways left, then forward 
and sideways right again to the 
first position. Circle from left to 
right, or from right to left. 





Fig. 221. 



Fig. 222. 



IV 



Swinging the legs and the body. 



The rings must be stationary. 
1 Jump into the ordinary hang. 
Swing the legs forward and back- 
ward — shortswing (Fig. 223, « 
and b). 

Note. — When swinging the legs for- 
ward the thiglis are flexed upon 
the body, but the legs remain ex- 



tended. The legs can thus grad- 
ually be raised until the feet touch 
the ropes. This exercise (the 
shortswing) can be used as a pre- 
liminary movement to the exer- 
cises of the second group and 
other kindred exercises, wlien the 
rings are above reaching distance. 
When swinging the legs back- 
ward keep them straight, throw 



246 



GERM A N-A ME RICA N G YMNA S TICS 





Fig. 223 a. 



Fig. 223 b. 



the cliest forward, with head 

erect. 
As Exercise 1, swinging sideways 

left and right. 
Swing the legs in a circle from left 

to right, or from right to left 

(Fig. 224). 



Note. — The upper part of the body- 
moves very little, while the hips 
and the legs describe the circle. 
The ropes must not twist. Begin 
and stop gradually. 




Fij. 224. 



Fig. 225. 



B 

The rings must be within easy 
reach. 
4 Pass the arms through the rings 

into the elbowhang, then repeat 

Exercises 1, 2, and 3. 



The rings must be as high as the 

head. 

5 Pass the arms through the rings 
into the shoulderhang, then re- 
peat Exercises 1, 2, and 3 (Fig. 
225). 



RINGS 



24:1 



Note. — In the last exercises the rings should be under 
the shoulders ; the arms may be either straight or down at the 
sides, or the hands may hold on to the rings, or the i)upil 
may grasp hands backward, the latter being the most difficult. 



y 



S"winging 

The rings must be Avithin easy reach. 



1 Grasp the rings with the ordinary 
hold. Step backward, run for- 
ward, and at the end of the fore- 
swing turn over backwards into 



the inverted sqiiathang, as in the 
Second Group (Fig. 219 j. 
2 Exercise in the same manner the 
movements of the Second Lesson. 



Note. — By gradually raising the rings, these exercises- 
become more difficult. 



VI 
Without sw^inging. 
The rings must be at jumping distance. 



1 Jump into the hang with the ordi- 

nary hold. Raise both legs for- 
Avard. 
Note. — In this and all of the fol- 
lowing exercises, the legs should 
be raised perfectly straight, the 
knees and the feet together. 

2 As Exercise 1, continuing the rais- 

ing until the feet are as high as 
the rings. 

3 As Exercise 2, then straighten up- 

ward into the inverted hanging 
position; lower the body forward 
slowly without flexing the thigh. 

4 As Exercise 3, lowering the body 

backward into the rearhang ; 
then flex the thighs and turn 
over forward. 



5 As Exercise 4, stopping when the 

body has reached the horizontal 
position backward — rearlever 
( Fig. 226). Then sink lower into 
the hang, and jump off. 

6 As Exercise 5, turning over forward 

again from the rearhang as in 
the Fourth Exercise. 

7 As Exercise 6, in the rearhang 

•twisting the shoulders and so 
I'egain the original position. 
Note. — This exercise, called the 
shouldertwist, is rather difficult 
to describe. The body gives a 
slight jerk upward, the arms are 
spread sideways, and the head 
of the humerus of each arm turns 
completely around in its socket. 



248 



GER^fAJV-A^lEIiICAX G YM^A S TICS 



8 As Exercise 5, from the rear lever 

raise tlie straight body into tlie 
inverted hang, then lower slowly 
forward. 

9 As Exercise 2, then straigliten 

the body backward into tlie lear 
lever. Jump off. 
10 As Exercise 9, then bend tlie 
knees and turn over foruard into 
tlie inverted sqitathang, then 



straighten the left leg upward, 
and lower the body forward into 
the frontlever. Sink into the 
hang, and jump off. 

1 1 As Exercise 3, then lower the body 

forward into the frontlever. 

12 As Exercise 9, then from the rear- 

lever raise into the inverted 
hang and lower into the front- 
lever. 





Fig. 226. 



Fig. 227. 



YII 



"Without sw^inging. 
Tlie rings must be within jumping distance. 



1 Grasp with the ordinary hold. Tuin 

over backward into the inverted 
hang with bent hips ; then move 
the left leg outward, and cross 
and bend it over the left wrist 
(Fig. 227). 
XoTE. — The left leg lies upon the 
left wrist, the right leg and the 
body are in a horizontal position. 

2 As Exercise 1, placing the right leg 

upon the left wrist. 
\j As Exercise 1, as the left leg touches 
the arm. the left hand I'eleases 



its liold and allows the leg to 
pass between it and the ring, 
then resumes its hold — left 
hand cutoff. 

4 As Exercise 2, releasing the hold 

as ill Exercise 3. 

5 As Exercise 1, straddling and re- 

leasing both the rings, and jump- 
ing into the stand under the 
rings — double cutoff. ( Throw 
the body well forward the mo- 
ment you let go.) 



Note. — The foregoing- 
while swinging. 



exercises may also he executed 



RINGS 



249 



YIII 
Without swinging. 
The rings must be within easy reach or jumping reach. 

1 Grasp with the ordinary hold. 

Raise the legs forward and up- 
ward, at the same time bending 
the arms, and turn over baclv- 
ward into the resting position in 
the rings (Fig. 228). 

2 As Exercise 1, then bend the arms 

to the bent arm rest. 

3 As Exercise 2, then sink backward 

Into the hanging position. 

4 Bend tlie arms until the shoulders 

are on a level w'itli tlie hands, 
then turn the hands forward and 
' straigliten the arms, pushing tlie 
body upwards into the resting 
position — pushup. 

5 As Exercise 4, then roll over for- 

ward into the hang. 

() As Exercise 1, then turn over for- 
ward into the bent arm handstand 
in the rings, the feet around the 
I'opes. Fig, 228. 

7 As Exercise 4, then turn forward 

into the handstand in the rings, 8 As Exercise 
the feet against the ropes (F'ig. without the 

229). ropes. 



Fig. 229. 

7, the handstand 
feet touchinsr the 



Note. — Although very difficult, the foregoing exercises 
may be performed with swinging. 



250 



GERM A N- AMEBIC AN G YMNA S TICS 



VERTICAL, POLES 



By W-M. KOPP 



Climbing. 

On one pole, Avith the help of the hands and the feet. 
Position of attention, facing the pole. 

with the right ; Hft the left foot 
from the ground, and place it 
against the right si<le of the pole, 
the knee on the left side ; lift the 
right foot, and place it in front of 
the pole, the ankles crossing, the 
outside edge of the feet together, 
the pole between them (Fig. 230) 
— climbing position. 
I Eaise the right hand to the reach, 
and grasp the pole, the left fol- 
lowing ; draw up the legs with- 
out moving them from the pole, 
and without bending the arms, 
tighten the hold of the feet when 
elevated (Fig. 231), then straight- 
en the legs and the trunk. Re- 
peat, thereby gradually climbing 
upward. Then descend in the re- 
versed order. The teacher should 
Fig. 230. Fig. 231. not permit any sliding down. 

3 As Exercise 1, beginning with the 
right hand, and the position of the 
feet reversed. 




1 Raise 
and 



the left hand to 
grasp the pole. 



the reach 
followin<r 



IT 
Hand over hand climbing. 



As in the First Exercise of Les- 
son I. 



2 Raise the right hand to the reach, 
and grasp the pole, raise the legs 



VERTICAL POLES 



251 



to the climbing position without 
bending the right arm, straighten 
the legs and the trunk. Kepeat, 
raising the left hand to the reach. 
Descend in the reversed order. 



3 As Exercise 2, grasping upward 
with both hands at the same 
time. 



With the hands only (Handci.imbing). 



4 a. Raise the right hand to the 

reach, and grasp the pole, the 
left following, bending the 
arms, thereby lifting both feet 
from the ground, the legs to- 
gether and straight, the toes 
pointing downward (Fig. 232). 
h. Raise the right hand to the 
reach and grasp the pole, the 
left hand following. Repeat. 
Descend in the reversed order. 

5 As Exercise 4, the left hand lead- 

ing. 

6 As Exercise 4, hand over hand. 

7 As Exercise 4, with the body to 

the right of the pole, the left 
side slightly touching it, the legs 
together, straight and slanting to 
the front, the toes pointed in the 
same direction (Fig. 233). 

8 As Exercises 4, 5, and G, with leg 

movements, such as side or cross- 
straddle, raising the knees and 
heels, crossing the legs. 




Fig. 232. 



Fig. 233. 



9 As Exercise 8, changing the posi- 
tion of the legs after a certain 
number of steps. 



Ill 
Climbing on t-wo stationary poles with help of the hands and feet. 
Stand between the poles. 



1 a. Raise the right hand to the 
reach, and grasp the right 
pole, the left following on 
the left pole, bend the arms 
and raise the legs to the ordi- 
nary climbing position on the 
right pole (Fig. 234). 



h. Raise the right hand to the 
reach, follow with the left, 
and raise the body. Repeat. 
As Exercise 1, the left hand lead- 
ing, and the feet in the climbing 
position on the left pole. 
Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 



252 



GERM A N-AMERICAN G VMNA 6 TICS 





As Exercise 1, pressing tlie legs 
against the poles from the inside 
(the feet on the outside) (Fig. 
235). 

As Exercise 1, pressing the legs 
against the j^oles from the out- 
side (the feet on the inside). 

As Exercises 4 and 5, with both 
hands simultaneously, but one 
leg after the other. 

As Exercises 4 and 5, with one 
hand after the other, but both 

. legs simultaneously. 

As Exercises 4 and 5, with both 
hands and both legs simultane- 
ously. 



Fig. 235. 



Fig. 234 



IV 



Climbing on tvfro stationary poles -without the help of the feet. 



a. Raise the right hand to the 
reach, and grasp the right 
pole, the left following on 
the left pole ; bend the arms, 
the body in a line with the 
poles. Repeat. In descend- 
ing, reverse the order. 
As Exercise 1, the left hand lead- 
ing. 
Climb up and downward, the hands 

grasping alternately. 
As Exercises 1, 2, and ;>, with the 
following leg movements : — 



a. Cross or sidestraddle. 

b. One or both knees raised. 

c. One or both heels raised. 

d. One or both legs raised forward. 

e. Raising and then straightening 

the knees. 
/. Raising the heels and then 

straightening the legs, etc. 
Travel from one pole to the next, 
gradually climbing upward at the 
same time. Hop down on one, or 
two poles. 



Y 
S^vinging vertical poles. 



Repeat the above climbing exer- 
cises while swinging. 

Repeat the above climbing exer- 
cises on two poles wiiile swinging. 

a. Climb from one pole to the next. 

h. Climb obliquely upward and 
downward along the line of j)oles. 



The climbing from one pole to the 
next is done in the following 
manner : — 

From the climbing position on one 
pole, one hand grasps the next 
pole, then the legs go over and 
lastly the other hand follows. 



VERTICAL POLES 253 

VI 
Slanting poles. 

Most of the exercises on the vertical poles can be practised 
on the slanting poles, but the climbing exercises on the upper 
side are a little more difficult. The climbing can also be varied 
by changing from the lower to the upper side, or by circling 
around a pole. Many exercises of the inclined ladders may also 
be practised here. 



254 



GEBMAN-A MEIUCA N G YMNA S TICS 



SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON 
SV7INGING POLES 

For boys or girls 11 to 13 years of age 
Bv DR. KARL ZAPP 

Have as many children exercise simultaneously as there 
are spaces between the poles. 

GROUP I. 
Hangstand. Leg exercises. 

In the hangstand the feet are flat on the floor, the body 
straight, the head erect, the chest active. The smaller boys or 




Fig. 236. 



girls may stand alternately with the larger ones, and take hold 
below the hands of the latter (Fig. 236). 



SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON SWINGING POLES 255 



1 Move the left and the right leg 

alternately outwartl and cross- 
wise. 8 counts. 

2 Raise the left and the right leg up- 

ward. 8 counts. 

3 Raise the left knee, 1 ; extend tlie 



leg, 2; reverse, 3, 4. The same 
right, 8 counts. 

4 Raise the left leg, 1 ; bend the knee, 
2; extend, 3; lower, 4. The same 
right. 8 counts. 



G R GUP 1 1. 
Hangstand. Arm, leg, and trunk exercises. 



1 Lower the grasp of one hand, also 

give up the grasp of one hand. 

8 counts. 

2 Move the head in different direc- 

tions (8 counts), also roll the 

head. 8 counts. 

'■>\ Turn the body sideways. (If all 



turn in the same direction, they 
effect a swaying movement. ) 

8 counts. 

4 Change from the front hangstand 

to the rear hangstand, four times. 

(Face toward the floor, the body 

well extended. ) 8 counts. 



G R G U P III. 
Swinging on tvro poles 

Each pupil takes hold of two poles, goes back about three 
steps, and then, upon command, runs forward, the hands glid- 
ing upward ; with the first 
step he jumps up, and grasp- 
ing the poles firmly, he swings 
himself backward and forward 
two or three times, jumping 
down upon command. 

1 Run and swing. 6 counts. 

2 Run and swing and flex the 

knees upward. 6 counts. 

.'> Run and swing and flex the legs 

upward. 6 counts. 

4 Run and swing with bent arms 

(Fig. 237). 6 counts. 

5 Run and swing with bent arms 

continually swinging the legs 
forward and backward (short- 
swing). 




256 



G Eli MA N-A M ERICA X G YMNA S TICS 



GROUP IV. 



Exercises on one pole. 



1 Hang in the climbing position. 

8 counts. 

2 Hang in tlie climbing position, and 

change the position of the legs. 

8 counts. 

3 Hang in the climbing position, and 

extend left or right leg sideways. 

8 counts. 

4 Hang in the climbing position, and 



extend right or left arms, side- 
ways. 8 counts. 

5 Hang in the climbing position, and 

extend arm and leg sideways al- 
ternately. 8 counts. 

6 Climbing. 

7 Wander-climbing (from pole to 

pole). 

8 Climbing on the swinging pole. 



i 



i 



B UCK 



257 



BUCK 



By WM. a. STECHER 



All exercises begin with a run. 

The word lengthwise, or crosswise, before a lesson, means 
that the buck is to stand with its length either in line with 
the run, or at right angles thereto. 



LengthiArise. 



1 Jump into the freerest (see Fig. 

155), then: — 
a. Sidestraddle. 
h. Crossstradle. 

c. Kaise the heels (Fig. 238). 

d. Raise the knees; 

e. Cross the legs. 

(See that the legs are closed, and 
the body in good position before 
landing on the board.) 

2 Jump into the ridingseat; dismount 

left backward with a quarter turn 
left, and immediately jump into 
the ridingseat again; dismount 
right backward. 

3 Jump into the ridingseat; swing 

the legs backward several times; 
straddleolf forward. 

4 As in Exercise 3, swing the legs 

backward into the leaningrest 
(see Fig. 160) ; straddleoff for- 
ward. 

5 Straddlevault forward. 

6 Straddlevault forward as a farjump, 



gradually moving the board away 
from the buck. 
7 Straddlevault forward as a high- 
jump, gradually raising the buck 
higher. 




Fig. 238. 



258 



GERM A N-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



II 



Crosswise. 



Jump into the freerest; repeat as 
soon as landing on the board. 

As in Exercise 1, with the leg move- 
ments as in the first lesson. 

As in exercise 1, then kneel on the 
buck. Straighten up, then knee- 
jump:— 



a. Backward. 

b. Sideways. 

c. Forwai-d. 

(Swing the arms in the direction of 

the jump. ) 
As Exercise 3; with one quarter or 

one half turn right or left. 




Fig. 239. 



Ill 



Lengthwise. 



1 Jump, raising the knees well up- 

ward, into a squatting position 
on the buck (help); straighten 
the legs backward, and jump 
down. 

2 As Exercise 1, then straighten the 

body upward (standing on the 



buck); jump off sideways or for- 
ward. 

As in Exercise 2, swinging one leg 
well sideways or forward when 
jumping off. 

As in Exercise 8, with one quarter 
or one half turn. 



JB UCK 



259 



5 Straddlevault forward over a rope 7 As in Exercise 6, as a farjuiiip, 



iS 



and a buck. The rope on tlie 
jumping-stand lies between the 
board and the buck; high strad- 
dlevault (Fig. 239). After each 
jump the rope is raised. 
As in Exercise 5, the rope being 
stretched beyond the buck. 



gradually moving the rope away. 
8 As in Exercise 5; gradually mov- 
ing the board, or board and rope, 
farther from the buck — farstrad- 
dlejump. 



The board may also be moved and the rope raised, thereby 
increasing the difficulty still more. 



Stridemount right (see Fig. 156); 
swing the legs backward, and 
pushoff backward. 

As in Exercise 1 ; shears left back- 
ward ; dismount left sideways. 

Flankvault right (see Fig. 140). 



IV 
Crossw^ise. 
4 



Wolfs vajiilt left (see Fig. 151). 
5 Squattingvauit (help), 
fi F'rontvault right, also with one 

quarter or one half turn left. 
7 Rearvault left, also with one 

quarter or one half turn right. 



V 

Crosswise. 



1 Jump with a quarter turn left into 

the seat on the buck (the right 
leg forward, the left backward), 
raise the body up, resting on the 
hands (Fig. 240), and swing the 
legs left and right sideways sev- 
eral times; when swinging to the 
right, pushoff sideways. 

2 Straddlevault right sideways (the 

right leg in front). 

3 Straddlevault left backward (with 

a turn left about). 

4 Straddlevault sideways or backward . 

with one quarter or one half turn 
before landing. 

5 As in Exercise 5, gradually moving 

the board from the buck. 
C As in Exercise 5, gradually raising 
the buck hifrher. 



As in Exercise 5, moving the board 
and raisinar the buck. 




260 



GERMAN- A M ERIC A N G YMNA S TICS 



Lengthwise. 

Let the different movements of this lesson follow each 
other rapidly. 

1 Stridevault right with one quarter 

turn right and straddlevault for- 
ward. 

2 As in Exercise 1, with squatting- 

vault (help). 

3 As in Exercise 1, frontvault right 

with a quarter turn left. 

4 As in Exercise 3, and then let a 

rearvault left follow the front- 
vault. 

5 From the frontrest (Fig. 241), 

straddlevault forward; also side- 
ways; also backward. 

6 As in Exercise 5, then squatting- 

vault forward; also with one 

quarter or one half turn right 

or left. 

Fig. 241. 




ROUND SWING 



261 



ROUND SWING 

(Giant Stride) 
liY HANS BALLIN 



The class is formed in a column composed of ranks of 
three or four, the number being determined by the apparatus, 
which has either four, six, or eight ropes and ladders. 




Fig. 242. 

A circle whose centre is just below the centre of the swing 
is divided into as many parts as there are ropes. This aids 
the pupils in finding their correct distances and positions. The 
pupils just through exercising remain in their places until the 
next ones take the ladders out of their hands. 



262 



GERM A N-A M ERIC A N G YMNA S TICS 



]\Io8t of the exercises of the following themes may also be 
executed on two ladders. In using two ladders, the pupils 
generally face the centre ; and then the ladder to the riglit is 
for the right arm, and to the left for the left arm 





Fig. 243. 



Fig. 244. 



THEME FIRST. 

Moving in a circle by "walking, running, skipping, hopping, hopping 

on one foot, galloping, etc. 



A — Moving 

1 Walking forward with quick steps 
in a circle right or left. The 
pupils grasp a round, and stand 
as far from the centre as pos- 
sihle (Fig. 243). The right arm 
is straight, the right side of the 
body turned toward the centre, 
the left hand is on the hip, or 
grasps the lower end of the ladder. 
a. Walk around the circle ; upon 

command turn right about ; 

then walk in a circle left. 

Repeat several times. 



forward. 

2 The same on tiptoes! 

3 The same running (Fig. 244). 

4 The same, changing from running 

to walking, or vice versa. 

5 Skipping. 

6 Changing from skipping to walk- 

ing or running. 

7 Changing from walking to hopping 

on one foot. 

8 Changing from one movement to 

another upon command, or at 
a given number of counts (Fig. 
245). 



ROUND S]VING 



2(33 



9 As 8, but with each change a turn 
in the opposite direction is ex- 
ecuted. 



10 As above, the pupils performing 
different exercises ; for in- 
stance, while some run, the 
others skip. 



B — Moving sideways. 



11 Quick walking, executing a closing 

step sideways (Fig. 24(5). 

12 Gallop sideways left or right. 

13 Gallop left or right and change, 

as in 4. 

14 Changes of gallop and walking 

sideways with closing step, a 
given number of counts for each 
movement. 



15 The same as in 14, in opposite 

directions. 

16 Running sideways. 

((. with closing step. 

b. with crossing the left foot 

over the right, when run- 

nins risrlit. 





Fig. 245. 



Fig. 246. 



THEME S E C N D. 

Moving in a circle forward and sideways, performing exercises 
in w^alking and hopping. 



1 Gallop forward in a circle, the 

outer foot in advance. 

2 The same with the inner foot in 

advance. 



3 The same alternating. 

(/. after having completed the 
circle once. 

b. after a given number of steps. 

c. upon command. 



2(14 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



Moving forward in a circle upon 
command. 

As above, the pupils performing 
different movements ; for in- 
stance, while four of them gallop 
forward in a circle, four are skip- 
ping. 

Polka forward in a circle. 



7 The same, alternating with walk- 
ing, running, skipping, hopping, 
or with double gallop (two gal- 
lops forward, with one foot and 
then tw^o forward with the other 
foot), in the manner indicated in 
Exercises 3, 4, and 5. 



B — Moving sideways. 



8 Running sideways, the left foot 
crossing over the right. 
a. In front. 
h. In rear, 
c. Alternating in front and rear. 



9 Double gallop sideways left, with 
closing step right at each third 
count. 
10 The same as 9, executing a cross 
step instead of closing steps. 



T HEME T H I R D. 
A — Moving backward. 



1 Walking backward in a circle, the 
left or right hand grasping a 
round. 

a. Fast walking. 

b. Running. 

c. Skipping. 

d. Hopping on one foot. 



e. Galloping. 
./■. Polka. 

2 Upon command, change from one 

to another of the exercises un- 
der 1. 

3 Upon command, change the direc- 

tion of the exercises as enume- 
rated under 1. 



B — Turning. 



4 Upon command, execute a quarter 

turn in a stated direction. (When 
turned toward the centre, both 
hands grasp the same round. ) 

a. Executing the exercises 

named under 1. 

b. Executing two exercises al- 

ternately after each turn. 

c. A different exercise after 

each turn. 

5 Sideways and backward, alternately 

executing movements as under 4. 

C A succession of forward, sideways, 

backward, and sideways, moving 



along in the same line, executing 
movements as under 4. 

7 Forward and backward (after a 

half turn), executing movements 
as under 4. The turn is best 
executed toward the centre (in- 
ward). 

8 A whole turn inward (or outward) 

during an exercise forward, side- 
ways, or backward. The turn is 
either executed by a quick mo- 
tion during the flight, or by sev- 
eral steps on the floor. 



BOUND SWING 



265 



C — Rocking-step and Rocking-hop. 



9 Three gallop-hops forward in a 
circle ; at the close of third hop 
execute a rocking-step. 

10 Facing the centre ; six gallop-hops 

sideways in one direction, and 
then a rocking-step ; then the 
same in the opposite direction. 

11 Sideways as in 10, executing two 

gallop-hops and one side step 
with closing step, and then two 
rocking-hops in both directions. 
The rocking-hop (three-quarter 
time) is the same exercise as 
the rocking-step; the last count, 
however, is hopped. 

12 Sideways as in 10, executing four 



gallop-hops, one closing step in 
one direction, and one rocking- 
hop in the opposite direction. 
1;] Sideways as in Exercise 10, execut- 
ing six gallop-hops in one direc- 
tion, and one rocking-hoj) in the 
oppositie direction. 

14 Sideways as in Exercise 10, ex- 

ecuting a rocking-hop, and clos- 
ing step at each third count. 

15 Rocking-hop forward. 

16 Rocking-running forward. 

(A rocking-running forward is 
executed in two-fourths time. 
The i-ocking-step is shown as a 
run . ) 



THEME FOUR T H. 



Giant Stride. 



1 Running in a circle, executing three 

running steps and one giant 
stride alternately. The running 
is begun with the inner foot. 

2 The same sideways, running with 

cross-steps. 

3 The same backward. 

4 Run forward in a circle, executing 

long strides, gradually reducing 
the number required to finish 
the circle to 8, 7, 6, 5, etc. 
(Fig. 247). 

5 Giant strides in a circle sideways, 

as in 4 (executing cross-steps). 

6 The same backward. 




Fig. 247. 



B — Flying in a circle. 



Run around the circle forward one 
or more times, and upon com- 
mand fly through the air, rais- 
ing the heels backward. 



8 As in 7, skipping, galloping, hop- 

ping on one foot, or striding to 
get a start. 

9 As in 7, letting half of the scliol- 



266 



GER2IAN-A21ERICAN GYMNASTICS 



ars that are exercising fly, while 
the rest run. (All begin the 
exercise with a run.) 
10 Run, gallop, or hop sideways to 
get a start, and fly -svith raising 
the knees, or straight legs for- 
ward (Fig. 248). 




16 



Fig. 248. 

a Start of three or five steps, the 
pupil jumps outward upward. 
The grasp as before ; i . e . , hanging 
on one round, the arm straight, 
in the under-arm hang, or in 




Fig. 250. 



Flying in a circle with swinging 
of the legs forward in a half 
circle. (The closed feet touch 
the floor, the legs are swung out- 
ward vigorously, and perform a 
half-circle before the feet touch 
the floor again.) (Fig. 250.) 
17 The same sideways. 



11 As above, the pupil standing be- 

tween two ropes, and grasping 
one round of each ladder. 

12 Eunning backward alternately 

with a giant stride. 

13 Running forward and high flying in 

a circle (circle jumping). After 




Fig. 249. 

the upper-arm hang (Fig. 249). 

14 The same exercise ; the pupils fly 

and run upon command. 

15 The same exercise, hanging by one 

hand (for strong pupils only). 



18 
19 



20 




Fig. 251. 

The same backward. 

The Exercises 19 and 20, in con- 
nection with whole turns left or 
right during the flight. 

As 16, 17, 18, the legs describing 
one and one-half circle before- 
the feet touch again (Fig. 251). 



ROUND SWING 



267 



THEME FIFTH. 
Moving in a circle over obstacles. 



Giant stride forward with stepping 
on elevations. Some apparatus 
of the gymnasium must serve for 
the exercise ; for instance, spring- 
boards can be used. 

The pupils step on the elevations, 
and execute as many steps be- 
tween the elevated points as are 
necessary. 




Giant stride over obstacles. Jump- 
ing-ropes or balancing-boards are 
placed in the line of the swing, 
at distances as far apart and as 
suits the ability of the pupils. 

Running start and high flying over 
a rope (Fig. 252.) 

Running in a circle ; the pupils en- 
endeavor to grasp some rings or 




Fig 252. 



Fig. 253. 



some other apparatus, which the 
teacher holds out to them. 
Running in a circle, two pupils 
change places with each other. 
The one ahead stops upon com- 
mand, and quickly exchanges 
ropes with the pupil overtaking 
him. Then both continue in the 
same direction. 



Running in a circle. Upon com- 
mand, the next squad changes 
with those exercising. They also 
may run a certain distance on 
the inner side of those exercis- 
ing, and change places with them 
upon command. 

Running in ranks of two. 

The pupil next the centre holds 



268 



GERM A N-A MERICAN G YMNA S TICS 




10 
11 



Fig. 254. 



the ladder with the right liand, 
the left arm is placed around the 
waist of the other puinl. The 
latter places his right hand on 
the right shoulder of his neigh- 
bor, and with his left hand takes 
hold of the lower end of the lad- 
der (Fig. 253). 

Running backward in a circle, as 
in 7. 

Exercise 7, the pupils taking a 
different grasp. 

The same as 9, moving backward. 

As in Exercise 7, the pupils stand- 
ing so that when one moves 
forward, the other must move 
backward ; also sideways (Fig. 
254). 



1 1 lllPPLE-LxiDDER 



269 



WHIPPLE-L ADDER (SEE-SA\\^) 

By HANS BALLIN 

THEME FIKST. 

Exercises in hanging. Ordinary grasp. Arms straight. Leg and 

trunk exercises. 




Fig. 255. 



Swinging. Tlie whole body is 
straight, and the arms are not 
bent during the flight. Pupils 
alight on tiptoes, bending the 
knees deeply, and turning them 
outward. The body must not 
swing forward or backward. 
The ladder must be within easy 
reach for both pupils. 



2 Swinging and raising right leg 

forward. Leg straight and toes 
pointing downward. 

3 Swinging and raising right (or 

left) leg sideways. 

4 Swinging and raising left leg 

backward. 

5 Swinging and raising (or swing- 

ing) both legs forward. 



270 



GERMAN-AMERICAN Q YMXASTICS 



G Swinging and raising (or swing- 
ing) legs sideways left (or 
right). 

7 Swinging and raising legs as in 2, 

3, 4, 5, G, when going dov/nward. 

8 Swinging and alternately exercis- 

ing two of the foregoing exer- 
cises when going upward and 
downward. 
Swinging and crossing right leg 
quickly in front of left when 
going upward. 

10 Swinging and crossing legs as 

often as possihle when going 
upward. 

11 The same when groins: downward. 



12 The same when going upward and 

downward. 

13 Swinging and raising left knee 

when going upward. 

14 The same when going downward. 

15 The same, and raising both knees. 

16 Swinging and turning trunk left 

when going upward. 

17 The same when going downward. 

18 The same alternately. 

19 The same, turning left going up, 

turning right going down. 

20 The same, executing two of the 

foregoing exercises alternately 
when going ui^ward and down- 
ward. 



THEME SEC OX D. 
Exercises in hanging, changing grasp. Leg and trunk exercises. 



1 Swinging, lifting, and re-grasping 

left hand when going upward. 

2 The same going downward. 

3 The same alternately. 

4 The same, lifting and re-grasping 

left and right hand going up- 
ward. 

5 The same going downward. 
G The same alternately. 

7 The same exercises as 1, 2, 3, 4, 

5, G, lifting hand oftener than 
once. 

8 The same exercises of Theme 

First, and 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, G, 7 of 
Theme Second. 

9 Swinging and lifting left hand, 

and re-grasping a short distance 
forward on the beam when go- 
ing upward ; grasping the former 
place when going downward. 

10 Swinging, and the same as 9, lift- 

ing left and right hand. 

11 The same as 9 and 10, travelling 

smaller distances, and more 
than once. 



12 Swinging and lifting left hand, 

grasping a round when going 
upward, and grasping the beam 
again when going downward. 

13 Swinging and with the left hand 

grasp a round, and then the 
next time also grasp that round 
with the right hand, re-grasping 
the former places the next two 
times going upward. 

14 The same, alternating in various 

ways. 

15 Swinging and grasping a rourui 

with both hands when going up- 
ward. (For older pupils and 
more experienced ones only.) 
Re-grasping the next time when 
going upward. 
IG The same, alternating with the 
various foregoing exercises. 

17 The same. Exercises 8-lG alternat- 

ing with Exercises 1-8. 

18 The same. Exercises 8-lG with 

exercises of Theme First, or al- 
ternatinsr with same. 



WniPPLE-LADDER 271 

19 The same, exercises of grasping 20 The same, touching different parts 
and re-grasping witli different of tlie body witli one liand, and 

grasps. then re-grasping. 

THEME THIKD. 

Exercises in hanging, arms bent. 

The exercises of Themes First and Second and exercises 
with arms bent. The arms are either bent going npward, or 
going downward, or both ways. 

THEME FOURTH. 
Exercises in the upper-arm hang. 

The ladder is lowered to the height of pnpils' shoulders, 
and exercises of Theme First are executed. Exercises which 
are of a more difficult nature than those named in the above 
themes do not properly belong to this apparatus, wdiich is 
most eminently an apparatus for girls. 



272 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



BALANCING BOARD 



By RICHARD PERTUCH 



Exercises in standing, walking, or hopping on a narrow 
raised board, necessitating a balancing of the body, are called 
balancing movements. 

The apparatns is a board fourteen to sixteen feet long, two 
inches Avide, and six inches high, placed on three or four iron 
footings six inches high, thus giving a base twelve inches from 
the floor, and two inches Avide, to exercise on. 

For classwork there should be from four to eight boards in 
a gymnasium, so that a large number of pupils can exercise 
together. The boards are generally placed side by side par- 
allel with each other, the distance being regulated by the 
exercise. The exercises on the boards may be started from a 
standing position, either sidewise or crosswise to the board. 

All exercises must be executed with the weight of the 
body resting mainly on the ball of the foot, with the body 
and the head erect. 

The most suitable connections for the scholars are : — 

A — Hand in hand with neighbors (the arms bent, the 
hands in height of shoulders (Fig. 256), or the 
arms raised upward) (Fig. 258). 

B — Arm in arm with neighbor. 

C — - The hands on the shoulders of neighbors (or only one 
hand, either the right or left). 



BALANCING BOARD 



273 



D — The arms over the shoulders of neighbors (or only one 
arm, right or left). 

E — 3 and 4 combined. 

F — Cross arms with neighbors, and grasp hands forward. 

(Fig. 257.) 

G — ■ Cross arms with neighbors, and grasp hands backward. 

If the scholars stand or exercise in couples facing each 
other, the following connections may be used : — 




Fig 256. 

H — Grasp opposite hands. 

I — Grasp opposite hands, the arms crossed. 

J — Grasp right hands (in Exercises 7, 8, and 9, the arms 

can be held in position as in Exercise 1). 
K — Grasp opposite forearms. 
L — Place hands on the opposite shoulders. 

The class must be arranged so that the divisions can go to 
and from the apparatus without delay, and that every scholar 
can see the exercises. 



274 



GERM A N-A 31 ERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



The best plan is to arrange tlie class around the boards in 
form of a square. All exercises must be executed left and 
right, and started, executed, and finished simultaneously by 
those exercising. 

gra.de I. 

Exercises in Stepping. 
Standing facing the boards. 



1 Step up forward and down back- 

ward by a follow^step. 

2 Step up forward and jump down 

backward. 



3 Step up and down forward by a 

followstep. 

4 Step up and jump down forward. 

5 Step up and down forward. 
C Step over by a followstep. 




Fig. 257. 

Standing crosswise to the boards. 

7 Step up sideways into the step po- 8 As Exercise 7, stepping or jumping 
sition forward or backward (Fig. down on the other side. 

257), and step or jump down on 
the same side. 

The above exercises may be executed successively on all 
boards ; variations may be made by counting off the scholars 



BALA^'CI^^G nOARl} 



275 



in ones and twos ; then No. 1 can exercise Avhile No. 2 assists, 
and vice versa; or all can exercise at the same time. The 
different connections snitable for the exercises may he added. 




Fig. 258. 



Exercises in standing. 



9 Standing sidewise or crosswise for 
a length of time, as for two, 
four, or eight counts. 

10 Standing sidewise, exercising step 

positions sidewise, 

11 As Exercise 10, with crossstep po- 

sition in front or rear. 

12 Standing crosswise, exercising step 

positions forward or backward. 

13 Standing sidewise, executing tlie 

layout step on the floor forward 
or backward (one foot touches 
the floor, while the other leg is 
bent). 



14 Standing crosswise, executing the 

layout step on the floor sidewise. 
(Fig. 258). 

15 Standing sidewise or crosswise, 

rise on the toes. 
10 As Exercise 15, bending tlie knees. 

17 As Exercise 15, raising one leg for- 

ward, backward, or sidewise. 

18 As Exercise 15, bending the trunk 
forward, backward, or sidewise. 

As Exercise 15, turning the trunk 

right or left. 
As Exercise 15, raising the arms 

forward, sidewise, or upward, 

with connections. 



19 



20 



In the above exercises assistance should be given by some 
of the scholars, as explained before. 



276 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



Exercises in -walking. 
Standing siclewise on the end of the board. 



21 "Walking sidewise in couples fa- 

cing each other, one on the 
board, the other on the floor as 
assistant. 

22 As Exercise 21, both on tlie boards 

Mitli different connections. 



23 As Exercise 22, walking and stand- 

ing alternately. 

24 Walking forward in one line, with 

different connections from one 
board to the other, by f ollowstep. 

25 As Exercise 24, by the common 

step. 



Standing crosswise on tlie end of the board. 



26 "Walking forward in one line, with 
the different connections by fol- 
lowstep left, right, or alter- 
nately. 



27 As Exercise 26, by common step. 

28 As Exercises 26 or 27, alternately. 



In Exercises 24 and 25, assistance may be given by part of 
the class walking on the floor stepping over the boards, and in 
26, 27. and 28 by walking between the boards. 



GRADE 11. 
Exercises in stepping -with turning. 
Standing facing the board. 



1 Step up with one quarter turn into 

step position backward or for- 
ward, and step down in the op- 
posite direction. 

2 As Exercise 1, jumping down with 

one quarter turn. 

3 As Exercise 1, one half turn to 



the sidestanding position on the 
boards. 

4 As Exercise 3, jumping down back- 

ward Avithout a turn. 

5 Step up from one side and down on 

the other, by one half turns. 



Standing crosswise to the board. 



6 Step up with one quarter turn to 8 

the sidestanding position, and 
down in the reverse direction. 

7 Step up from one side, and down 

on the other, by one half turn. 



Step up with one quarter or one 
half turn, and execute the exer- 
cises of the Grade I., Exercises 
9-20, without assistance, using 
the different connections. 



BALANCING BOARD' 



•277 



Exercises in walking. 
Stand crosswise on one end of the board. Walking forward. 



10 



11 



12 



13 



9 Touchstep forward, and foHow- 
step. Three-quarter time. (Step 
position forward left (1), step 
(2), and follow with tlie right 
(3).) 

As Exercise 0, touching the floor 
during the first course. 

Raise the leg forward, and fol- 
lowstep. Three-quarter time. 
(Raise the left leg forward (1), 
step (2), and follow right (3).) 

Raise the knees, and followstep. 
Three-quarter time. 

As Exercises 9-12, left, right, or 
alternately. 

As Exercises 9-12, in common- 
step. Two-quarter time. 



14 Followstep and rise on the toes. 

Three-quarter or four-(iuarter 
time. 

15 As Exercise 14, with bending the 

knees. 
1(3 Followstep and trunk exercises ; 
bending forward, backward, 
sidewise, or turning. Four- 
quarter time. 

17 Followstep and arm exercises; 

bending or raising forward or 
iipward. 

18 Walking on the toes. 

19 Changestep. Two-quarter time. 

20 Change and followste]), three- 

quarter time. 






32 



Standing sidewise on one end of the board, walking sidewise. 



21 Touchstep sidewise, or cross and 

followstep. Three-quarter time. 
(Step-position sidewise (or cross 
in front or rear with the left 
foot), step and follow Avith the 
right. ) 

22 As Exercise 21, touching the floor. 

23 Raise the leg sidewise and follow- 

step. Three-quarter time. 

24 Raise the knees forward and fol- 

lowstep. Three-quarter time. 



25 Crossstep, stepping over in front. 

Two-quarter time. 
20 As Exercise 25, crossing in the 

rear. 

27 Followstep and crossstep alter- 

nately. Four-quarter time. 

28 Changestep and followstep. 

Three-quarter time. 

29 Changestep and crossstep. Three- 

quarter time. 

30 As Exercises 14-18, sidewise. 



Standing crosswise on one end of the board. Walk backward. 
The scholars are divided into ones and twos. 



No. 1 walk backward by follow- 
step on the board, while No. 2 
walk forward between the 
boards, assisting No. 1. 

As Exercise 31, with common 
step. 



33 As Exercise 31, with changestep. 

34 As Exercise 31, No. 2 walk for- 

ward on the boards by follow- 
step. 

35 As Exercise 34, with common step. 

36 As Exercise 34, with changestep. 



278 



GERM A X-A MEIi WAN G YMNA S TICS 



For connections, a long wand carried by the scholars in 
different positions may be added (Fig. 259). The exercises 
of the First Grade may be executed here without assistance. 



G n A D E III. 
Exercises in -walking ?ind double touchstep. 



1 Walk forward by follow or ooin- 

mon step in fast time (quick- 
step). 

2 .Vs Exercise 1, sideways by follow 

or crossstep in front or rear. 

3 Walk backward by followstep, 

common, or cbangestep, witliout 
assistance, but in connected 
ranks. 

4 Walk forward by balancestep (step- 

position forward with rising on 
the toes). Three-quarter time. 

5 As Exercise 4, beginning with the 

touchstep forward or backward. 
Four-quarter time. 
Walk forward with touchstep in 
front and rear, and by followstep. 
Four-quarter time. 

7 As Exercise G, backward, touchstep 

in rear and front. 

8 As Exercise G, sidewise, touchstep 

sidewise and crossstep in front 
or rear. 

9 As Exercise G, with common step. 

Three-quarter time. 



10 



11 



As Exercise 7, with common step. 
Three-quarter time. 

As Exercise 8, in three-quarter 
time (the left foot touchstep 
sidewise, then cross touchstep 
in front, and then step sidewise. 
The right foot cross touchstep 
in front, then touchstep side- 
wise, and then crossstep in 
front). 

As Exercise G, with cbangestep. 
Four-quarter time. 

As Exercise 7, with cbangestep. 
Four-quarter time. 

14 As Exercise G, with touchstep on 

the floor, first on one side and 
then on the other side of the 
board, crossing in front or rear 
by follow, common, or change- 
step. 

15 As Exercise 14, backward. 

16 As Exercise 8, with touchstep on 

the floor, in front and rear of 
the board by follow or crossstep. 



12 



13 



Exercises in -walking -with turning. 

In couples, crossing arms and grasping hands, or with a 
long wand raised U})ward. 



17 Walk forward and sidewise alter- 

nately by one quarter turn in- 
ward or outward. 

18 Walk forward with the half turn 

inward and outward alternately. 



19 As Exercises 17 or 18, the turn 

after a certain number of steps. 

20 As Exercises 17, 18, and 19, walk- 

ins backward. 



BALANCING BOARD 



279 



Exercises in walking \vith leg, trunk, or arm movements. 



21 Walk forward, raising the leg for- 

ward for 2 counts, and then fol- 
lowstep. Four-quarter time. 

22 As Exercise 21, with changestep. 

23 As Exercise 21, with common step, 

holding the leg in position for 8 
counts. Four-quarter time. 

2J: As Exercises 21, 22, and 23, back- 
ward, raising the leg backward. 

25 As Exercises 21, 22, and 23, side- 
wise, raising the leg side wise. 



26 As Exercises 21-25, with bending 

the other leg during the raised 
position, or bend it on the sec- 
ond count and straighten it on 
the third (Fig. 259). 

27 As Exercises 21, 22, and 23, raising 

the knee forward. 

28 As Exercises 24, raising the foot 

backward (knees together). 

29 As Exercises 27 and 28, straight- 

ening the leg before stepping. 




Fig. 259. 



30 Raise the leg forward at 1, bend 

the leg at 2, straighten at 3, 
and then step. Four-quarter 
time. 

31 As Exercise 30, backward, raising 

the leg backward. 

32 Walk forward in common step, 

swinging the leg forward, back- 
ward, forward, and down. Four- 
quarter time. 

33 As Exercise 32, walking backward 

and swinging the leg backward, 
forward and backward. 



34 As Exercise 32, walking sidewise 

and swinging the leg out, in 
(crossing in front or rear) and 
out, and step ; then swing the 
other leg sidewise in, out and 
in, and step. 

35 Execute trunk or arm movements 

with single touchstep, combined 
with follow or changestep. 
Three-quarter time. 
(Walking forward, touchstep in 
front with bending the trunk 
backward (Fig. 260), then 



280 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



straighten with follow or change- 
step. ) 
(Walking sidewise, touchstep 
sidewise out with raising the 
arms up, then lower with follow- 
step. ) 
36 As Exercise 35, with double touch- 
step. Four-quarter time. 
(Walking sidewise, touchstep 
sidewise out bending the trunk 
sidewise in the opposite direc- 
tion, touclistep cross in front 
and bend the trunk to the other 
side, straighten and followstep. 



37 



(Walking forward, touchstep for- 
ward (long wand as help), raise 
the wand to the shoulder, the 
arms bent, touchstep backward, 
straighten the arms upward, 
changestep, wand on shoulders 
and down. ) 

Walk forward, sidewise or back- 
ward with different steps to the 
centre of the board. When 
standing unconnected, execute 
the leg, trunk, and arm move- 
ments upon command or in 
time. 




Fig. 260. 



Exercises in Tvalking, hopping, and running. 



38 Walk forward, three steps and 

hop. Four-quarter time. 
(Step left, right, left, and hop on 
the left foot, swinging the right 
leg forward, then start with the 
right foot. ) 

39 As Exercise 38, with two steps. 

Three-quarter time. 
(The hop is always on the same 
foot.) 



40 As Exercise 38, with one step. 

Two-quarter time. 
(Step left and hop, swinging the 
right leg forward, then start 
riglit. ) 

41 Walk forward by followstep and 

hop. Three-quarter time. 

42 As Exercise 41, sidewise. 

43 Hop forward, or sidewise by fol- 

lowstep (gallop). 



BALANCING BOAliU 



281 



44 Polka step. 

45 Heel and toe and polka step. 

46 Run forward with an assistant be- 

tween the boards. 

47 Run forward with different con- 

nections. 

48 As Exercise 38, running. Two- 

quarter time. 



49 As Exercise 40, running. One- 

quarter time. 

50 Hop on one foot across the boards. 

Hop two, three, or four times al- 
ternately left and right, forward 
and backward. 



282 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



JUMPING 



By HERM. HEIN 



In all jumping distinguish between : — 

A — The spring or jumpoff; 

B — The flight of the body during the jump; 

C — The landing of the body, or the finish, 

and when the jump is not executed from the stand^ 
D — Between the standing and running jump. 

A — The Springoff. 

The springoff should be executed from the ball of the foot, 
and whenever practicable, be supported by a swing of the arms. 

B — The Flight of the Body. 

The moment the body leaves the floor (at the springoff), it 
is in a state of flight ; in this position the different parts of the 
body may be exercised in various ways. The arms assist the 
body in keeping its equilibrium, during the flight as well as 
at the finish. During the flight the legs are either bent (the 
knees being raised forward), or the legs extended well for- 
ward and closed (Fig. 261). Various exercises of the legs, 
such as straddling crosswise, sideways, raising the heels, etc.,. 
and exercises of the arms, as thrusting or swinging in all 
directions, clapping hands, etc., may be executed. These 
exercises help to acquire full control of the body. 



JUMPING 



283 



C — The Landing, or the Finish. 

Special attention must always be paid to the finish. The 
moment the balls of the feet touch the floor, the knees should 
be well bent, in order to break the force of the jump, and to 
avoid all jarring of the body, which always ensues if the knees 
are kept stiff. Injury being thus guarded against, beauty and 

gracefulness, as well as a firm stand 

at the finish, are next aimed at. 

The body must be so controlled 

as to prevent a stepping forward, 

backward, or a falL 

D— The Run or "Walk. 
A long run is advisable in the 
broad jump, but not in the 
high jump. Most people 
have a habit of taking a 
\ longer run than necessary. 

The run for a jump may be 
either directly forward, or ob- 
liquely forward. The former 
is generally used for the broad, the latter occasionally for the 
high jump. A high jump executed with a forward run and 
fully raised knees is generally a more graceful movement than 
the jump from the oblique run. 

HIGH JUMP. 
Exercises from the stand on both feet. 

GEO UP I. 

4 Jump forward with three quarter 




Fig. 261. 



1 Jump forward. 

2 Jump forward with one quarter 

turn right or left. 

3 Jump forward, with one half turn 

right or left. 



turn right or left. 
5 Jump forward with a whole tiun 
risht or left. 



284 GEBMAN-AMER WAN G YMNA S TICS 

GKOUP II. 

( With Leg Exercises.) 

1 Jump forward with swinging tlie 3 Jump forward with raising the 

right or left leg forward. knees. 

2 Jump forward with a side strad- 4 Jump forward with raising the 

die. heels. 

GROUP III. 

( With Ann Exercises.) 

1 Jump forward with raising the 3 Jump forward with thrusting the 

arms in any direction, arms in any direction. 

2 Jump forward with straightening 

the arms in any direction. 

GPvOUF IV. 
Combine the exercises of Groups I. and II. 

GROUP V. 
Combine the exercises of Groups I. and III. 

GROUP VI. 
Combine the exercises of Groups I., II., and III. 

GROUP VII. 

(With n ^]'alk or a Bun.) 
All exercises of the former groups, with a springoff ^Yith 
one foot. 

GROUP VIII. 

1 Jump forward from the squatting 2 Jump sideways right or left from 

position into the squatting posi- the squatting position into the 

tion. squatting position. 

3 The same backward. 



I 



JUMPING 



285 



GROUP IX. 

The exercises of Group VIIL, ^yith raising the heels, or 

stracklling sideways. 

GROUP X. 

The exercises of Group VIIL, with turns. 

GROUP XI. 

Consecutive jumps over a number of ropes placed a small 
distance apart. 




Fig. 262. 

VARIOUS JUMPS. 
WINDO^W JUMPS. 

Two ropes are placed one above the other, the pupil to 
jump through between them. To increase the difficulty of 
this exercise the distance between the ropes is gradually 
lessened, or the jumping-stands are placed nearer together, or 
both (Fig. 262). 



■286 



GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMXA S TICS 



PIKE'S LEAP. 

Take a run and spring off with both feet, keeping the body 
in a horizontal position during the flight, extending the arms 
forward, and placing the hands on the helper's shoulders. The 
helper stands one or two paces on the other side of the rope, 
and faces the jumper. (See Fig. 154.) 



BROAD JUMP. 

Preliminary Exercises. 

With both feet. 

Raise the arms forward and ri.se ou 4 As Exercises 
the toes. 

Bend the knees to a squatting posi- 
tion, tlie legs bent to a right angle, 
the heels locked, the body inclined 
slightly forward, and move the 
arms downward and backward. 

Straighten the knees, rise on the 
toes, swinging the arms forward, 
and then come back to the start- 
ing position. 

WitJi one foot. 



1 and 2, spring off 
with both feet, straightening the 
body well, swinging the arms for- 
ward, and landing in the former 
place. 
A.S Exercise 4, jumping forward, 
swinging the arms forward with 
the springoff, and lower them, 
when straightening the knees. 



1 Raise the arms forward and the 

right leg forward. 

2 Move the arms backward and right 

leg backward, slightly bending 
the left knee. 
.3 Straighten the knee, swing the 
right leg and arms forward, then 
come back to the starting posi- 
tion. 



As Exercises 1 and 2, and swing the 
right leg forward, at the same 
time spring off with the left 
foot, swinging the arms forward 
and landing in the former 
place. 

As Exercise 4, jumping forward. 



Sidew^ays to the right and left. 

With both feet. 



Raise the arms to the right and 

rise on the toes. 
Swing the arms downward to the 

left and bend the knees. 
Straighten the knees and swing the 

arms to right, then lower the arms. 



As Exercises 1 and 2, spring off 
and swing the arms to the 
right, landing in the former 
place. 

Like Exercise 4, jumping to the 
riffht. 



JUMPING 



287 



With one foot. 



Raise the arms to the right, and 

right leg sideways. 
Move the arms to the left, and cross 

the right leg in front of the left. 
Swing the right leg and the arms 

sideways, and then lower the leg, 

and the arms. 



As Exercises 1 and 2, spring off 
left, and at the same time swing 
the right leg and the arms side- 
ways to the right, and land in 
the former place. 

As Exercise 4, jumping sideways 
rificht. 



With hath feet. 



Raise the arms backward and rise 

on the toes. 
Move the arms forward and bend 

the knees. 
Swing the arms backward and rise 

on the toes, straightening the 



knees, then come back to the 

starting position. 
As Exercises 1 and 2, spring off, 

and swing the arms backward, 

landing in the former place. 
As Exercise 4, jumping backward. 



With one foot. 



Raise the arms backward and the 

right leg backward. 
Move the arms forward and the 

right leg forward. 
Swing the right leg and the arms 

backward, and then lower the 

arms and the leaf. 



As Exercises 1 and 2, spring off 
left and swing the right leg 
backward, landing in the former 
place. 

As Exercise 4, jumping back- 
Avard. 



288 



GERMAN- AMEBIC A N G YMNASTICS 



POLE VAULTING 

Apparatus — 

Jumpijng-stands. 

Poles 7 to 10 ft. long and one and one-half inches thick. 

I\OPE OR Reed 8 to 10 ft. long. 

The vault over the rope with a quarter turu left seems 
to come most natural to beginners. A firm grasp, the pla- 
cing of the pole into the gr'ound at the springoff, and keeping 
close to the pole are essential for the success of the jump 
(Figs. 2G3, 204). 




Fig. 263. Fig. 264. 

There are three different vaults : the rear, flank, and front, 
vault. 

During a rearvault the back is turned towards the rope. 



POLE VAULTING 289 

During a flankvault the side is turned towards the rope. 

During a frontvault the face is turned towards the rope. 

In high vaults the lower hand should be placed about as 
high as the rope. The moment the body begins to sink, the 
pole should be pushed back in the direction from where the 
start was made. Both hands release the hold at about the same 
time, tlie left pushing the pole back. The left arm is raised 
slightly to avoid touching the rope. 



290 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



HOP, STEP, AND JUMP, AND HIGH 
LONG JUMP 

By D. M. F. KROGH 

The hop, step, and jump, as well as the high long jump are 
generally practised by advanced classes. 

These jumps should not he taken up as regnlar classwork 
until a certain proficiency in the long jump (also called broad 
jump), step jump, and high jump has been attained. 

HOP, STEP, AND JUMP. 

LESSON 1. 

1 Walk forward and hop from the 2 The same as Exercise 1, with run- 
board with the right foot, tlien ning instead of walking forward, 
execute a step jump, i.e., from 3 The same as Exercise 1, beginning 
the right onto th6 left foot, and the hop with the left foot, 
finally make another jump onto 4 As Exercise 3, with a run. 
the mattress, alighting on the (Repeat each jump twice, thrice, 
toes of both feet simultaneously, or even four times before moving 
bending the knees and keeping the board back farther. ) 
the heels together. 

To secure a good hop, step, and jump, the resting leg 

is bent and held well backward until foot of the hopping leg 

touches the floor, it then takes a brisk step, followed by a 

jump. Swing the arms forward while making the last jump. 

LESSON 2. 

With turns before alighting on the mat. 

1 Jump from the board with the 2 With the left foot and a quarter 
right foot, executing a quarter turn right. 

turn left before alighting on the 3 As Exercise 1, with half a turn left, 
mattress. The left side is then 4 As Exercise 3,with half a turn right, 
tm'ned towards the board. (Repeat each jump two or three 

times before moving the board. ) 



HOP, STEP, AND JUMP, AND HIGH LONG JUMP 291 

THE HOP, STEP, AND JUMP AS A FIELD- 
EXERCISE. 

Put a wide board, the front end of which is covered with 
a rubber plate, firmly in the ground. It is well to have the 
board about thirty feet long, as it affords a solid foundation 
for running. The place for alighting should be excavated 
and filled with moist sand, sawdust, or tanbark. 




Fig. 265. 



HIGH LONG- JUMP. 



LESSON 1. 



The rope or stick lies about 2 or 3 feet high, the hoard about the same 
distance from the rope. 



Running high jump with raising 
tlie knees, jumping from the 
board with tlie left or riglit foot 
(aliglit on tlie toes, bending the 
knees well). 

As Exercise 1, with straight legs, 
i.e., jump off with the right foot 
from the board and swinsc the 



straight left leg forward (Fig. 
265) (the right leg is jerked up 
quickly close to the left). 

3 As Exercise 2, with the left leg. 

4 Jump over the rope with raised 

knees and straighten the legs for- 
ward suddenly, while the feet 
move over the rope. 



292 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



LESSON 2. 
The mattress to he 2 feet away from the rope. 



1 Repeat the exercises of the preced- 

ing lesson. See that tlie knees 
and hips are straightened with a 
quick motion. 

2 As Exercise 1, Jumping witli the 

left foot, and a quarter turn left. 

3 As Exercise 2, right, and a quarter 

turn right. 

4 Jump with the left foot, and a quar- 

ter turn right. 



5 Jump with the right foot, and a 

quarter turn left. 

6 Jump with the left, and a half turn 

left. 

7 Jump with the right, and a half 

turn right. 

8 Jump with the left, and a half turn 

right. 

9 Jump with the right, and a half 

turn left. 



LESSON 3. 

The rope at a height of '2h feet ; the mattress about 4 feet away from it. 



1 High long jump as Exercise 4, Les- 

son 1. 

2 As Exercise 1, with swinging the 

arms forward, 
o As Exercise 1, with swinging the 

arms sideways. 
4 As Exercise 1, with swinging the 

arms forward upward. 



5 As Exercise 1, clapping hands once 

(twice, thrice, etc.) while jump- 
ing. 

6 As Exercise 1, with touching the 

knees with the hands while jump- 
ing. 

7 As Exercise 1, with toucliing the 

feet while jumping. 



LESSON 4. 
Height of rope 2 feet, distance of board 3 feet 

1 From a stand, jump with both feet 

from the board (raise the knees 
well and then straighten them 
forward quickly). 

2 As Exercise 1, straddling the legs 



(while jumping over), alighting 
with the feet together. 

3 As Exercise 1, swinging the arms 
forward upward. 

4 As Exercise 2, swinging the arms 

sideways. 



LESSON 5. 
Height 2 feet, distance Sh feet. 
After every jump raise the rope two inches, and move the 
board six inches farther away. Let it be your object to get 
a good strong run, to raise your legs as high as possible, and 
to straighten your body suddenly when the feet have cleared 
the rope. 



WEIGHT THROWING 



293 



^WEIGHT THROW^ING; ^WEIGHT LIFTING; 

(Putting- the Shot) 

AXI) 

THROWING THE SPEAR 

(Javelin) 

Weight throwing, weight hfting, and spear throwing 
should be practised frequently; as they require a good deal 
of strength, they are practised in classes for men and older 
boys only. 

The following few lessons will suffice to supply the needs 
of most teachers. 



WEIGHT THROWING. 
(Putting the Shot.) 

Remarks. — The Aveight consists of an iron ball (shot) or 
a stone for out-door practice, while a strong leather bag, filled 
with small shot, is used for in-door practice. The ball or stone 
usually weighs ten, fifteen, twenty-five, or thirty-five pounds. 

Every gymnasium should be supplied wdth about one for 
every ten scholars. 



LESSON 1. 



1 Throw (or "put" ) with the right 
hand (Fig. 26G). 

Remakks. — For a throw from the 
stand, the weight is taken in the 
right hand, holding it above 
the shoulder, then the layout po- 
sition left forward is taken, while 
the trunk is turned to the right. 
The weight is then put forward 



with energy and force, the pupil 
at the same time straightening 
the right and bending the left 
knee ; the right shoulder must 
be brought forward as far as pos- 
sible without losing the position 
or stepping over the mark. 
The same as Exercise 1, with the 
left hand. 



294 



GERM AN- A M ERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



LESSON 2. 

In the sides trad die position. 



1 Kaise the weight over the head with 

both hands, and throw it forward. 

2 Throw the weight forward from 

between the knees (the trunk is 



bent forward and the arms swung 
forward and backward several 
times, in order to give more force 
to the throw). 



Pitch the weight with the right 
hand (the weight and the hand 
held downward at the right side) 

(Fig. 267). 



LESSON 3. 

2 The same with the left hand. 





Fig. 266. 



Fig. 267. 



LESSON 4. 



Layout position, left forward and 
grasp the weight with both Iiands, 
holding it above the right shoul- 
der, and from here throw it for- 
ward with both hands. 



2 The same from the opposite side. 

3 The same, but an armcircle forward 

and downward previous to the 
•throw. 



LESSON 5. 



In the sidestraddle position, with the hack turned towards 
the direction in which the weight is to he thrown. 



Throw the weight backwards over 

the head. 
Throw the weight backwards from 

between the knees with the trunk 

bent forward. 



3 Bend the trunk forward and hold 
the weight between the legs, 
straighten the trunk, swing the 
arms forward upward, and throw 
the weight backward over the 
head. 



WEIGHT LIFTING 295 

4 Hold the weight above the head the weight backward (between 

(with both hands), bend the the legs). 

trunk forward, swing the arms Note. — Practise the throwing also 
forward and downward and throw with hopping forward and with a 

run, previous to the throw. 

WEIGHT LIFTING. 

The Aveight of the dumb-bells for the various exercises will 
be mentioned in each lesson. Care must be taken that the 
dumb-bells are not too heavy. It is much better to practise 
with light dumb-bells than with ones too heavy. 

LESSON 1. 

Weight : from 10 to 30 lbs. each, according to the strength of the class members. 

1 Bend the trunk forward and grasp 2 Bend the arms as in Exercise 1. 

the dumb-bells. Straighten the Straighten the arms sideways, and 

trunk and bend the arms, (Bells reverse the motions as in Exer- 

height of shoulders) straighten else 1. 

the arms upward. Bend the 3 The same as in Exercise 1, but 

arms. The arms down. straighten the arms forward. 

These movements may also be practised with one arm first. 

LESSON 2. 

Weight: 10 to 25 lbs. 

1 Raise the arms forward; then up- 3 Raise the arms sideways; then up- 

ward; lower the arms forward in ward; lower the arms sideways; 

position; then down. then down. 

2 Raise the arms forward; move the 4 Raise the arms sideways ; then for- 

arms sideways; move the arms ward; then sideways; then down. 

forward; then down. 

LESSON 3. 

Weight: 10 to 35 lbs. 

1 Raise the arms forward upward 2 Raise the arms sideways upward; 

(vertical position); bend the bend the trunk forward and lower 

trunk forward and arms down the arms sideways in position; 

(vertical position ) ; straighten the straighten the trunk and raise the 

trunk and raise the arms; lower arms upward; lower the arms 

the arms forward down. sideways down. 

RejVIARKS. — All these movements must be executed very 
sloAvly. 



296 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



LESSON 4. 
With tlie shot, or weight used for throwing. 



Raise the weight from tlie floor 
with the right hand (the left 
does not touch the weight). The 
weight is then balanced and raised 
to the shoulder, during which 
motion the hand is turned out- 
ward and backward. Straighten 




Fig. 268. 



the arm upward, then lower the 
weight again (Fig. 268). 

2 As Exercise 1, with the left hand, 

and after the weight is raised, 
bend and straighten the arm sev- 
eral times. 

3 As Exercise 1, when the arm is up, 

bend and straighten the knees ; 
kneel ; sit down on the floor, etc. 




Fig. 269. 



LESSON 5. 



Weight: 10 to 35 lbs. {Diuuh-bells). 



Raise the arms sideways ; turn the 
arms forward and backward (pro- 
nation and supination of hand). 

Bend the trunk forward and grasp 
the dumb-bells (legs straight and 
together, the hips bent) ; turn the 
arms inward and outward ; place 
the dumb-bells on the floor. 



In the position described in Exer- 
cise 2, bend the arms (dumb-bells 
almost touching the shoulders), 
straighten the arms downward, 
keeping the legs straight ; repeat ; 
place the dumb-bells on the floor. 



THROWING THE SPEAR 



297 



LESSON 6. 



Use dumb-bells with a long rod between the bells, long 
enough to be grasped with both hands. 

The weUjht of the dumb-bell (or bar-bell) may be between 25 and 100 lbs. 



Raise the weight from the floor 
(with both hands) up to the 
chest, the arms bent; straighten 
the arms upward ; bend the arms, 
dumb-bell height of the chest; 
the arms down. 

Bend the a.-ms, dumb-bell height 
of chest ; straighten the arms up- 



ward; turn the weight, moving 
the right hand forward and the 
left hand backward; turn it back 
to the former position; bend 
arms ; arms down (Fig. 269). 
The above exercises with appro- 
priate leg and trunk movements. 



LESSON 7. 

Lying on the back on a mat, use the same dumb-bell as 
in Lesson 6, the weight at the head. 



Grasp the weight ; bend the arms, 
the weight above the chest ; 
straighten the arms upward, i.e., 
towards the ceiling ; bend the 
arms ; place the weight on the 
floor from where it was taken. 

Grasp the weight ; raise the arms 
upward (the elbows straight) ; 
bend the arms ; straighten the 
arms upward ; lower the arms 
backward, and place the weight 
on the floor. 



Grasp the weight ; bend the arms ; 
the weight over the chest ; rise 
(with the weight) to an erect 
sitting position ; straighten the 
arms upward ; bend the arms 
and reverse the preceding mo- 
tions so as to bring the dumb- 
bell back to the floor again. 

Grasp the weight ; bend the arms, 
weiglit over the chest, straighten 
the arms upward ; rise to erect 
standing position. Reverse the 
foregoing movements. 



THRO^ATING THE SPEAR (JAVELIN). 

A spear (javelin) is ten feet in length and an inch in diam- 
eter, with an iron ring at both ends. A wooden block about a 
foot square, or shaped like a human head, fastened to a ver- 
tical post by means of strong hinges, is used as a target. 
Whenever this head is struck squarely by the spear, it tilts 



298 GEBMAN-AMEBWAN GYMNASTICS 

backward. A sheet^iron target two feet in diameter, or a 
large tarpaulin hung up loosely, may also be used. If this 
bu-paulin hangs in a hall, a few mattresses should be placed 
in front of it to catch the spears. The distance between the 
thrower and the target is from thirty to forty feet. If a 
class is large, three or four scholars throw simultaneously 
on command. 




Fig. 270. 



The form of spear-throwing most 
in use is the straight throw. The 
spear is grasped with the right 
hand, several inches back of the 
middle, the arm is bent, and the 
spear is held in a horizontal posi- 
tion as high as the eyes (aim- 
ing). The right arm is then 
straightened backward (the right 
leg lunging backward, the body 
turning to the right, the left arm 
being raised forward in line with 
the spear) (Fig. 270), and the 
spear is then thrown forward with 
full force. While the throw is 



being made, the right knee is 
straightened and the left one 
bent^the trunk inclining forward 
somewhat. 

The throw may also be executed in 
a curved line by moving the right 
hand backward and downward, 
sending the spear in a curved line 
towards the target. 

Both ways of throwing may be 
varied by taking a certain num- • 
her of steps before throwing, or 
by hopping or running forward. 
The throw should also be prac- 
tised with the left hand. 



GYMyA:STIC GAMES 290 



GYMNASTIC GAMES 

Bv KARL KROH 

BALL GAMES. 
CATCH BALL. 

A NUMBER of girls or hoys form a circle (standing at arm's 
length from each other), and j:»ass a hand-hall, a rnhher foot-hall, 
or a leather hall of a weight adapted to the strength of the 
players, quickly either to the left or right. The player who 
first muffs the hall is "it"; he steps into the centre of the 
circle, and throws the hall to the other players. 

The players now pass or throw the hall to each other in 
such a manner as to make it difficult for the runner inside 
the circle to get it. Should the runner, who must run ahout 
within the circle only, get possession of the hall, the player 
who threw the l)all last, or the one who muffed it (as may 
have heen determined), takes the jolace of the runner, and in 
turn hecomes 'Mt." 

The game may he played with the players in a prescrihed 
position, which must he kept hy them, or a player may he 
allowed to leave his place when the ball is tossed in his direc- 
tion. Throughout the game the circle nnist he preserved. 
Any number of players, from ten to thirty, ma}^ engage in 
this game, which requires both skill and agility. 

ROLL BALL. 

A number of players, twelve to twenty-four, boys or girls, 
form a circle and grasp hands. A large leather ball filled with 



300 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

sawdust, or a foot-ball, is placed on the floor before one of the 
players, and rolled sideways left or right by pushing or gently 
kicking it (when rolling the ball to the left, the right foot 
pushes it, and vice versa). The ball must pass in front of the 
players, and each one, in turn, must direct it in its course 
around the line of the circle. If the ball rolls out of its 
■course, so that the player cannot kick it without leaving 
his place, the one who last kicked the ball is " it," and steps 
into the circle, and endeavors to kick the ball out of the 
same. 

The players may close or enlarge the circle, and should, as 
long as their hands remain grasped, do everything in their 
power to keep the ball from getting out of the circle. The 
moment the ball is out of the ring, the player at whose right 
side the ball got out of the circle is ''it." At no time shall 
the ball be caught Avith the hands. 

GUESS BiMiL. 

A row of })layers (boys or girls) count off by twos from 
left to right. The last odd number steps in front of the row 
at a distance of from four to ten paces and is "it," and must 
turn his back to the other players, who pass the ball from one 
to the other. When the player who is 'Mt" lias counted a 
given number, the player haA^ng the ball in his hand at that 
time throws it at him. If he misses him, they exchange 
places. If he hits him, the player who is "it" turns about 
and guesses who threw the ball. If he guesses right, they 
exchange places. If not, the play continues as before. 

A light rubber ball or bean-bag is best suited for this 
game. 



GYMNASTIC GAMES 801 

SQUARE BALL. 

An open square of twelve to fifteen paces, and a soft rub- 
ber or hand-ball or a bean-bag, are necessary for this game. 

Four or eight players stand at each of the corners of the 
square as outposts, and a like number within the centre of the 
square. The outposts toss the ball from corner to corner, 
the centre players keeping out of the ball's way as much as 
possible, for the outposts must try to hit one of the centre 
players with the ball. 

When an outpost succeeds in hitting a centre player, all 
the outposts at once flee, until the centre player who was hit 
has grasped the ball and called out " HALT." The outposts 
then stand still, and tlie centre player who has the ball throws 
it at any one of the outposts. 

All misses of the respective sides, corners, or centres are 
scored with chalk-marks at the respective corners, or in the 
centre ring, three sufficing to oust a player. 

The party first losing half its players loses the game. 

The game may also be played in such a manner that all 
outposts who are hit must enter the square, the last outpost 
upon being hit entering the square for a new game. 

CENTRE BALL ; SOW-DRIVING). 

This game may be played in-doors as well as out-doors, 
as many as ten to fifty participating. There must be a suf- 
ficiently large and even surface on which to form a circle, 
Avith room enough between the players for them to move 
about freely. Each player must have a stick or wand about 
three feet long. A hand-ball of leather about ten to twelve 



802 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

inches in diameter is used. If played out-doors, each player, 
except one, makes a hole about four inches in diameter in 
front of the place he occupies in the circle, in which to 
place one end of his stick. If played in-doors, a chalk ring 
may be made to indicate the hole. 

A hole or chalk ring large enough to hold the ball must 
be made in the centre of the circle. In beginning the game, 
all players place one end of their stick into the centre hole 
under and around the ball. Upon counting one, two, three, 
all uplift the ball with their sticks, and rush for a ring or hole 
in which to place one end of their stick. When all holes are 
taken, one player wdl be left as -centre player,'" or be "it." 

He must now roll and push the ball from where it may 
have fallen into the centre hole with his stick, at the same 
time guarding against the attacks of the other players, who 
strive to direct the ball from its couree, it being the duty of 
all plavers to prevent him from getting it into the centre 
ring or hole. Attacks on the ball are best guarded against 
by placing the stick in front of the ball so as to ward off 
the thrusts in its direction. Any player may leave his place 
to attack the ball ; but as soon as the centre player spies a 
vacant hole, he may abandon the ball, and aim to place his 
stick into the vacant hole. The players who may have 
left their places will then scramble for holes (or rings), and 
one of their number will always be left as centre player. 
Such centre player then attempts to get the ball into the 
centre ring or hole. If successful, the game is begun over 
again. During the game any unoccupied ring or hole may 
at any time be taken by any player, and the more this is 
done the livelier and more interesting the game will be. 



G YMNA S TIC GAMES 



308 



RIDER BALL. 



The players "pair off" according to height, strengtli, and 
weight, and form a double circle (one behind the other), at 
from two to six paces from each other. A '* toss-up "decides 
who shall first be ''horse," and who shall be ''rider." The 
horses take a stride-straddle position, and brace themselves 
by placing both hands on the knees, 
which should be kept straight. The 
body is bent forward, in order that the 
riders standing in their rear (outer 
circle) may readily mount by strad- 
dling their backs (Fig. 271). 

The riders, having mounted, play 
catch ball, the horses (as the play 
becomes better understood) growing 
restive, turning left, right, or about 
(always staying in the circle), in order 
to make the catching of the ball as 
difficult as possible. 

If a rider muffs the ball, they all 
dismount and run, while any one of the horses quickly picks 
it up and commands all to ''stand," or "halt." The riders 
must obey ; and the horse endeavors to hit one of the riders, 
who may avoid being hit by dodging, or any other means 
but leaving his place. 

If the horse having the ball is afraid of missing the riders, 
he may pass the ball to any other horse ; but as soon as the 
ball is muffed or thrown at a rider without hitting him, the 
game begins anew; if, however, the horse succeeds in hit- 




Fig. 271. 



304 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

ting a rider, places are changed, riders becoming horses, and 
horses riders. 

The ball must at no time be held any length of time by 
any player, but must be tossed as soon as caught, no matter 
in what position the rider may find himself. 



RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 305 



RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 
• STAKE-GUARD ( DUCK-STONE ) . 

This game may be played out-doors as well as in-doors. 
If played in-doors, the players decide who shall be " it " by 
throwing their bean-sacks, called " ducks," at an Indian 
club or stake at a distance of about twenty feet ; and the one 
whose bean-sack lands farthest away from the mark is " it," 
or must be guard. If played out-doors, a large stone, or a 
block of wood, may be used as stake, while the players may 
use rocks or tin cans as "ducks." 

The guard places his '' duck " on the stake, and the other 
players try to knock it off with their ''ducks," throwing 
from a line about fifteen to twenty feet away from the stake. 
As long as the guard's duck is not knocked off, he may 
tag any player who picks up his duck and tries to run to 
home-base (the throwing line) with it ; if a player but 
touches his duck, the guard may tag him if he can ; if, how- 
ever, any player succeeds in knocking off the duck, all the 
players may, as long as the duck has not been replaced on 
the stake by the guard, pick up their ducks and run home. 
Of course the guard replaces the duck on the stake as quickly 
as possible, and until he succeeds in tagging a player, as per 
above rules, must be "it." And even after having tagged a 
player he must quickly pick up his duck and run home, 
lest the party tagged get ahead of him in placing his duck 
on the stake. 



806 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

The guard can tag a player only witliin the square. If 
he succeeds in catching some one, he in turn must seek to 
escape from the square before the new guard can place his 
duck on the stake. 

All players, of course, strive to regain their sacks or ducks 
so long as the guard is engaged in placing liis own ; those 
who are successful being entitled to throw from the line again 
upon the given signal, while the unsuccessful ones linger 
outside the square, and await the next opportunity to regain 
their ducks. After a while the throwing distance may be in- 
creased, in order to make the game more interesting ; it 
frequently occurring tlien that no one will succeed in dis- 
placing the guard's duck, when it behooves the guard to be 
watchful that *no one enters his trust, since a misdirected 
run may end in freeing all players, who are standing around 
watchful for a chance to grab their ducks. 

CROSS-TAG. 

This game may be played by any number of persons in- 
or out-doors. If played out-doors there should be no goal, 
or limit to the playgrounds, all players promiscuously par- 
ticipating in the game, as opportunity offers, without any 
special order. If played in-doors a large square or circle, 
formed by the playei-s, should indicate the space in which 
the game is played. 

As a rule one of the players volunteers to be '"it; " if not, 
they decide after their own manner who shall be ''it." The 
player who is "it" calls out that he will catch some other 
player, calling him h\ name, and starts after liim. Any 
other player may at any time cross between these two, Avhen 



RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 307 

the one who is it must try to catch the one who crossed be- 
tween him and the one whom he started out to catch. Of 
course this crossing may be repeated ad libitum^ until the 
right party is tagged. 

-WOOD-TAG. 

Any number of players take part in the game, and all must 
run to place one or both feet on a piece of wood. The last 
one to do this is ''it," and must try to tag any one of the 
players whenever they leave their "wood." As soon as he 
succeeds in this, the party tagged becomes " it." 

This is an out-door game, and if played in-doors ''the 
Avood " would have to be something else. 

PUSSY WANTS A CORNER. 

All the players run for a tree or post or some designated 
spot (a circle traced on the ground, or marked off with chalk) ; 
and the one who gets a place or "corner" last is "it," or is 
*' Pussy," and must go from player to player, saying, " Pussy 
Avants a corner ; " while the players reply, " Go to the next 
neighbor." During this time the players having corners ex- 
change places, any player having the right to take any corner 
as soon as it is unoccupied. As soon as Pussy succeeds in 
getting a corner, the player without a corner is "it." 

FOOT IN THE HOLE. 

A ring twelve to twenty-four inches in diameter is drawn 
on the floor or ground. A stands with one foot in the ring, 
and B^ hopping on one leg, endeavors to push him out of 
the ring, both with arms crossed abreast (similar to Fig. 272, 



308 



GERMAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



only A must have both feet on the floor). A loses if pushed 
out of the ring; B, if he touches the floor with the other foot. 
Good players may defy two attacking parties. 




Fig. 272. 
PULLING OVER THE LINE. 

A line is drawn ; and two players on either side of it face 
each other, grasping each other's wrists (or a ring-strap while 
sitting). At the word, Ready! both bend low; and at the 
word. Pull ! try to pull each other across the line (Fig. 273). 




Fig. 273. 
PUSHING WITH THE WAND, 



Two or more boys take hold of a wand, and try to push 
each other across a drawn line (same as above) (Figs. 274,. 



BUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 



309 




Fig. 274. 




Fig. 275. 




Fig. 276. 



310 



GERM A N-A M ERICA N G YMNA S TICS 



275, and 276). If a long wand is used, four or more boys may 
take hold of the wand. 

WRESTLING CIRCLE (POISON SNAKE). 

The players form a circle, grasping hands firmly ; in the 
centre of the circle a light Indian club is placed, or the 
players' hats are piled up on the floor. Each player tries to 
push the others against the club so as to knock it over. The 
one upsetting the club or hats steps out, and the others con- 
tinue with the game, until a victor remains (Fig. 277). 




Fig. 277. 

TUG OF WAR. 

The players choose two sides, divided as equally as possible 
in regard to number and strenr/th. The players face each 
other, firmly grasping with both hands a strong, thick rope. 
At a given signal they begin to pull or tu(/ Avith all their 
might ; and the side succeeding in pulling the other over a 
designated distance, or rendering the players incapable of 
further resistance, wins. 

Should no rope be handy, the players form sides by en- 
circling each other's waist. 



BUNNING Ayn OTHER GAMES 



311 



SACK-BEETLE. 

The players sit on the floor in a circle, with their feet 
towards the centre and their knees closed and bent. The one 
who is "it," is called the "centre-player," and must try to get 
hold of the sack-beetle, which the players pass rapidly from 
one to the other under their knees. As soon as the centre- 
player succeeds in getting the sack-beetle, the player in wdiose 
hands it was found must be 
" it." Whenever the centre- 
player happens to turn his 
back to any player who has 
the sack-beetle, this player 
may throw it at the centre- 
player. If the centre -player 
guesses correctly who 
threw the beetle, the one 
who threw it must be 
"it." 

STICK WRESTLING. 

Two boys in sidestraddle position face each other, and 
grasp a stick with right-hand reversed grip, and common left- 
hand grip, and at a signal both wrestle for the stick. Who- 
ever loses his grip, loses the game (Fig. 278). 




PRISON-BARS. 

The players form an open circle by grasping wrists, with one 
player in the middle who is " it." The prisoner in the centre 
endeavors to get out by all fair means, such as leaping, jump- 
ing, pushing, etc., or breaking the line. The others must try 



312 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

to prevent his escape. The one to the left (or right) where 
tlie centre-player breaks through the circle must be "it." 

BEETLE-GOES-ROUND. 

The players form a circle, standing with their hands grasped 
backward. One then goes around on the outside of the circle 
with the beetle (generally a knotted handkerchief) in his hand, 
and cries out : '' Look before you, don't look 'round, or w^ith 
the beetle I'll you pound." The players must look straight 
before them, any one looking around receiving a slap with the 
beetle. As soon as the player who is " it " sees fit he places 
the beetle in the hands of another player, and continues on his 
round just as before. After a few moments the player who 
got the beetle drives his right-hand neighbor around the circle, 
beating him with the beetle until he has again reached his 
place. The one who was '^ it" first takes the place of the player 
to whom he gave the beetle, while the latter must be "it." 

CAT AND MOUSE. 

The players form a circle, grasping each other's hands, and 
standing about arm's length apart. One of the players on 
the outside of the circle, called "the cat," cries out, "Mousey, 
mousey, do come out ; " while another, on the inside of the 
circle, called "the mouse," answers, "No, JNIiss Cat, I won't 
come out." — "Then I'll break into your house, and I'll catch 
you, INIrs. Mouse," cries the cat, and makes for the mouse. 
During the chase the players do all in their power to prevent 
the cat from catching the mouse, by blocking her way in all 
possible manners, while, on the other hand, they facilitate the 
escaping of the mouse. As soon as the cat has caught the 
mouse, two other players take their places. 



RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 313 

GARDEN SCAMP. 

This game is similar to the one described above as Cat and 
Monse. While in Cat and Mouse the players blockade the 
cat's way, in this game they do not do this ; and both the 
gardener and the scamp are inside the ring. The gardener 
says, "What are you doing in my patch? " — "Eating berries," 
replies the scamp. "Who let you in?" continues the gar- 
dener. " No one," answers the scamp, skipping away, with 
the gardener after him. Lest he succeed too quickly in 
catching the scamp, the gardener is compelled to pass through 
the same " holes " . through which the scamp went ; he may 
also be compelled to imitate the actions of the scamp, such as 
crawling, hopping on one leg, etc., and not until he succeeds 
in capturing the scamp is the game ended, and tAvo new 
players take the place of the gardener and the scamp. 

SKIP AWAY. 

The players form a circle, standing with hands grasped 
backwards. One of the players remains outside of the circle, 
and is " it." He must tap any one of the players on the back, 
and then he and the player whom he tagged must run around 
the circle in opposite directions. The one to reach the open 
place in the circle last is "it." 

The runners must, if so agreed upon, make a low bow, or 
shake hands, or perform some antic, as they meet in their run 
around the circle. 

JACOB, W^HERE ART THOU? 

The players form a circle as above, with two of their num- 
ber inside the circle, both of Avhom are blindfolded. The blind- 



314 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

folded players are called Jacob and Ruth respectively. Ruth 
calls for Jacob, saying, " Jacob, where art thou ? " and he 
must answer, '' Here I am," trying his best, being governed 
by the sound of Ruth's voice, to evade her. Ruth, on the 
other hand, seeks, from the sound of Jacob's voice, to, locate 
and catch him. As soon as she has succeeded in doing this, 
two other players take the j^lace of Jacob and Ruth. 

It need hardly be said that both Jacob and Ruth may be 
boys or girls, or one of them a girl and the other a boy. 

PASSING THE BEAN-BAG. 

The players form a circle, standing from four to eight feet 
apart. A bean-bag is passed from one to the other, either to 
the left or right ; and when one bag has been passed around the 
circle two or three times, a second bag is added, then a third, 
and so on, until as many bags are circulating as can be handled 
by the players. 

The game may be varied by passing the sacks sidcAvays 
forward, backward, overhead, etc., positions to be taken 
accordingly. 

LAST COUPLE OUT (FIG. 279). 

An uneven number of players pair off, and the couples form 
a column, one couple standing behind the other. The player 
who was left when the couples formed is '^ it," and takes his stand 
in front of the first couple. He (or she) claps hands three 
times, whereupon the last couple runs forward on either side 
of the column, and endeavors to grasp hands before the player 
who is " it " succeeds in tagging one of them. 

If the couples are made up of boys and girls, the player 
at the head of the column, if a boy, must tag the girl, and vice 



nUNNING AND OTHEli GAMES 



315 



versa; and the partner of the boy or girl tagged must then be 
"it." If the couple succeed in evading the player in front of 
the column, and grasp hands before he tags them, they take 
their place at the head of the column, and the game continues. 
The player in front must not turn around to see which way 
the players are coming. If successful in catching one of them, 
places are exchanged with the child caught by joining hands 




Fig. 279. 

with its former mate at the head of the group, as the first pair. 
The player caught now stands at the head of the group and 
gives the signal, the game proceeding until all have had their 
turn at running to the front. 

BANDY. 

Two groups of players form rows opposite each other with a 
distance of ten to twenty feet between the rows, and far enough 
apart for each player to wield a stick or wand with which to 
strike the rubber ball. 



316 GERMAN-AMEBICAN GYMNASTICS 

Players stand behind each other, the rows facing in oppo- 
site directions. The duty of each player is to guard the open- 
ing in front of him, so that the ball does not pass through. 
The ball is hit alternately by both sides, the player missing 
the ball and alloAving it to pass him being assigned to the 
opposite rank. The game continues until one side loses too 
many men, when new sides are chosen. 

SCULPTOR. 

One of the players, called ''the sculptor," arranges the 
other players in different postures and attitudes as statues. 
No player dares move or speak, for as soon as he does the 
sculptor punishes him by beating him with a knotted hand- 
kerchief (the sack-beetle). 

After having arranged the players to suit his fancy, the 
sculptor leaves the plaj'ground, saying, " The sculptor is not 
at home." No sooner is he gone than the ''statues" come 
to life, sing, dance, jump, and play havoc in general. • 

On the return of the sculptor he counts, " one, two, three ! " 
and any player who is not in his former posture at three 
receives a beating with the knotted handkerchief from the 
sculptor. Should the sculptor punish the wrong statue, all 
the players rush at him with knotted handkerchiefs, and 
drive him to a goal previously decided upon, and the game 
is resumed w^ith some other player as sculptor. 

COCK AND HENS. 

Two opposite goals are chosen. Between these stands 
the cock, while all the other players (the hens) are in one 
of the goals. 



RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 317 

The cock calls : — 

"The cock crows once, the cock crows twice, 
A sack full of wheat, a basket of rice ! 
All you hens, flee ! flee ! 
The one I catch, I'll take home with me." 

At this the hens make for the other goal. The one 
caught by the cock is obliged to carry him on his back to 
the opposite side of the playground, and then to take his 
place as cock. 

BATTERING- RAM. 

The players join hands and form a circle, with one player 
on the inside and one on the outside of the circle. The 
latter, called the "ram," tries to get out of the circle, in ant/ 
way he can ; and the outside player must do all in his power 
to assist him. If he succeeds in getting out, the players to 
the right and left of the place where he made his escape 
take the place of the ram and his assistant. 

HARE. 

The players grasp hands and form a circle around the 
hare, crying, " Hare, oh, hare, how did you get into the 
patch?" The hare replies, ''I jumped in." They then cry, 
'' Then see if you can get out," whereupon the hare tries by 
all possible means to escape. Should he succeed, the players 
pursue him, and the one catching him is hare. 

BLACK MAN. 

The players select two opposite goals, one of which the 
black man takes, while all the other players go to the oppo- 
site goal. The black man, on leaving his base, calls out, 



318 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

"Are you afraid of the black man?" whereupon the other 
players cry, "No, not of one like you," and start for the 
opposite goal. The black man must try to tag as many of 
the players while on their way to the opposite goal as he 
can ; and every player tagged joins the black man and helps 
him tag other players, until all the players shall have been 
caught. In the new game the one first tagged by the black 
man, is ''it." 

LAME GOOSE. 

A goal is selected to which one of the players, called the 
"lame goose," repairs. The other players call out to him, 
"Lame goose, lame goose, can't catch anybody," and run 
up and down in front of his goal, tantalizing him in all 
manners conceivable. " Can't I, though," replies the lame 
goose, and starts after the players. He must not, however, 
run after them, but must take three steps only, and then 
hop on one leg, and as soon as he "breaks," all the players 
rush at him and drive him to his goal, pommelling him on 
the back with their fists, until he has reached it. If, how- 
ever, the lame goose succeeds in tagging one of the players, 
he joins the other players in driving the one tagged to the 
goal, as described above, and the player tagged is "it." 

PRISONER'S BASE. 

Two sides of equal numbers occupy two opposite goalso 
At a certain distance, not too far from their goal, each side 
has another base, generally designated by a post or a circle 
drawn on the ground, called "Prisoner's Base," where any 
player caught in the manner hereafter described is kept 
prisoner. One of the sides starts the game, by giving "a 



BUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 319 

dare," i.e., one of the players leaves his goal, and ventures 
as near to that of the enemy as he dares. The opposite side 
sends out a player to tag the darer, while the darer's side 
immediately sends out a second man who ''covers " the darer, 
and tries to tag the player Avho came out after the darer. 
The first side follows suit, and so on, until one or more 
players are caught, or all the players shall have returned 
to their goals. During all this time the player who left his 
goal last has the right to tag any player of the opposite side 
who left his goal before he did, and any player may at any 
time return to his goal, whereupon the one who started out 
after him will, of course, do the same. 

If any players are caught, they are conducted to the 
prisoner's base above mentioned, and can be freed only if 
one of their side succeeds in tagging one of them before 
the other side can send out a player to prevent this. Any 
side succeeding in making prisoners of all the players but 
one of the other side wins the game ; for one player alone 
cannot continue the game, as the goals must at all times be 
guarded ; if it is left unguarded at any time, and one of the 
enemy succeeds in entering it, the game is lost.. 

The sending out of players to " cover " another player 
may be done at the direction of a " captain," who also 
appoints one of the players as "goal-guard;" or each player 
may use his own judgment in the matter. 

GUESS WHO? 

For obvious reasons this is a game for boys only. One 
of the players either volunteers or is chosen to "be down " 
or "it." He must place his head in the lap of another player, 



320 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 

who is seated, and who so holds the head of the one '' down '^ 
that he cannot see. The other players, one or more, then 
slap the one who is down with their flat hand on a prominent 
part of his body, whereupon he jumps up and guesses Avho 
slapped him. If he guesses correctly, down goes the one 
who hit him; if he guesses the wrong one, down he goes 
himself again, and the fun continues. 

THREE-HIGH, OR, TAG THE THIRD MAN. 

The players form a double circle, standing one in front 
of the other. Two players, a tagger and a runner, are -it." 
The tagger must try to tag the runner, who runs around 
the circle, and soon steps in front of any pair of players. 
The tagger must then try to tag the last or third man. If 
the tagger succeeds in tagging his man, he steps in front of 
any pair, and the party tagged makes for the "third man." 

TENDER-GREEN. 

This game is very like Black INIan, and in some places called 
so too. It differs from Black Man in that the one who is "it" 
must fold his hands, and must tag one or more of the other 
players in this position only. After he has caught one or more 
players, they must join hands, and the end players only are 
allowed to tag the other players, the players having a right 
to break through the line if they can. 

When all the players are caught, the first one tagged must 

be "it." 

THE KING'S RUN. 

• Two sides, divided as equally as possible in regard to num- 
bers and strength, stand at a convenient distance opposite each 
other, the players grasping each other" s hands firmly. Each 



BUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 321 

side has a captain, or king as he is sometimes called, who 
stands at the left end of the line. At his command one of his 
players rnns with all his might, and tries to break through tlie 
enemy's line. If he succeeds, all the players cut off from the 
captain's end of the line must cross over and join the other 
side. If he fails, he must join the enemy's side. The other 
side then sends out one of their men, and so on, until hut one 
man, the king, is left. He is allowed three trials to break 
through the enemy's line, and redeem his fallen fortunes ; but, if 
in three times he does not succeed, his side has lost the game. 

To make the game shorter, the players cut off from their 
line, and the runners who fail to break through the enemy's 
line, are out of the game until it is ended. 

NIGHT AND DAY, OR, BLACK AND WHITE. 

Two sides are chosen, and take their places at some distance 
from each other. An umpire, standing somewhere on the play- 
ground, where he may be plainly seen by the players of both 
sides, holds in his hand a disk or board, black on one, and 
white on the other side. Each side has chosen its color, 
and Avaits for the umpire to display his disk. If he displays 
the black side, the "Nights" or "Blacks" must run, with 
the " Days " or " Whites " after them, and vice versa. All the 
" Nights " Avho are tagged b}^ the " Days " before reaching a 
goal agreed upon are prisoners, and are out of the game until 
a new one begins. 

The side losing all its players loses the game. 



322 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



ROUNDEL 

Bv WM. A. STECHER 

A Roundel is a gymnastic composition, and is generally 
accompanied by music. 

A Roundel should not be practised or drilled for its own sake ; 
but it should be the result of class-work in tactics, fancy steps, 
free exercises, wand and club exercises, and so on. The move- 
ments that have been learned by a class during a term must be 
arranged in such a manner that the different parts harmonize. 

The examples given below are intended to show how such 
compositions may be arranged. 

MARCH ROUNDELS 
I 
The class is formed in a circle opened half distance facing 
inward, and divided into ranks of twos and fours (Fig. 280). 
Whenever possible, the neighbors grasp hands, and hold them 
shoulder high, with arms bent. When not otherwise em- 
ployed, all mark time. ^ ^ 

A COUNTS / % ^ \ 

1 All march backward four steps ^ n ^ \ 

and then four steps in place, 8 / '^ ^ v 

2 All march forward four steps , ^ " . 

and then four steps in place. 8 "^ 



o The ones march backward four 



•'V 



steps and then forward four ^ 

steps. 8 ^ ' ^ / 

4 The twos march backward four \ ^ ^ / 

steps and then forward four "^^ "^ , , ^ ^ 



steps. 8 

32 



-^ ^ >. -^ 
Fig. 280. 



ROUNDEL 



323 



B COUNTS 

1 All march backward four steps 3 

and then the ones forward 

four steps. 8 "^ 

2 The ones backward four steps 

and return, the twos forward 
four steps and four steps in 
place. 3 

o All backward four steps and 1 

then the twos forward four 
steps. 8 

4 The twos backward four steps 2 

and return, the ones forward 
four steps and four steps in 
place. 



_8 
32 



The ones circle left around the 

twos (Fig. 281). 
The twos circle right around 

the ones 



corxTs 
Both circle left grasping left 

hands. 8 

Both circle right grasping right 
hands. 8 

"32 



The ones four steps forward 
and backward, the twos four 
steps backward and forward. 8 

Both circle left grasping left 
hands, which are raised up- 
ward. 8 

The twos four steps forward 
and backward, the ones four 
steps backward and forward. 8 

Both circle right grasping right 
hands, which are raised up- 
ward. 8 

32 



.'-- --J< -t ,-, 


\ "^ .-■' 


^ V- : 


; yC :\----' 


"*•-'' 


•• > <L--. 


.--^.y 




^-...-vX \ 


{' /a.; 






}¥v-'' 










U^ 


(■ ^A 




>m; 


''H 




\^^ 


X. 




.-■-% 


-A'-. 






.•' \^ ■•• 




.'-> 




/'■ X"" 




*\ 1 •' ^ 


-.,(V : 



Fig. 281. 



II 



Fig. 282. 



The scholars are formed in a front column composed of 
Tanks of fours; the arms are crossed with the neighbors' 
(Fig. 282). 



324 



GER3IAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



A COUNTS 

The ranks a quarter wheel left 
and forward four steps. 8 

The ranks backward four steps 
and a quarter wheel right 
backward. g 

The ranks a quarter wheel 
right and forward four steps. 8 

The ranks backward four steps 
and a quarter wheel left back- 
ward. 8 

32 



B 

1 The odd ranks a quarter wheel 

left and four steps in place, 
and the even ranks a quarter 
wheel right and four steps in 
place. 8 

2 All four steps forward and 

backward. 8 

3 All odd ranks a quarter wheel 

right backward and four steps 
in place, and all even ranks a 
quarter wheel left backward. 8 

4 All four steps forward and 

backward. s 

32 



C COUNTS 

1 The ranks a complete wheel 

left. ~ 16 

2 The ranks a complete wheel 

right. 



1 The odd ranks a complete 

wheel left, and the even 
ranks a complete wheel right. 

2 The odd ranks a complete 

wheel right, and the even 
ranks a complete wheel left. 

1 The odd ranks one half wheel 

left and right, and the even 
ranks one half wheel right 
and left. 

2 The odd ranks one half wheel 

right and left, and the even 
ranks one half wheel left and 
right. 



1 The ranks a quarter wheel and 
then four steps forward; re- 
peat three times, the odd 
ranks wheeling to the left, 
the even to the right. 



16 
32 



16 



32 



16 



32 



III 

Sixteen scholars are formed 
in a front column in connected 
ranks of four (see Fig. 282). 

A COUNTS 

The first rank wheels in a circle 
left, the others marching for- 
ward and following, until all 
are formed in a cross left 
(Fig. 283). 32 



Fig. 283. 



BOUNDEL 



325 



1 The ranks a quarter wheel 

right and four steps in place. 8 

2 The ranks a quarter wheel left 

backward and four steps in 
place. 8 

3 The ranks a quarter wheel left 

and four steps in place. 8 

4 The ranks a quarter wheel 

right backward and four 
steps in place. 



The ranks a quarter wheel left 
and four steps in place ; re- 
peat three times. 

D 

The odd ranks a quarter wheel 
left and four steps in place, 
and the even ranks a quarter 
wheel right and four steps in 
place. 



_8 
32 



32 



2 All four steps forward 

backward. 

3 The odd ranks a quarter wheel 

right backward and four steps 
in place, and the even ranks 
a quarter wheel left back- 
ward and four steps in place. 

4 All four steps forward and 

backward. 



E 

1 The ranks a half Avheel right. 

2 The ranks a complete wheel 

left. 

3 The ranks a half wheel riaht. 



The ranks four steps forward 
and a quarter wheel left ; re- 
peat three times. 



COl'NTS 

and 



8 

_8 
32 



1(5 

_8 
32 



32 



I Y 



Any even number of ranks of four can take part in this 

Roundel. They stand formed in a front column (see Fig. 

282). 



COUNTS 

The first rank marches in a 
circle left, the others march 
forward and follow to a star 
left (Fig. 284). 32 



B 

On the first count all face to the 
right, and then the leader of 
each rank marches to a large 
circle left (Fig. 285). 32 



>^ 



^ 



y<' 









^ 
^ 



X 

^ 



>^ 



>' 



X 



v^ 



Fig. 284. 



326 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 






V. 






-7 



F/g. 2S5. 



C COUNTS 

1 On the first count the leader of 

each rank marches in a small 
circle left (each rank has a 
circle for itself ) (Fig. 286). 16 

2 On the seventeenth count the 

leader of each rank marches 
to the common centre (to re- 
form the star). 8 

3 Then the leaders countermarch 

left, and all face to the left, 
and stand as in Part A. _8 

32 



u- 









r7 

Fig. 286. 



D COUNTS 

1 On the first count the odd ranks 

face right, march forward, 
circling left around the even 
ranks, and back into place 
(Fig. 287). i^ 

2 On the seventeenth count the 

even ranks face right, march 
forward, circling right around 
the odd ranks, and back into 
place. J^ 



I- ;^ 

^ y "x 7^ • 

-- ' x.:.%--' 

F\g. 287. 



E 

1 On the first count the odd ranks 

face right, march forward 
four steps, countermarch left, 
march to the centre, again 
countermarch left, and form 
into place. ^^ 

2 The even ranks then repeat 

the above. i2. 

32 



MO UN DEL 327 

F COUNTS ,._ _ 

1 On the first count all the ranks ,-''' ~'^/ 

face right, the odd ranks /' ^ 

then march into a large cir- /'' .-V^^ ^ / ^ ^ 

cle left, the even ranks in a / /'' x ^ 

somewhat smaller circle rjo-ht / ' ^ 

(in two concentric circles) I j 

(Fig. 288). 10 \ \ ^ -^ 

The even ranks then march 
to the centre, countermarch \ '\ ,*^ 

right, and face left (in their \ '*^^ ---''' 

former place). 
The odd ranks follow in the \,.^ ,.A 

same manner when arriving "'7 " 

opposite to their places. ' 32 ^'^' '^^^' 



X 

\ 



328 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



RING ROUNDEL 



Bv DR. KARL ZAPP 



To be executed b}^ twenty-four girls. 

Arrangement of Class. — Two front lines of twelve 
(Fig. 289), each line subdivided into ranks of sixes, fours, 
threes, and couples. 

The arms are chained, each girl holding Avith one hand the 
ring of her second neighbor (cross arms and grasp hands). 



Fig. 289. 



PART I. 



Introduction {iancy steps ad libitum). 



1 Forward on the toes with swinging 

of the legs forward. i 16 counts. 

2 The same, witli swinging tlie legs 

crosswise and bending tlie head 
sideways. 10 counts. 

3 Forward, with cross step backward. 

16 counts. 

4 The same, combined with turning 

the trunk and bending the knees. 

16 counts. 10 

o Forward, with cross step left and 
right, or polka step. 16 counts. 

6 Double schottische (like heel and 
toe polka), touching the toe for- 
ward and backward. 16 counts. 

^ Note. — Line one advances, executing the designed steps, then the 
line separates into two lines of six, which wheel backward (thus clearing the 
way for line two), then face towards the rear and march to their starting-places, 
while line two has begun with the movements that line one has just finished. 



7 Tlie same, with bending the trunk 
backward and forward. 

16 counts. 

8 The same step, touching the feet 
sideways, and crosswise, and 
bending the trunk sideways. 

16 counts. 

9 Gallop step (4 left and 4 right). 

8- counts. 

All march forward to the centre 
(8), divide into fours, forming a 
star (see Fig. 284) (8), and turn 
face to face (8). 24 counts. 



RING ROUNDEL 



329 



PART II. 

Position — Face to Face. 

A — Ring Exercises. 

GROUP I. 
Arm and leg exercises. 



COUNTS 


Bend the arms, 


1 


Extend the arms outward. 


2 


Reverse, 


3-4 


Repeat, 

Raise the heels and bend the 


5-8 


arms. 


1 


Bend the knees and extend 




the arms outward. 


2 


Reverse, 


3-4 
12 



COUNTS 

Brought forward^ 12 
Repeat, 5-8 

3 Bend the arms, 1 

Bend the right knee, and raise 
or swing the left leg for- 
ward, 2 
Reverse, 3-4 
Repeat right 5-8 
Repeat left and right 9-16 

32 



GEOUP II. 
Arm and step exercises. 



Raise the arms outM-ard, 

Raise the arms upward, 

Reverse, 

Repeat, 

Raise the arms outward, 

Place the left foot obliquely 

forward. 
Reverse, 
Repeat right. 
Raise the arms outward, and 



COUNTS 


COUNTS 


1 


raise the left leg obliquely- 


2 


forward, 1 


3-4 


Raise the arms upward, swing 


5-8 


the left leg backward, and 


1 


rise on the toes of the right 


y 


foot, 2 


2 


Reverse, 3-4 


3-4 


Repeat right, 5-8 


5-8 


Repeat 3 left and right, 9-16 



32 



GROUP III. 
Arm, step, lunge, and rocking exercises. 



COUNTS 

Raise the left arm forward, 
right arm backward, with a 
step left obliquely forward, 1 

Return to position, 2 



COUNTS 

Repeat with the opposite arm 

and leg, 3-4 

Repeat left and right, 5-8 

2 The same, lunging obliquely 

forward, 1-8 



830 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



COLIMTS 



COD>'TS 



3 Lunge obliquely forward left 
and raise the arms, 
Rock the knees and bend the 

' arms, 



Rock the knees and extend 

the arms, 
Position, 

The same, lunging right, 
Repeat left and right, 



3 

4 

5-8 

9-16 

32 



GROUP IV. 

Bending the trunk backward. 



COUNTS 

Bend the trunk backward, 
and raise the arms upward, 

liOwer, 

Repeat, 

Step position left obliquely 
forward, bend the trunk 
backward, the arms upward, 

Reverse, 

Repeat with the right foot. 



1 

2 
3-8 



1-2 
3-4 

5-8 



COUNTS 

Lunge left obliquely forward, 

the arms outward, 1 

Bend the trunk backward, the 

arms upward, 2 

Reverse, 3-4 

Repeat right, 5-8 

Repeat left and right, 9-16 

32. 



GROUP Y. 
Turning of the trunk. 



Turning the trunk to 
front, raise the arms 
towards the front upwards, 
and place the feet towards 
the front in a sidestep posi- 
tion. 

Recover, 

Repeat in the opposite direc- 
tion. 

Repeat both. 

The same, lunging instead of 
step positions. 



COUNTS 

the 



1 

2 

3-4 

5-8 

1-8 



COUNTS 

Lunge sideways towards the 
front, and raise the arms 
towards the front upward, 1 

Face in opposite direction, 
and change the position of 
the arms and knees, 

Reverse, 

Opposite, 

Repeat, 



2' 
3-4 
5-8 
9-16 
v3^ 



160 counts in all. 



B — Tactics. 



COUNTS 

1 Form a star of six ranks of 

fours (Fig. 290), 8 

2 Ranks one, three, and five gal- 

lop sideways four steps and 
return, 



Ranks two, four, and 
wheel in the star at 
same time. 

Repeat three times, 



8 



COUNTS 

Gix 

the 

8. 
24 
4&- 



RING ROUNDEL 



331 



COUNTS 



COUNTS 



Form the wheel star (Fig. 291), 
Ranks two and five forming in 

the centre. 
Ranks one, three, four, and 

six wheel around in the star 

once with polka step. 
Ranks two and five form a 

circle in the centre with 



32 



hands joined overhead, and 
circle around with side- 
steps, 
Form a star and fours again ; 
and turn back to back by- 
couples (position for Part 
III.), 



40 



JL6 
96 






^ 



^ 



^ \ "^ 



\ 

V 

V 

Fig. 290. 



^ 






\ 



'3X 



\ 



X 



X 







-7- y 




X 

Xi 


X 




\ 



Fig. 291. 



PART III. 

Position — Back to Back. 
A — Ring Exercises. 

GROUP I. 
Arm, step, lunging, and trunk exercises. 



Raise arms outward with step 

forward. 
Raise the arms overhead with 

step backward, 
Reverse, 

Repeat with opposite step, 
The same, lunging sideways 

toward the front, 
Raise the arms overhead, and 

bend the opposite knee. 



rNTS 




COUNTS 






Reverse, 3-4 


1 




Toward the rear, 5-8 




3 


Lunge sideways toward the 


2 




front, the arms outward, 1 


3-4 




Bend the trunk sideways to 


5-8 




the rear, the arms upward, 2 
Reverse, 3-4 


1 




Lunge toward the rear, 5-8 




4 


Repeat Exercise 3, 9-16 



32 



332 



GERMAN-AMEHICAN G YMNA S TICS 



GROUP II. 
Lunging, kneeling, and bending baclfward. 



1 Lunge left and right forward, 

raising the arms outward, 

2 Lunge forward left. 
Kneel on the right knee, 
Reverse, 
Same right, 

3 Lunge forward left, 
Bend the trunk obliquely 



CO I' NTS 


COUNTS 


1, 


backward, turning the head 


, 1-8 


toward the partner, the 


1 


arms upward, 2 


2 


Reverse, 3-4 


3-4 


Same in the opposite direc- 


5-8 


tion, 5-8 


1 


4 Repeat, 9-16 



32 



GROUP III. 
Lunging, rocking of the knees, and t-wisting of the trunk. 



COUNTS 

1 Lunge left and right side- 

ways, the arms upward, 

2 Lunge sideways left, the arms 

upward. 
Bend the right knee, the arms 

downward. 
Reverse, 
Repeat, 



1-8 
1 



COUNTS 

3 Lunge sideways left, the arms 

upward, 1 
Twist the trunk inward (face 

to face), 2 

Reverse, 3-4 

2 Repeat, 5-8 

3-4 4 Repeat Exercise 3, 9-16 

5-8 32 
96 counts in all. 



B — Tactics. 



1 Form the star of ranks of four, 

2 Form the star wheel (Fig. 

292), 
(Ranks one, three, four, and 
six form a ring around ranks 
two and five, which form 
a star of couples), 

3 Ranks one, three, four, and 

six form the ring around 
the little star with schot- 
tische step, turning of the 
trunk, and alternate raising 
and curving of the arms. 
The little star in the centre 



moves in the opposite di- 
rection with double schot- 
tische step, 

4 Pause and face about at 5, 

5 Repeat the movements of 

Exercise 3 in the opposite 
direction, 

6 Pause and face about at 5, 

7 Form the star of ranks of four, 

8 Form three lines of eights, 

9 Form three columns of twos, 
10 Take position for Part IV., 



16 

8 



16 

8 

8 



_8 
96 



RING ROUNDEL 



333 



PART IV. 

Position — A Body cx)mposed of Four Front Columns of Couples 

(Fig. 293). 

A — Ring Exercises. 

G E U P I. 
Step and lunging. 



Step position forward with 
the inner leg, and raising of 
the inner arm forward, 

Position, 

Step position sideways with 
the onter leg, and raise the 
outer arms sideways. 

Position, 

Repeat, 

Lunge forward with the inner 
leg, and raise the inner arms 
upward, 

Position, 

Lunge sideways outward with 



3 
4 

5-8 



COUNTS COUNTS 

the outer leg, and raise the 
outer arms obliquely up- 

1 ward, grasping the ring of 

2 the next neighbor, 
Position, 
Repeat, 

3 3 Lunge forward with the inner 

4 leg as in Exercise 2, 
5-8 Rock backward, and swing 

the arms down, 
Return, 

1 Position, 

2 The same outward, 
4 Repeat, 



2 
3 
4 

5-8 
9-16 
32 



y< 



/ 



V 



X 



\ 



"< 



r, X 



\ 
/ 



Fig. 292. 



Fig. 293. 



GROUP II. 



Rising on the toes and bending of the knees. 



COUNTS 



COUNTS 



1 Step position forward left, the 

arms forward, 
Rise on the toes, the arms 

upward. 
Return, 
Repeat with the other foot, 

2 Step position left backward, 
Bend both knees, the arms 

the same as in Exercise 1, 



2 
3-4 

5-8 
1 



Return, 

Right, 

No. 1 execute the Exercise 1 
left and right, 

No. 2 execute the Exercise 2 
left and right. 

Repeat, exchanging the exer- 
cises. 



32 



334 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



GROUP III. 
Bending of the trunk sideways. 



COUNTS 

Bend the trunk sideways out- 
ward and inward, alter- 
nately raising the inner and 
outer arms upward (see Fig. 
308), 

The same, with a cross step 
position simultaneously with 
the outer and inner leg. 

Lunge outward, the arms out- 
ward, 



1-i 



1-8 



COUNTS 

Bend the trunk outward, let 
go one hand and grasp the 
ring with both hands over- 



head, 
Return, 

Lunge outward as before. 
Bend the trunk inward, 
4 Repeat Exercise 3, 



2 

3-4 

5 

6-7-8 
1-8 
16 
32 counts in all. 



Fig. 294. 



B — Tactics. 



COUNTS 

Form six ranks of fours (Fig. 

294), 8 

Form two lines of twelves 

(see Fig. 289), 8 

The two lines of twelves 
change into a cross of sixes 
(Fig. 295), 8 

The cross of sixes changes 
into a cross of threes, sur- 
rounded by a square of 
threes, by the outer three 
of each six wheeling about 
their own centre (Fig. 296), 8 
o. The star of threes in the 
centre, execute 4 | 4 
wheel. 
b. The four lines forming the 
square march backward 
and forward, 8 



COUNTS 

c. And execute the twirling 
step outward (in three 
directions, one sideways 
right, the centre back- 
ward, the third sideways 
left), 8 



Fig. 295. 



DOUBLE WAND EXERCISES 



335 



COUNTS COUNTS 

6 Form the cross of sixes, 8 8 Same in the opposite direc- 

7 Line 1 and 3 execute 4 | 4 tion, 16 

wheel left, 16 9 Form six small squares of 



Line 2 and 4 execute 4 | 4 
wheel right, 



fours (for Part Y.) (Fig. 
297), 



96 



-< 



\ 



\ 



/ 
\ 



> 



/ 



■i 

A -I 

Fig. 296. 



X 



X 



\ 



V 



/ 



Fig. 297. 



PART V. 



Position — Six Small Squares of Foitrs. 

Note. — For Exercises 1 and 2, take two beats of music 
for each movement; for Exercise 3, four beats for each 
movement. 



1 Nos. 1 and 3 lunge left and 

right forward, and extend 
the arms outward, 
Nos. 2 and 4 lunge left and 
right backward, and raise 
the arras forward, 

2 N^os. 1 and 3 lunge forward, 

the arms outward. 
Rise on the toes. 
Reverse, 
Nos. 2 and 4 lunge backward, 

the arms forward. 
Kneel, the arms upward, 
Reverse, 

Same w^ith the opposite foot. 
Same, exchanging exercises, 



s'TS 


COUNTS 




3 Xos. 1 and 3 give up their 






hold, facing about in step 






position, ring overhead, 






N'os. 2 and 4 take hold of 






their rings, face to face, 




16 


Nos. 1 and 3, bend backward 
over the extended arms of 
Nos. 2 and 4, who lunge 
backward and support 1 
and 3 at the back, 






Reverse, 


16 




Repeat, 


16 




4 Exchanging exercises, 


16 




Repeat, 


16 
64 


16 


96 counts in all. 




32 







33G 



GERM A N-AMEEICA X G YMNA S TICS 



DOUBLE ^W^AND EXERCISES 



By Dr. KARL ZAPP 



To be executed by a class of girls from tliirteen to six- 
teen years of age. The partners are numbered 1 and 2, and 
stand side by side, each hand holding the end of the wand ; 
the right hands hold the upper, the left hands the lower wand 
(Fig. 298). 





Fig. 298, 



Fig. 299. 



PART I. 



Step and lunging exercises. 



COUXTS 

1 a. Left foot forward into the 
step position, with raising 
the upper wand forward, 1 

]Nrove the left foot into tlie 
step position backward, 
raising tlie upper wand 



COUNTS 

upward, and tlie lower 
wand forward (Fig. 299), 
Reverse, 
6. The same as Exercise 1, 
lunging forward with the 
left foot at the second 



2 
3-4 



DOUBLE WAND EXERCISES 



33T 



COVSTS 

count, and the right foot 
at the sixth count, 9-16 

2 a. Left foot forward, and raise 




2 
8-4 

5-8 



Fig. 300. 



COUXTS 

the upper wand upward, 1 

Move the left foot back- 
ward, and lower the up- 
per wand backward, at 
the same time raising the 
lower wand upward, 
Reverse, 

The same with the right 
foot, 

b. The same as Exercise 2, 
lunging forward at the 2 
and (Fig. 300), 9-10 

a. Inner foot forward into the 

step position, and raise 
both hands forward, 1 

Lunge forward with the 
inner foot, and raise the 
wands in triangle or slant- 
ing position, 2 

Reverse, 3-4 

b. The same, using the outer 

foot and raising the wands 
in the opposite triangular 
position, 5-8 

c. Repeat « and 6, 9-16 



PART II. 
Bending of knees and trunk. 



COUNTS 

1 a. Rise on the toes, 

and raise both 
wands forward, 

Bend arms, and 
move arms and 
wands outward 
(Fig. 301), 

Reverse, 

b. The same, but 

moving the arms 
inward, 

c. Repeat a and b, 

2 a. Rise on the toes, 

and raise both 
wands upward, 1 




Fig. 301. 



338 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 



2 
3-4 



COUNTS 

Bend the knees (deep), 

,\vitli the wands across 

the shoulder-blades, 

Reverse, 

h. The same, lowering the 

wands down backward, 5-8 
c. Repeat a and 6, 9-16 

a. Outer foot into step posi- 

tion forward, and wands 

upward. 
Turn inward on toes, the 

wands downward and 

crossed (Fig. 302), 
Reverse, 

b. The same with the inner 

foot, facing outward 
(back to back), (wands 
stay upward), 

c. Repeat a and h, 
a. Step position outward with 

the outer foot, and wands 
upward. 
Bend the trunk sideways 
outward, and cross the 
outer feet inward, cross- 
ing the wands. 





COUNTS 


Reverse, 


3-4 


The same, with step 


and 


trunk movement inward, 5-8 


Repeat a and b, 


9-16 


Pause from, 


1-4 


Turn face to face 


(the 


wands crossed), 


5 


Pause from. 


6-8 




Fig. 302. 



PART III. 
Bending of trunk. 

(Position — Face to face, the icands crossed.) 



a. Step position forward left, 

the arms outward (wands 
horizontal). 
Bend the trunk backward, 
raising the wands up- 
ward, and placing the 
hands together, 

Reverse, 

The same with the right 
foot forward, 

b. Repeat, 



rxTS 


COUNTS 




2 a. Step position forward left. 






the wands upward, the 




1 


hands together, 
Bend the trunk forward 
with hollow back and 
spread the arms outward, 


1 


2 


moving the left foot back- 




3-4 


ward into the step posi- 






tion. 


2 


5-8 


Reverse, 


3-4 


9-16 


Repeat with the right foot. 


5-8 



DOUBLE WAND EXERCISES 



339 



COUNTS 

b. Repeat left and right, 9-lG 

S a. Step position forward left, 

the wands upward as in 

Exercise 2, 1 

Bend the trunk downward 

(chest upon the knee), 



COINTS 





E 


1 


E 


■'.I: 






i:: 


:i 


h. 


1 





L 


2 






{. 


3. 


4; 


"A 

...E. 






T. 


3 





move the left leg 


back- 






ward, at the same 


time 






bending the right 


knee 






and moving the wands 






downward. 




2 




Reverse, 




y-4 




The same with the 


right 






foot. 




5-8 


b. 


Repeat left and right. 




9-10 


a 


Pause from. 




1-4 




Change position at 5, 




5 




Pause, 




6-8 

72 



Fig. 303. 

N. B. — In changing position, No. 1 changes grip of hands, moves the 
upper wand with the right arm overhead, and faces about ; at the same time 
•each set of ten couples change position as indicated by the diagram (Fig. 303). 

PART IV. 



Dissimilar Exercises. 
Executed in double time (two beats of musbc for one motion). 



COU^'TS 

Rising on toes and bending 
the knees. 

a. No. 1 step position forward 

left, the arms outward. 
Rise on the toes, the wands 

upward. 
Reverse, 
Repeat, 
No. 2, rise on the toes, the 

arms outward. 
Bend the knees (deep), 

hands on the shoulders, 
Reverse, 
Repeat, 

b. The same as «, Nos. 1 and 2 

exchanging exercises. 
Lunging and bending the 

trunk downw^ard. 
a. No. 1 step position forward 

left, the wands upward. 



1 

2 
3-4 

5-8 



2 
3-4 

5-8 

9-16 



COUNTS 

Step position backward, 
bending the trunk down- 
w'ard, moving the wands 
downward (the ends 
touching the floor), 2 

Reverse, 3-4 

The same using the right 
foot, 5-8 

No. 2, stej) position, etc., as 
in No. 1, 1 

Lunge forward and extend 
the anns forward (over 
the back of No. 1), 2 

Reverse, 3-4 

The same with the right 
foot, 5-8 

b. The same as a, Nos. 1 and 2 

exchanging exercises, 9-16 

Bending the trunk backward 
and kneelinar. 



340 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



2 
3-4 



COUNTS 

a. No. 1 step position back- 
ward left, the arms out- 
ward, J 
Bend the trunk backward ; 
move tlie left foot into 
the step position forward, 
and raise the arms up- 
ward (Fig. 304), 
Reverse, 

Repeat with the right foot, 
No. 2 step position back- 
ward right, and wands 
upward. 
Kneel on the right knee, 

the arms outward. 
Reverse, 

Repeat with the other foot, 
h. The same, Nos. 1 and 2 ex- 
changing exercises, 
t Bending trunk forward, lun- 
ging, kneeling. 
a. No. 1, bend the trunk for 
ward (hollow back) with 
a step position backward, 
the arms raised outward. 
Bend the trunk backward 
with step position for- 
ward, the arms raised 
upward. 
Reverse 



2 
3-4 

5-8 

9-16 



COUNTS 

Repeat with the right foot, 5-8 
No. 2, lunge forward left, 




2 
3-4 



Fig. 304. 

the arms raised outwards. 
Kneel, the arms outward. 
Reverse, 

Repeat with the right foot, 
b. Repeat, Nos. 1 and 2 ex- 
changing exercises, 
5 Pause, 

G Close with a grouping. 



2 

2 

3-4 

5-8 

9-16 

_8 
72 



EXEBCISES WITH HOOFS 841 



EXERCISES ^WITH HOOPS 

lU- Du. KARL ZAPP 

The hoop may be used in a very graceful and artistic man- 
ner without necessarily losing sight of what is essential in all 
exercises, — the proper adaptation to development and exertion. 
The hoop as a hand apparatus for light gymnastics is used in 
about the same manner as the wand. 

Hoops of larger size may also be used as a substitute for 
the small jumping-rope. 

As a rule, the hoops are made of light wood, and their 
dimensions vary from eighteen to thirty-six inches. 

HOOP ROUNDEL. 

Arranged for a class of girls from thirteen to eighteen years 
of age. The number of the class must be divisible by six (24, 
30, 36). The class is divided into lines of six or twelve, with 
subdivisions into threes (Fig. 305). 

2 Z 2 z 

—r- ^ ' -^ "_ ^ I 3 

2 Z Z 2. 

I 3 12, I -3 1 J 

Fig. 305. 

Each column of threes may be considered a unit, also each 
column of sixes. 

The Roundel consists of three parts, each part containing 
three subdivisions : a set of exercises ; tactics, executed with 
the waltz step or hop ; and grouping. 



342 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G Y2INA S TICS 





DIVISION OF 


CONTENTS. 








PART 


' I. 






■ 


COUNTS 




COUXTS 




COUNTS 


Exercises, 


80 


"Waltzing, 

PART 


32 

11. 


Grouping, 


16 


Exercises, 


64 


"Waltzing, 

PART 


32 

III. 


Grouping, 


16 


Exercises, 


112 


"Waltzing, 


32 


Grouping, 


16 




256 


Total, 400 


96 

counts. 




48 



In Part I. the exercises are executed left and right and 
simultaneously. 

In Part II. the exercises are executed simultaneously in 
dissimilar directions first, then the exercises are divided and 
the different files execute different exercises. 

In Part III. tlie exercises are dissimilar from the beginning. 
Music : A Waltz ^ Auf Wiedersehen "). 

This Roundel was executed by sixty young ladies of the 
Cleveland High School at the commencement exercises of 
1892. The young ladies were dressed in short, white Gre- 
cian costumes, with flowing sleeves, and the hoops were 
covered with white and twined with smilax. 



PART I. 

Step position and lunging. 

A — Exercises. 

All exercises are executed left and right. 

Starting Position. — Hoop in front of the body, held 
with both hands at the lower third, hands in a line with the 
liips. 



EXERCISES WITH HOOPS 



343 



ARRANGEMENT OF CLASS. 
(See Fig. 305.) 



COUNTS 

1 Raise the hoops sideways left 

with step position sideways 
right, 1 

Position, 2 

The same in opposite direc- 
tion, 3-4 
Repeat, 5-8 

2 The same, but hinging side- 

ways instead of step posi- 
tion, 9-16 

3 Raise the hoops obUquely up- 

w^ard left (slightly tilted), 

with crossstep forward left, 1 

Position, 2 

Opposite, 3-4 

Repeat, 5-8 

4 The same, lunging obliquely 

forward left and right, 9-16 

5 Turn the trunk (1 | 8) to the 

left, raising the arms with 
the hoop to the height of 
the shoulders, and crossstep 
backward left, 1 

Position, 2 



COUNTS 

The same opposite, 3-4 

Repeat, 5-8 

6 The same, lunging crosswise 

backward, 9-16 

7 Raise the hoops sideways left, 

with sidestep right, 1 

Raise the hoops vertically 
overhead, and close the 
heels, 2 

Lower the hoop to the oppo- 
site side with a side step left, 3 
Position, 4 

The same in the opposite di- 
rection, 5-8 
Repeat, 9-16 

8 Nos. 1 and 3 in the same direc- 

tion, lunging instead of the 

step position. 
No. 2 executes the exercises 

in the opposite direction, 1-16 
(Thus Nos. 1 and 2, and 3 and 

2, apparently form one file 

twice during this exercise. ) 



B — Waltzing. 



COUNTS 

1 Nos. 1 and 3 waltz forward 

(double hop, swinging the 
legs crosswise, the arms with 
hoop in an oblique position, 
alternately left and right), 
while No. 2 waltzes back- 
ward, 1-4 

2 Nos. 1 and 3 cross over (or 

change places). 
No. 2 executes a complete turn 
(4 I 4) to the right, holding 
the hoop over the head, 5-8 



COUNTS 

3 Nos. 1 and 3 waltz backward 

with crosshop and a swing- 
ing of the hoop. 
No. 2 waltz forward with 
crosshop and swinging of 
the hoop, 9-12 

4 No. 1 and 3 cross back to 

places. 
No. 2 turn in place, the hoop 
vertically overhead, 13-16 

5 Repeat, 17-32- 



344 



GERM A N-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



C — Grouping. 



1 Pause. 

2 At count 5, Nos. 1 and 3 lunge 

forward obliquely outward, 
the hoop is held vertically 
above the head. No. 2 lunge 
backward, the hoop held 
forward in height of the 
shoulders (all remain quiet 
4 counts). 



COUNTS 

4 



COUNTS 

At 9, change of position, 1 
and 3 lunging obliquely in- 
ward; No. 2 straighten up 
and stand on tiptoe, the 
hoop held vertically above 
the head, all remaining 
quiet, 4 counts, 9-12 

Pause from 13-16 



PART II. 
Bending of the trunk and knees. 

Two exercises are first executed simultaneously inward and 
outward, that is Nos. 1 and 3 toward each other, and No. 2 
toward each other successively ; afterward, Nos. 1 and 3 
repeat the first of the two exercises, while No. 2 repeats the 
second ; and then the exercises are changed. 



Exercises. 



COUNTS 



Turn trunk inward, with step 
position obliquely forward, 
hoop forward shoulder 
height. 

Bend the trunk backward, and 
raise the hoop overhead, tilt- 
ing it. 

Return to the former position. 

Position, 

The same in the opposite di- 
rection. 

Turn inward with step posi- 
tion backward, hoop verti- 
cally overhead, 

Bend both knees (almost to 
kneeling), the hoop in front 
of the face, with bent arms 
(Fig. 306), 



o 
4 

5-8 



COUNTS 

Return to the former position, 3 
Position, 4 




Fig. 306. 

The same in the opposite di- 
rection. 



o-i 



EXERCISES WITH HOOPS 



345 



conxTs 
Nos. 1 and 3 execute Exercise 

1; No. 2, Exercise 2, 1-8 

Nos. 1 and 3 execute Exercise 

2; No. 2, Exercise 1, 9-16 

Raise the hoop vertically over- 
head, with step position for- 
ward of inner foot, 1 




Fig. 307. 

Bend the trunk downward, 
with a long stride backward 
of the advanced foot, and 
bending of the opposite 
knee, swinging the hoop 
down and backward (Fig. 
307), 

Eeturn to the former position, 

Position, 

The same opposite, 5 

■6 Raise the hoop obliquely up- 

B — 

CO UN 

1 Nos. 1 and 6 (see Fig. 309), 
circle around Nos. 2 and 5 
with the same step and 
swinging of the hoops as 



COUNTS 

ward inward, with a side- 
step inward, 1 
Bend the trunk sideways in- 
ward, and swing the hoop 
in a semicircle to an oblique 
position outward, crossing 
the inner foot in front (Fig. 
308), 2 




Fig. 308. 

Return to position 1, 
Position, ^ 

The same opposite, 
7 Nos. 1 and 3, Exercise 5 ; No. 

2, Exercise 6, 
9 Nos. 1 and 3, Exercise 6; No. 
2, Exercise 5, 



1-8 



9-16 
64 



Waltzing. 

TS COUNTS 

in Part I. Nos. 2 and 5 
standing in a posing posi- 
tion (crossstep, the hoop in 
an oblique position, trunk 



346 



GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS 



COUXTS 

slightly bent sideways in- 
ward), 1-8 

Nos. 3 and 4 with the hoops 
in the left hand, cross these, 
and both circle round a com- 
mon centre (Fig. 309). 

Nos. 2 and 5 execute the cir- 
cling around 1 and 6. Nos. 
3 and 4 face about, join 
right hands, and circling 
round a common centre, 



COUNTS 

hold the hoop nicely in an 
elevated position in the left 



hand, 
Repeat, 



9-16 
17-32 



"^— ...■ 



Fig. 309. 



C — Grouping. 



COUNTS 



COUNTS 



1 Pause, 

2 Nos. 1 and 3 surrounding No. 

2, lunge inward obliquely 
in the direction of No. 2 
(forming a star), the hoops 
in a slanting position. No. 
2 crossstep position, slightly 
bent sideways, the hoop en- 
circling the face. 



Nos. 1 and 3 bend the oppo- 
site knee and the body out- 
ward, and swing the hoop 
outward. 

No. 2 kneel and raise the hoop 
over the head, 9-12 

Pause, 4 counts, 13-16 



5-8 



PART III. 
Step position, lunging, balancing, etc. 

r 

A — Exercises. 

The files begin with dissimilar exercises in dissimilar 
directions. 



COUNTS 



1 a. Nos. 1 and 3 step position 
sideways inward, the 
hoop sideways in the 
same direction, 

Swing the hoop in a semi- 
circle overhead to the 
other side, with a cross- 
step in front. 

Return, 

Position, 

In the opposite direction, 



No. 2 face inward (1 | 4 
turn) with a step position 
backward and the hoop 
overhead. 

Face about 1 | 2 turn and 
bend downward, bending 
the arms slightly. 

Resume position 1, 

Position, 

In the opposite direction. 



b. Repeat the entire exercise, 9-16 



EXERCISEIS WITH J I OOPS 



347 



COrNTS 

2 Xos. 1 and 3 take the exer- 

cise of No. 2 ; No. 2 take the 
exercise of Nos. 1 and 3, 1-lG 

3 a. Nos. 1 and 3 lunge inward 

towards No. 2, forming a 
star with the hoop raised 
in an oblique direction 
to the opposite side, 1 

Rock the knees, and swing 
the hoop in ? semicircle 
to the opposite side, 2 

Resume the former posi- 
tion, 3 

Position, 4 

The same in the opposite 
direction, 5-8 

No. 2 step position back- 
ward and bend the knee, 
the hoop encircling the 
face, 1 

Rise and raise the hoop 
overhead, 2 

Resume the former posi- 
tion, 3-4 

Repeat with the opposite 
foot, 5-8 

b. Repeat the whole exercise, 9-16 

4 a. Nos. 1 and 3 march back- 

ward withfollowstep and 
rising on the toes, at the 
same time raising the 
hoop overhead (the hoop 
is elevated at 1, and low- 
ered at 2), 1-8 

Repeat the marching, but 
forward to places, 9-16 

No. 2, balancing exercises. 



COUNTS 

Raise the hoop forward, 
and raise the left leg 
backward, 1 

Move the hoop vertically 
upward and the leg for- 
ward, 2 

Resume the former posi- 
tion, 3-4 

Repeat with the right leg, 5-9 

Repeat left and right, 9-16 

b. Nos. 1 and 3 execute the 
balancing exercises of 
No. 2, while No. 2 takes 
the exercises of Nos. 1 
and 3, marching forward 
and backward, 1-16 

5 a. Nos. 1 and 3, step position 
forward with the inner 
foot, the hoop overhead, 
and the trunk bent back- 
ward, 1-4 

Straighten the trunk grad- 
ually and lower the 
hoops, 5-8 

Step position backward 
with the inner foot; bend 
the trunk gradually 
downward, and lower the 
hoop to the floor, 9-12 

Straighten the trunk gradu- 
ally and raise the hoop, 13-16 

Nos. 1 and 3 turning half 
toward each other 1 | 8 
turn, during the first 8 
counts, and then turning 
outward, 1-16 



B — "Waltzing. 



COUNTS 

Nos. 1 and 3 surrounding 
No. 2, waltz around No. 2, 
holding the hoops in the 



COUNTS 

hands, and toward the cen- 
tre of the star ; No. 2 pos- 
ing, 1-8 



348 



GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 



COUNTS 

No. 2 kneeling, the hoop en- 
circling the face, Nos. 1 and 
3 face about, circling in the 
opposite direction, crossing 



COU>fTS 



their hands above No. 2 and 
holding the hoops nicely ele- 
vated outM^ard, 9-16 
Repeat, 1-10 



C — Grouping. 

COUNTS 

The groups are arranged in accordance with the exercises and the 
vraltzing, 1-16 



